Bible Software. Version 7.4. User s Guide

Transcription

1 Bible Software Version 7.4 User s Guide

2

3 Accordance Bible Software Version 7.4 User s Guide OakTree Software, Inc.

4 Welcome to Accordance Accordance offers a unique combination of the most powerful Bible study software available anywhere, together with a deceptively simple interface which is easy to learn and use. Whether you are a new user or already familiar with Accordance, we recommend that you use the documents on the CD-ROM, and the Accordance Help with Tutorial, to get an overview of the features of the software. This manual is a comprehensive explanation of the features of Accordance. It contains information and examples that help you learn to use the software in a more efficient manner. Some features of Accordance are so powerful that you probably will not see all the implications of these features when you first use the software. The manual contains insights gained through extensive use and testing of the software. Technical support is provided by OakTree Software, Inc. Website: Telephone: (407) Fax: (407) Support@accordancebible.com Accordance software by Roy B. Brown Accordance manual by Helen A. Brown This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, neither this manual nor the software may be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of OakTree Software, Inc., except for disk backup purposes or as specified in a separate site license agreement, if applicable. Under the law, copying includes translation into another language or format, or transmission from one computer to another over a network OakTree Software, Inc. 498 Palm Springs Drive, Suite 100 Altamonte Springs, FL Accordance is a registered trademark, and AccordIt, Helena, Yehudit, and Rosetta are trademarks of OakTree Software, Inc. Apple, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. System 7, OS 8, OS 9, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. LaserGREEK, SuperGreek, LaserHEBREW, SuperHebrew, and Hebraica II are registered trademarks of Linguists Software. Alexandria and Jerusalem are trademarks of Zondervan Corporation. The CD-ROM and manual are warranted to be free of physical defects for 90 days after you receive this product. If a defect is found within this 90 day period, return the defective item postage prepaid for a replacement. This software has been thoroughly reviewed and tested and will be supported with periodic upgrades. However, except as specifically stated above, there are no other warranties, express or implied, regarding the enclosed product, its merchantability, or its fitness for any particular purpose. This software is sold as is, and the purchaser assumes the entire risk as to its quality and performance. APPLE COMPUTER, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ENCLOSED COMPUTER SOFTWARE PACKAGE, ITS MERCHANTABILITY, OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS PERMITTED IN SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY PROVIDES YOU WITH SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. THERE MAY BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT YOU HAVE WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.

5 Contents Introduction Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Installation and First Time Launch Introduction System Requirements Installation Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance Registering Your Copy of Accordance Setup Assistant Setting Up Types of Files in Accordance Copying Modules Moving and Naming the File Icons Cleaning up the Accordance Folder The Accordance Fonts Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance Using a Module from a Different Location Preference Files Important Backups Multiple Users User Files Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9) Getting Help The Documentation on the Disk The Accordance User s Guide Accordance Help Getting Oriented Key Accordance Concepts The Accordance Interface Understanding Windows Description of the Search Window Contextual Menus Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes Setting Defaults Floating Windows and Arrange Modules The Resource Palette Arranging and Adding Modules The Instant Details Box

6 Contents Searching the Bible 2 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Viewing the Text Working with Text Panes The Text Navigating through the Text Selecting and Marking Verses Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel Changing the Display in a Text Pane Comparing Texts Verse Matching and Discrepancies Selecting and Copying Text Doing Searches Using the Search Entry Section The Search Text Pop-up Menu Displaying a Text by Reference Defining Search Arguments Expressions in Accordance Entering Words and Phrases Setting the Search Field Search Ranges Search Symbols and Commands Searches Using Symbols Searches Using Commands Connecting Commands Stand-alone Commands Using Multiple Commands in a Search Linking Search Arguments Searching the Contents of Another Window Searching the Word List of Another Window Keyed Bible Texts Working with Keyed Bible Texts Getting More Information Searches Using Key Numbers Search Arguments with Key Numbers Different Key Number Schemes German Bibles with Lemmas Graphical Searches Introduction to Constructs The Simple Construct Window Using a Construct The Element Items The Connecting Items Using Multiple Construct Windows

7 Contents Digging Deeper Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Getting Details The Details Workspace Characteristics of Details Windows Graphs and Charts Hits Graph Analysis Graph Analysis Bar Chart Analysis Pie Chart Table Bar Chart Analysis Concordance Table Amplify Features The Amplify Menu Using Amplify Features Special Features of Amplify Windows General Features of Amplify Windows Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts Amplify Details Amplifying Your Selection Context Parsing Syntax Speak Search Favorites Consulting Study Aids Chapter 14 Tools An Overview of Tools The Tools Window The Text Display of a Tool The Browser Pane Selecting a Range in a Tool Hypertexting in Tools General Features of Tools Windows Amplifying with Tools Searching in Tools Additional Search Options

8 Contents Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Details for any Reference Tool The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets The Search All Window Creating and Editing Groups of Modules Amplifying to the Search All Window Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set Differences between Sets and Groups Parallels Parallel Text Modules The Parallel Window The Parallel Text Panes General Window Features Amplifying to a Parallel Window Doing your own Thing Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Color Highlighting Highlight Styles Deleting a Style The Highlight Palette Adding Highlights to Words and Verses Multiple Highlight Files Searching for Styles Reference Lists Opening a Reference List Window The Reference List Window Adding and Deleting Verses Searching the Contents User Notes Creating a User Notes File The Edit Window The User Notes Window The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window Setting Defaults for User Notes Amplifying to User Notes Duplicating or Renaming User Notes Merging User Notes Files

9 Contents Chapter 20 Chapter 21 User Tools The User Tool Window Creating a Blank User Tool Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool The Edit Window Amplifying to User Tools Importing to a User Tool Merging User Tools Importing Bibles Preparing the Text Importing the Bible Using the Bible General Features Chapter 22 Chapter 23 Chapter 24 Chapter 25 The Workspace and Slide Show The Workspace and Tabs The Slide Show Working With Windows Types of Accordance Windows Window Features The Window Menu Duplicating Windows The Text items and Palette The Character Palette Entering Hebrew Text Other Features Contextual Menus Accordance Widgets Differences Between Accordance on Classic and Mac OS X Printing and Saving Printing the Contents of a Window Setting the Page Details Saving in Accordance Saving a Window as an Accordance File Saving Groups of Windows Saving Text in a Text File Saving Graphics as a PICT File Greek and Hebrew Export Options Unicode Transliteration

10 Contents Appendices Appendix A Setting Preferences General A-2 Appearance A-3 Text Display A-4 Tools Display A-4 Greek & Hebrew A-5 Compare Text A-6 Instant Details Box A-7 Arrange Tags A-7 Citation A-8 Speech A-10 Search Window A-10 Parallel Window A-11 User Notes Window A-11 Edit Window A-12 Map Window Layers A-12 Map Window Display A-13 Timeline Layers A-13 Timeline Display A-14 Syntax Window A-14 Appendix B Menu Reference and Key Commands Accordance Menu (in OS X) B-2 File Menu B-2 Edit Menu B-4 Search Menu B-4 Display Menu B-6 Selection Menu B-7 Amplify Menu B-8 Window Menu B-9 Help Menu B-10 Keyboard Shortcuts B-10 Appendix C Names and Symbols Working with Names C-2 Working with Symbols C-2 Punctuation C-6 Glossary Index 6

11 Installation and First Time Launch 1 Chapter Contents: Introduction System Requirements Installation Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance. 1-6 Registering Your Copy of Accordance Setup Assistant

12 1 Installation and First Time Launch Introduction Each Accordance CD-ROM includes an installer for the program, documentation, and fonts. The texts and tools which Accordance can display and search are called modules. These may be Bibles or other books, or data for the Atlas or Timeline. Each module has been specially prepared for Accordance. Each CD-ROM contains a different selection of modules, and some CD-ROMs can be purchased at different levels, with additional add-on modules available for unlocking. Some modules, and the latest version of Accordance, are available for download from the website. Summary Installation is usually easy: 1. Check the version number printed on each CD-ROM label or in the Read Me First document, and reserve the latest until last. See opposite page for details. If any CD- ROMs have a version prior to 5.7, please check the website. 2. Run the installer on each CD-ROM. Read the information following the License, and select Easy or Standard Install, or whichever other options apply to you. You will need your own password on OS X, and any unlock codes supplied in the package or on your invoice. 3. Then simply run Accordance. You may want to download and run the latest Accordance update from the website after running the other installers. Most people do not need to study the details provided in this and the next chapter. Installation details for Accordance will depend on several factors: You may be a first time Accordance user. You may be upgrading your Accordance program and modules. You may be adding modules from an earlier CD-ROM to a later version of Accordance. You may be reinstalling your old CD-ROMs on a new computer. Specific installation steps for each of these situations are included on each CD-ROM in a document called Installing Accordance. An updated summary of instructions for installing each CD-ROM on each Mac OS is posted on the website at System Requirements You can use Accordance on any Macintosh with a hard disk, CD-ROM drive, and System 7.5 to OS X or higher. On a PC it can be run on an emulator available from the website. The space required on the hard disk depends on the modules being installed. Accordance itself requires a minimum of 20 megabytes of hard disk space for installation, if you choose not to copy any modules or documentation from the CD-ROM. However, all standard Accordance installations do copy the modules to the hard disk. 1-2

13 Installation Order of Installation The order of installation is not critical for all CD-ROMs with version 5.7 or higher. However, it is usually best to install the CD-ROMs in order from the oldest to the newest. The Accordance version is usually printed on the CD label, and is always shown in the Read Me First document on the CD-ROM. All installers for 5.7 or above have the version number in red on the information page after the license. Note: It is not necessary to install an old CD-ROM if you have a newer version of the same series, except in the rare cases that a module is no longer available on the newer CD-ROM. CD-ROMs sold as upgrades always include the full modules. However, you are not entitled to sell or give the older CD-ROMs to another user. WARNING: Installers with version or earlier are NOT compatible with version 5.7 or higher. In most cases you should upgrade your CD-ROMs. If you have Classic you can install older CD-ROMs first, then those with 5.7 or higher. There may be a newer installer for a CD-ROM on the website. Sometimes you can manually install the modules by dragging them to the Accordance folder on the hard drive, and using Accordance to open them. Please see the instructions on the website. Using the Installer 1. First turn on the Macintosh computer and any external drives. You are now in the Finder looking at the Macintosh desktop. 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. 3. Double-click on the CD-ROM icon to open the Accordance CD-ROM window. On the CD-ROM you will find an Installer icon. 4. If you use Mac OS 9 or 10, double-click on this icon. On OS X the installer will request your own Mac administrator password. 5. If you have the Mac emulator on PC, or Mac OS 7 to 8, open the folder named for 68K Mac and double-click on the 68K Installer. 6. Work through the initial license and read the informative screen titled Read Me, then click Continue to reach a window like this: The window lists the various installation options. Introduction 1-3

14 1 Installation and First Time Launch 7. Normally, if you have plenty of hard disk space, you will select either Easy Install, or Standard Install, or the Level at which you purchased the CD-ROM. 8. If you do not have space, you can select just the Minimum Install to have only the software and essential files installed. All the other files can be accessed directly from the CD-ROM, but this is not recommended in most cases. 9. Below the line are optional additional groups or modules which you may have purchased and wish to install individually, using an unlock code. (Click the I information button for more information on each item.) 10. Choose the appropriate Installer items by clicking on them, and (if necessary) select the drive on which you want Accordance to be installed. Then click Install. Note: Normally you will want to install the Accordance folder on your main hard drive, but if space is limited you may prefer to install and run Accordance on a removable or alternate disk drive. Note: On the PC emulator you must create and select an additional drive for all but the smallest Accordance installation. 11. Read and dismiss any dialog boxes. 12. When the Installer requests an unlocking code, enter it in the text box and click OK. Finding the Unlock Codes Most CD-ROMs do not require unlocking codes (or passwords) at all: only certain CD-ROMs have optional levels, groups, or individual modules that require codes. You should have the unlock codes for everything you have purchased. Some CD-ROMs, such as the Library 7 or Jewish Collection, are usually packaged with the code for the purchase level inside the folder. You only need to check the level, not the items that are included in your level, plus any additional codes you have purchased. The installer will need a code for each item you check. All the groups and unlocks are shown in the installer to allow for custom unlock purchases, but everything included in a level is automatically installed with the level code. Your invoices from OakTree list all your new codes in the Description column. You should keep the invoices for future reference in case you need to reinstall. If you have free Bible unlocks with your package, you must tell us which Bibles you want and we will supply the codes, these are not automatic unlocks. If you have lost old codes, you can contact us to get them ed to you. 1-4

15 Installer Actions 1. The Installer finds your previous Accordance folder or creates a new Accordance folder on the hard drive you selected. If the Installer finds more than one folder with Accordance, it will let you select the folder for installation. If you then click New it will create a new folder. 2. Installs in the Accordance folder: The correct OS X, PowerPC, or 68k version of Accordance A Modules folder with the modules you installed in folders labeled Texts and Tools A Manuals & Documents folder Read Me First document specific to the CD-ROM A Read Mes folder with specific module documentation Words and roots files which will be moved to a Gloss folder. 3. In OS X it also installs: A new alias for Accordance may be added to the Dock Two widgets and Read Me files on the Desktop (in OS 10.4 and up) Six Accordance fonts in Library/Fonts An alias of Accordance Help in Library/Documentation/Help. 4. In older Macintosh systems, the Accordance folder also includes: A Help document that will open Accordance Help and an Accordance Help file (these files should be kept in the same folder as Accordance, but cannot be opened directly) Six Accordance fonts in the Fonts folder of the System Folder Accordance Help in the Help folder of the System Folder, or in the Accordance folder Help Viewer in the Help folder of the System Folder CarbonLib or Drag and Drop Extensions in the System Folder. 5. Updates in the Accordance folder: Any older versions of modules which are on the CD-ROM. Converts all Accordance files to the new file type. 6. Deletes from the Accordance folder : Any older copies of Accordance and some old Guide and Help files. Introduction 1-5

16 1 Installation and First Time Launch Finding and Running Your Copy of Accordance OS X In OS X you should see an icon of Accordance in the Dock. Click on the icon to launch Accordance. You can remove any old version icons by dragging them out of the Dock. If the latest version is not in the Dock, you need to find it in the Accordance folder (we put this folder on the root level of your hard drive). You can either: drag the Accordance program down to the Dock where it will create an icon, and then click the icon to run the program, or double-click on the program to run it and put the icon in the Dock temporarily. While it is running, click and hold the mouse on the icon until you see a pop-up menu, then select Keep in Dock. You may move the entire Accordance folder to another location, such as Applications, but you should not move Accordance itself out of the Accordance folder or it will not be able to access any of the modules. Classic In earlier OS including the PC with emulator, open the Accordance folder (on the root level of your hard drive) by double-clicking on it. You can also open the folder by clicking once on it and selecting Open (File menu or -O). Then open Accordance in the same way. You can also start the program by double-clicking any Accordance file. If you wish to access Accordance from your desktop, launcher or Apple menu, you should make an alias of the Accordance icon by choosing Make Alias (File menu). This alias can then be moved to the location of your choice (and the word alias can be deleted from the name). WARNING: DO NOT move the program icon itself out of the Accordance folder, or it will not run properly. The installer deletes previous versions of the program. If you attempt to use an old alias of the program, you will encounter problems. You should make a new alias for the new version and trash the old alias.you can now begin to use Accordance. 1-6

17 Registering Your Copy of Accordance 1. If this is the first time you are using this copy of Accordance, a dialog box appears asking you to register your name. You can use the return key to start a new line. 2. After you enter your name and (optional) affiliation and verify that it is correct, click the OK button or press the enter key. 3. A dialog box then appears for verification of your name and affiliation. If your name and affiliation are not correct, click on Cancel and make any corrections. Otherwise, click OK to permanently save your entry. A dialog box with your name and affiliation will appear each time you start Accordance. Introduction 1-7

18 1 Installation and First Time Launch Setup Assistant The first time you run Accordance the Setup Assistant guides you through some initial settings. You can reset these preferences and many others at any time in the Preferences dialog box. See Appendix A for details of the Preferences. The first window introduces the Setup Assistant. The next window lets you choose to work initially with separate windows or a workspace. We recommend selecting the workspace. The workspace is a blank window in which other windows appear as tabs. It is a convenient way to keep your windows organized and accessible. See Chapter 22 for details. 1-8

19 Then you choose whether to open Accordance with a new window or to reopen the windows that you had when you quit. We recommend selecting the last session. Once you have some open windows you can return to Preferences and select a third option of a default session with your preferred window arrangement. The pop-up menus in the next window let you select the Bible you want to start with, and the font and size for English text in most windows. Later you can set the font size globally and individually for texts and tools. We recommend at least points with the high screen density of newer monitors. Introduction 1-9

20 1 Installation and First Time Launch Lastly you set whether Bible text appears in separate verses or in paragraphs. You can change this later for each text. Now you are done with the initial setup. The final window gives you a few tips to get you started with Accordance. 1-10

21 Setting Up 2 Chapter Contents: Types of Files in Accordance Copying Modules Moving and Naming the File Icons Cleaning up the Accordance Folder The Accordance Fonts Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance Using a Module from a Different Location Preference Files Important Backups Multiple Users User Files Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9)

22 2 Setting Up Types of Files in Accordance When you finish installing Accordance, you will see a number of files in the Accordance folder similar to those shown here. Accordance Files 1. The Accordance Program The program file is named Accordance. In Classic systems it is followed by a version number such as 7.2 and PPC or 68K. This is the Accordance application itself. To check the version number in OS X you can select the file and choose Get Info (File menu or -I). If you have multiple copies of the program, you can delete all except the latest version by moving them to the Trash can. 2. Settings Files with icons like the Settings contain important information needed by Accordance, and will be collected in a folder named Accordance Preferences. This folder must be kept in the same folder as Accordance. If they are not already present, the folder and files will be created automatically when you run Accordance. In OS X a copy of this folder is created in each user s Library/ Preferences folder. See later in this chapter for more details on these files. Note: You may also see an Accordance Settings ƒ folder in the Accordance folder, with older versions of the settings files. 3. Modules and Glosses You should also see a Modules folder with several Accordance-compatible text and tool modules. Double-clicking a text or tool module launches Accordance and opens a window displaying that text or tool. Files with names like Greek words or Hebrew roots are collected in a Gloss folder. These files supply additional information for the original language morphologically tagged texts. 4. Graphic Data and Backgrounds Atlas and Timeline files have special icons for the data itself, and for the different colored backgrounds. 5. Saved Windows Accordance window files contain different kinds of windows that have been saved within Accordance. When you open a window file in Accordance, the searches defined in any Search windows in the file are automatically performed. Double-clicking a window file launches Accordance and opens the windows from the file. 5. User Files The user notes files are Accordance modules that you create yourself. Each note in a file is attached to a specific verse. You can add to and edit these notes at any time. The user tools files are Accordance modules that you create or import. You can add to and edit these tools as well as search them. 2-2

23 In OS X these files are copied to, and new files are saved in the user/library/ Accordance Files folder. Standard Macintosh Files 1. Help Help opens the Apple Help files which give on-line interactive help for all the features of Accordance. Accordance Help links the program to the Apple Help files (in OS 8 and 9) but cannot be opened itself. 2. Text or RTF File When you save the text contents of a window in Accordance, it is saved as a text file or an RTF file. This text file can be opened and edited in most word processors. 3. PICT File When you save the contents of a graphical window in Accordance, it is saved as a PICT file. A PICT file can be imported as a graphic into most page layout programs and some word processors. 4. Read Me Files Documentation supplied with Accordance may be text files which can be opened by Simple Text or TextEdit, or PDF files for Preview or Adobe Reader. They contain important information about the software and the modules. You can read the documents on screen or print them for future reference. Most of these files will be in a folder called Manuals & Documents. The Read Mes folder contains important information about individual modules. Copying Modules Normally all modules are installed on your hard drive, although any Accordance module can be accessed directly from the CD-ROM if there is no room on the hard drive. You should always use the installers to add modules, wherever possible, since they correctly move all the modules that belong together, and add them to the pop-up menus in Accordance. The installers place new modules into Texts and Tools folders within a Modules folder in the Accordance folder. You only need to copy modules manually if the installer is for versions earlier than 5.7 and you already have a newer version of Accordance or do not have Classic. To copy any item to your hard disk, simply drag its icon to the disk or folder into which you wish to copy it. Note: Many modules are locked so that only licensed owners of that module can use it in Accordance. There is no point in copying these modules to your hard disk unless you have purchased the license. Note: If you manually copy modules to your hard disk, YOU MUST STILL ADD THESE MODULES to the pop-up menus from within Accordance before you can use them. Introduction 2-3

24 2 Setting Up Upgrading Modules Many Accordance modules are revised and upgraded on new releases of the CD-ROMs. The newer installers automatically replace older copies of modules found in your Accordance folder, with any newer ones on the CD-ROM (when you select Standard or Easy Install). To take advantage of module corrections and upgrades, please check the website for news on updates. Some modules are posted for download by the AccUpdater widget, which offers an easier way to obtain modules which have been updated recently. See Chapter 24-Other Features. Moving and Naming the File Icons You may move the entire Accordance folder to another location, such as Applications, but you should not move Accordance itself out of the Accordance folder or it will not be able to access any of the modules. If you move Accordance modules into other folders after they have been added to Accordance, you will be asked where each module is the next time you attempt to access it. You will need to navigate to its new position. If you rename modules, Accordance may not be able to handle them correctly. After the Accordance Preferences folder and its files have been created, they should not not be renamed or moved. Otherwise new settings files will be created. You will then need to add all your modules again and recreate your ranges and default settings. See below for details of the Preferences folders. The Apple Help file must also remain in the same folder as Accordance (in OS 8.6 and 9). In the Finder you are free to rename the files you save in Accordance, such as window files and any text or PICT files. However, if you rename a user notes or user tool file, Accordance will no longer be able to access it. (See Chapters 20 and 21.) Cleaning up the Accordance Folder You may save space and reduce clutter by deleting the following files: Any older copies of Accordance (shown by the version number). Any old AppleGuide tutorials. Any documentation you have read or printed, or prefer to access directly on the CD-ROM. Any modules which you do not use, or which have been functionally replaced by others with different names, or are duplicates. Any modules which you rarely use and prefer to access directly from the CD-ROM. CAUTION: Do NOT delete the Accordance settings files! They will be automatically upgraded when you run the new version. If you delete these files you will need to add all your Accordance modules again, and recreate all your ranges and default settings. 2-4

25 The Accordance Fonts Six Accordance fonts are included with the software, and will be installed in your system by the Installer. See the Accordance Fonts.pdf for full details of the fonts. Adding Texts and Tools to Accordance When you run the Installer, the modules included in the installation will be copied from the CD- ROM to your Accordance folder, and added automatically to the pop-up menus in Accordance. You will need to add modules to Accordance yourself if: You have copied them to the hard drive yourself You choose to use any modules directly from the CD-ROM The module does not appear on any pop-up menu even though it is in the Accordance folder Another Admin user installed additional modules after you first ran Accordance. To add the new modules to the pop-up menus so that they are available to Accordance, select Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option -A), and click the Add Module button. The standard Macintosh dialog box, shown on the next page, appears allowing you to select a file name. See Chapter 5-Floating Windows for more details on the Arrange Modules window. This dialog box allows you to: Open the pop-up menu to navigate back up to the desktop. Open folders and see the lists of contents Select more than one item in the list, by pressing the shift or command key as you select additional items. When opened from Add Module, only modules that have NOT been added to Accordance appear in bold, modules that have already been added are dimmed in OS X and do not appear at all in earlier systems. Introduction 2-5

26 2 Setting Up In this dialog box, and other dialog boxes in Accordance that contain lists, you can also use the up and down arrow keys to select an item in the list. The Add modules dialog box normally reappears to allow you to add another module, until you click Cancel. However, it does not reappear if you select more than one module to add at once, nor if it opened automatically because there are no text modules in Accordance. If the modules have not been copied to the hard disk, you can add them to Accordance by navigating in this dialog box to the CD-ROM on the desktop and finding the Modules folder. Locked Modules If the module is locked, you will be asked to enter an 18 digit password in order to add the module. This is the only time that you will be asked for the password. If you do not have the password, click on Cancel, and contact OakTree Software, Inc. to purchase the module or request a lost password. Some modules are locked as part of a group (such as the Basic Group). After you enter the group code for the first module in the group, all the other modules can be added without unlocking. After a module is been added it will appear in the pop-up menus in Accordance, and its name will no longer appear on the list of files available for adding. Note that new modules added in this way do not open a new window. 2-6

27 Arrange Modules for Non-admin User Using Arrange Modules, in OS X, non-admin users can only add to their own pop-up menus modules which have already been added to the main Accordance preferences, as above. The same Arrange Modules window and Add Module dialog are used, but the only modules available are those which have already been added to the main preferences but do not appear on the user s own menus. Earlier Systems If you are using OS 8.1 or earlier, particularly the emulator on a PC, and do not have the Navigation Extension, this older navigation dialog box will appear instead of the one shown above. You can select only one item at a time in this window. Other Methods You can also add new modules by double-clicking directly on the file icon in the Finder (this may not work if the module comes from an older CD-ROM), or by selecting the name from the dialog box when you choose Open (File menu or -O). In either case, a new window opens and displays the entire module. Using a Module from a Different Location To replace an older module on your hard drive with its newer version from the CD-ROM, simply drag the icon of the new module from the CD-ROM to the folder containing the older module. Normally, the installer will do this automatically except on Minimum Install. To use a module from the CD-ROM which was previously used on your hard drive, either delete the module from the hard drive or move it. Then the next time you choose that module within Accordance, you will be asked where the module is and you can navigate to its location on the CD-ROM. You will not need to enter a password if the module is already on the pop-up menus. Any module you used directly from a previous CD-ROM can be used from a new CD-ROM which includes it, but Accordance will ask you to navigate to its new location, the first time that you request it. To use a module on your hard drive which was previously used from the CD-ROM, first copy the module to your hard drive and then restart Accordance without the CD-ROM in the drive. Then the next time you choose that module within Accordance, you will be asked where the module is and you can navigate to its new location on the hard drive. Introduction 2-7

28 2 Setting Up Preference Files This information is primarily for network administrators, and for reference in case of technical problems. Most users should not need to consult this section. History Accordance 7 changed the way that your individual settings and preferences are managed. In earlier versions they were stored in the Accordance settings file and similar files, and in versions 5 and 6 these files were collected in the Accordance settings ƒ folder which remained in the Accordance folder together with the Accordance application itself. New Preferences When you run Accordance Version 7 and above for the first time it creates a new Accordance Preferences folder with the settings files, if one does not already exist. The folder may be created in several places: In the Accordance folder the main Accordance Preferences folder contains these settings: Settings from any old settings files that were in the folder from an earlier version. The record of any and all new modules added to Accordance by an Installer, or manually by the administrator. New settings files installed for the Map or Timeline. All new settings saved by any user in Classic OS (7 through 9). In OS X each user will have a copy of Accordance Preferences in the user s /Library/Preferences/ containing: A copy of the settings from the main Accordance Preferences folder at the time this user first used Accordance 7. All new settings saved by this user in OS X. This arrangement has the following benefits: Each user can have their own settings and preferences. Non-admin users can access Accordance even when it is placed in Applications. Multiple users can access the same copy of Accordance and its modules simultaneously. Individual Settings Files The settings files contain the following information. If a particular kind of module is not installed, the settings file may not exist. Favorites: User s choice of modules for quick access General: Miscellaneous settings from Preferences and other windows Maps: All the defined layers and sets, their arrangement, as well as default settings for the Map window Parallels: Default settings for Parallel windows and their arrangement 2-8

29 Search All: The groups which have been defined for searching in the Search All window Search Ranges: The ranges which have been defined for searching in the Search window Startup session: Either a defined session or the windows that were open when last quitting the program Text sets: The sets of texts which have been defined for opening or amplifying Texts: The installed text modules, their arrangement, and their individual display settings Timeline: All the defined layers and custom lists as well as default settings for the Timeline window Tool sets: The sets of texts which have been defined for opening or amplifying Tools: The installed tool modules, their arrangement, and their individual display settings User Items: Any user items defined for the Timeline User Layers: Any user layers drawn for the Map User Notes: The installed User Notes modules and their arrangement User Tools: The installed User Tool modules, their arrangement, and their individual display settings These details are included here for two reasons: 1. Administrators of multiple users may need this information. 2. Settings files can occasionally get corrupted. If you get a message that a certain file is corrupt, you can delete it from your user Preferences. Our Technical support may recommend that you remove a certain file to correct a problem you are having. If you delete one of these files from your user Preferences: Texts, Tools. Parallels, Maps, Timeline, User Items, or User Layers, Accordance will then copy the file from the main Accordance Preferences folder. If it does not find a file to copy, and for other settings, it will create a new one. You may lose settings that you saved on that file. Note: A Module Installation Log file in each Accordance Preferences folder records what files are moved, copied or installed. Accordance does not use this file, but it may be useful for troubleshooting. Hint: If you install the Bible Atlas, and the Accordance map settings and User Layers files are not moved automatically to the Accordance Settings ƒ folder, please move them there yourself and replace the interim files which have been created. You should then delete the Maps and User Layers files from both Accordance Preferences folders, before running Accordance again. Introduction 2-9

30 2 Setting Up Important Backups For security, each user should make a regular backup of their user s /Library/Preferences/ Accordance Preferences, and their user s /Documents/Accordance Files. The Accordance settings ƒ folder used in earlier versions is kept intact in the Accordance folder both as a backup, and for backwards compatibility with earlier versions of Accordance. Multiple Users Accordance 7 in Mac OS X now allows multiple users on one computer and over a network. This should be transparent to all users, but the details are provided for those who need them. Installation Installation of Accordance can only be done by an administrator. This user will install Accordance and the accompanying modules, and run Accordance for the first time, and after subsequent installations. Accordance creates the main Accordance Preferences folder in the Accordance folder with information on which modules have been installed. If this is an upgrade from a version of Accordance earlier than 7.0, all old settings will be incorporated into the new preferences files. Accordance then makes a copy of Accordance Preferences in the user s /Library/Preferences/ Accordance Preferences for that user, and for each subsequent user who logs onto the computer and runs Accordance. Each user thus starts with the set of preferences from the main folder. Any changes he makes, such as adding ranges, are only in his own settings and are not available to other users on the same computer. Sharing Preferences If the administrator wants to set up specific preferences for other users, he can use one of two methods: 1. He can log in as each user and set up the ranges, the text and tool display, and all the other settings for them, or 2. He can set up his own copy of Accordance the way he wants everyone to be able to start. He then copies his Accordance Preferences folder from his user s /Library/ Preferences/ to the Accordance folder, replacing the main copy which exists there. These settings are now available to each new user. Subsequent changes the administrator makes to his settings are not available to other users, except that any modules he adds to Accordance by an installer or through Arrange Modules are added to the main Accordance Preferences. Each user may then add them to his copy of Accordance. They are not added automatically to other users. 2-10

31 The administrator can also copy individual files from his Preferences to the main Preferences. Any user can access the new preferences by deleting the file of that name from his user s /Library/Preferences/Accordance Preferences. In the case of the Texts, Tools. Parallels, Maps, Timeline, User Items, and User Layers the settings file will be automatically copied to the user s Preferences. Other files, such as Search Ranges can be manually copied to the user s Preferences. Example: You create some interesting user items for the Timeline. If your User Items file is placed in Accordance folder/accordance Preferences it will be available to any user who removes his own User Items. User Files User Notes, User Tools, and Highlights are all files which the user can edit. These user files are saved in one of two locations: Accordance folder/modules/shared filetype contains all user files available to Accordance when first running version 7 and all user files created or added while running in Classic OS In OS X the user s /Documents/Accordance Files/filetype contains the user s own copy of all user files available to Accordance when first running version 7, and all user files created or added while running in OS X. Any changes made by the user to any of these files in OS X are made to his copy of the files, and are not immediately available to other users. The first time you run Accordance 7 or above as an upgrade, it moves the following to Accordance folder/modules: All installed User Tools to a folder called Shared User Tools. All installed User Notes to a folder called Shared User Notes. Current Highlight settings to a folder called Shared Highlights. Sharing Files To make a User Notes or Tool file available to other users, place it in the Accordance folder/ Modules/Shared filetype folder. When another user adds this user file, Accordance will make a copy of it in their user s /Documents/Accordance Files/filetype folder. If a user file with the same name already exists, they can manually replace their copy with the new one. To allow another user to load a Highlights file that you have prepared, place a copy of the file in an accessible location, and let the user move or copy it to their user s /Documents/ Accordance Files/Highlights folder. Introduction 2-11

32 2 Setting Up Using Macintosh Memory (OS 7 to 9) In OS X memory management is automatic, but in earlier systems you may need to increase the amount of memory allocated to Accordance, if you want to work with many large texts and tools simultaneously or with map windows. The amount of memory that Accordance takes up when you use the program depends on the memory allocation for Accordance, the memory available in your Macintosh, and the memory requirements of other programs that you want to run at the same time as Accordance. Adding Memory to Accordance To increase the memory allocation, quit Accordance and select the program icon by clicking on it once. Then select Get Info (File menu or -I) to open a dialog box that gives information about Accordance. Choose Memory in the pop-up menu to see the Memory Requirements. The first line in the box reads Suggested size:. Below this are two boxes labeled Minimum size: and Preferred size:.you can select the numbers in these boxes and enter a larger number. You may increase the Preferred size, but you should not decrease the Minimum size. Close the Get Info dialog box. The additional memory will be available next time you launch Accordance. Checking Memory Usage To see how the different programs are using the memory of your computer, and how much you have available, click on a Finder icon or window and select About This Computer (Apple menu). The dialog box shows a horizontal bar for each open software program indicating how much memory is allocated and how much is actually being used (solid bar). 2-12

33 Getting Help 3 Chapter Contents: The Documentation on the Disk The Accordance User s Guide Accordance Help

34 3 Getting Help Accordance offers three sets of documentation for its users: this User s Guide, Flash movie demos and DVD Tutorials, and Accordance Help interactive on-line help. Many Macintosh users do not even look at their documentation until they run into a problem. Some prefer a systematic and detailed book, and others like the convenience of interactive help on-screen when they need it. We have tried to accommodate all these learning styles The Documentation on the Disk This User s Guide and other documentation is available on the CD-ROM as a PDF file which can be opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader. This document is designed to introduce you to the software, and help you get started enjoying the power of Accordance. We strongly recommend that new users get an overview of the software by starting with the movie demos and the Accordance Help Tutorial unless they plan to read this User s Guide from cover to cover! The Demo files folder on most CD-ROMs includes demonstration texts so you can try out the different modules including Greek and Hebrew for yourself. These files are also available for download from the website. The Accordance User s Guide This book is a comprehensive illustrated manual which details all the functions of Accordance. Unlike the other documentation, this manual attempts to give complete explanations of every feature in every window. For a quicker overview and introduction to the major features, please go through the Tutorial and read the Accordance Help described above. The Help is also updated with every new version of the software. This manual is designed for reference, and for users who prefer a detailed explanation of every feature. Even the experienced user will benefit from studying the manual in order to fully utilize the power of Accordance. The User s Guide is accompanied by three supplements, for Morphologically Tagged texts, the Atlas, and the Timeline. These supplements are included on the appropriate CD-ROMs. Some of the volumes are available for purchase in printed and bound form. Note: The illustrations in this manual were made with OS 10.4 the windows and buttons may look different on another Macintosh system. 3-2

35 The manual is divided into several sections: Introduction Chapters 1 and 2 cover most of the questions raised in calls for support. Please read and follow the instructions carefully. Chapter 1 Installation and First Time Launch summarizes the installation of Accordance and the associated files and modules from the CD-ROMs, for the new user and as an upgrade. Chapter 2 Setting Up is a reference chapter which discusses the different Accordance files, adding, backing up, and multiple users. Chapter 3 Getting Help describes the documentation available with Accordance and the use of Accordance Help interactive help Chapter 4 Getting Oriented gives an overview of the Accordance interface. Chapter 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules describes the Resource palette, the Arrange Modules window, and the Instant Details box. Searching the Bible The Search window is the core of Accordance. It allows you to search for words or phrases in Bible texts. The results are displayed in text panes, allowing you to view as many texts in parallel as you desire. Chapter 6 Viewing the Text describes the display of the Bible text in parallel panes, and how to work with the text. Chapter 7 Doing Searches describes the menus and buttons that help you define your searches. Chapter 8 Search Symbols and Commands helps you learn how to define specific searches. Chapter 9 Keyed Bible Texts shows you how to view and search the Bibles with original language information such as Strong s numbers. Chapter 10 Graphical Searches describes the unique Construct window for defining a search graphically. Digging Deeper The Details and Amplify features of Accordance give you instant access to further information about your search results. Chapter 11 Getting Details describes the Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table windows which analyze the entire result of your search. Chapter 12 Amplify Features describes the Amplify features in general, and the use of Amplify windows. Chapter 13 Amplifying your Selection shows you how to get the context of selected verses, to search for a selected word or phrase, or hear your selection read aloud. It also covers some special Amplify features for Keyed Bible texts. Introduction 3-3

36 3 Getting Help Consulting Study Aids Accordance lets you move freely between your Bible texts and a wide variety of tools and other modules, which are described in this section. Chapter 14 Tools describes the use of lexicons, commentaries, or other reference works which you have added to Accordance. These tools are fully searchable and feature a wide array of hypertext capabilities. Chapter 15 Search All Groups, Text, and Tool Sets shows you how to create and search a set of Accordance modules at the same time. Chapter 16 Parallels displays parallel passages of scripture such as Kings and Chronicles in parallel panes. The lists of parallel passages are available as separate Accordance modules. Doing your own Thing This section describes features that let you save and recall your own work as you study. Chapter 17 Color Highlighting shows you how to highlight words and verses in different colors and styles. Chapter 18 Reference Lists let you collect and display any verses you select. Chapter 19 User Notes describes the User Notes and Edit windows which let you add your own multilingual notes to any verse. Chapter 20 User Tools describes the User Tool and Edit windows which let you import, create, and edit your own tools. Chapter 21 Importing Bibles helps you import a Bible text from another source. General Features Chapter 22 The Workspace and Slide Show lets you organize your windows with tabs, and display them for projection. Chapter 23 Working with Windows shows you how to work with multiple windows in Accordance, and how to link them together in various ways. It also details special features of text entry in the original languages Chapter 24 Other Features covers Contextual menus, the Accordance Widgets, and the differences in Classic systems. Chapter 25 Printing and Saving describes how to save and print windows and their contents in Accordance. Appendices Appendix A Setting Preferences shows all the options for default settings in Accordance. Appendix B Menu Reference and Key Commands describes each menu item in order, and lists the keyboard shortcuts. Appendix C Names and Symbols details their use in the entry box. 3-4

37 Accordance Help Accordance Help offers interactive help for all the features of Accordance, with a Tutorial to help you get started with the basics. These files are automatically installed in the Help folder of your System. They use the Apple Help Viewer which is similar to an Internet browser, and is very easy to use, navigate and search. An AppleGuide file in the Accordance folder links the Help book to Accordance on OS 8.6 to 9. Earlier Systems The Apple Help files require OS 8.6 or above. If you are using an earlier system you can access these files with any Internet browser. The Help files will be installed in a Help folder in your Accordance folder instead of the System, along with a Help icon that links to your Internet browser. Double-click the icon to open your browser to a page with links to the Tutorial and Accordance Help. The Window Help interactive feature will not be available to you. On the PC with emulator you must transfer the files back to Windows in order to use them. Help Menu The Help menu to the right of the Window menu gives you access to Accordance Help. You can also open the Help Viewer from any other application that uses it, and navigate to Accordance Help. Accordance Help opens the full interactive guide to all the features and windows of Accordance. It is fully searchable and has many hypertext links between the pages. The first section, TUTORIAL, opens an interactive introduction to the features of Accordance using the demonstration modules supplied on the CD-ROM. To open the main Accordance Help window select Accordance Help (Help menu), or press Command-? ( -?). The Help Interface The buttons in the top left let you go back and forward to pages you have already seen, or select another Help file (in OS 10.4). The View menu lets you adjust the font size. The Ask a question box searches the current Help file for the words you enter in the box after you press return or enter. The results are ranked for relevance. The left side of the window shows the main sections of the Accordance Help file. Clicking on a section opens the contents list for that section. Click on any title of interest to open the page on that topic on the right side. The last section on the left entitled What s New covers the changes in each version of Accordance, and links to the relevant pages. Introduction 3-5

38 3 Getting Help The Tutorial Accordance Tutorial is the first section of Accordance Help which introduces the new user to the basic features of Accordance using the demonstration modules on the CD-ROM. New users are strongly recommended to work through the tutorial in order to gain an understanding of the main types of windows and functions. Simply click the links to explore the Tutorial, and follow the directions with Accordance. Window Help You can go directly from any Accordance window to the description of that window in Accordance Help. Simply select Window Help (Window menu or option- -?). The Help opens to the page which illustrates and describes that window and the functions of its menus and buttons. This context sensitive help can also be accessed from many of the dialog boxes, including all the Preferences and Set windowtype Display dialog boxes. The Help window will guide you through each of the options presented in that dialog box. Accordance Help also includes definitions of all the Greek and Hebrew grammatical tags. Selecting Window Help for the tag details dialog box for a specific part of speech, opens the description of each of the options available for that part of speech. 3-6

39 Getting Oriented 4 Chapter Contents: Key Accordance Concepts The Accordance Interface Understanding Windows Description of the Search Window Contextual Menus Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes Setting Defaults

40 4 Getting Oriented Key Accordance Concepts Accordance has been designed around a few key concepts, which open the door to understanding the interface and using it effectively: 1. The Bible is Central The primary purpose of Bible Study software is to help you to study the Bible, and the Accordance interface is designed accordingly. When you launch Accordance, the first thing you see is a window displaying the entire text of the Bible (whichever one you choose as your default). Thus, the Bible itself serves as the central hub around which your study revolves. 2. Searching is Central Bible software should center around the act of searching the Bible, so Accordance gives you everything you need to perform a search right from the very beginning. The Accordance Search window is designed to make defining a search as quick and painless as possible. You can find a passage by entering its reference, or you can search the text of the Bible for a particular word or phrase. You can specify the Bible translation or original language text you wish to search, limit your search to a specific range of verses, and use a variety of sophisticated search criteria. All of these options can be accessed directly from within the Search window, so there s no digging through dialog boxes or preference panels just to define a search. 3. What You See Is What You Get The Mac pioneered the concept of WYSIWYG: that what you see on screen should faithfully represent what you get on the printed page. Accordance is built around this same simple concept that what you see should be what you get. That s why the Search window is not only the place where you define a search; it is also the place where the results of that search are displayed. You define the search in the top part of the window, click OK and the results of the search are displayed in the bottom part of the same window. If you leave this window open and come back three hours later, you can see immediately what you had been searching for before you left. This WYSIWYG concept has been carried over to every other window in Accordance. For example, in the Map window the settings in the pop-up menus at the top of the window determine the geographical features which are displayed on the map. This makes it easy to figure out how to use each different kind of Accordance window since any differences between them are merely a function of the particular kind of information they enable you to access Instant Access Bible software should be unobtrusive, placing a wealth of information at your fingertips without itself getting in the way. It should encourage you to ask questions of the biblical text by making it easy to find the answers to those questions. It should enable you to follow a path of study, consulting other resources as needed, without leading you away from the text of the Bible itself. Accordance accomplishes this by making every Accordance feature and module readily available from the Resource palette. No matter where you are in the program or what you re looking at, you can select any Bible text, commentary, dictionary, map, timeline, or other resource to open or to search.

41 If you select a word or verse reference before choosing a resource from the Resource palette, Accordance will automatically search that resource for the word or verse you selected. This enables you to get the information you need almost instantaneously, making it easy to follow a train of thought through multiple resources. 5. Economy of Effort Following a train of thought means not having to jump through unnecessary hoops to get the information you need. Yes, the Resource palette makes it easy to open and search any module in your Accordance library, but Accordance offers several shortcuts to the most important resources. Triple-click on the words or verses you re interested in, and Accordance will open the relevant dictionary or commentary with more information on your selection. Simply pass your cursor over a word or item to get more information about it in the Instant Details box located at the bottom of the screen. To see your search results in an entirely new light, click the Details button on the Search window to display them in different graphs and tables. The menus at the top of the screen, and the contextual menus that pop-up with a rightclick in different areas of many windows, offer easy access to additional features. 6. Minimal Clutter For Bible software to be unobtrusive and avoid getting in your way, it should let you view a multiplicity of resources with a minimum of window clutter. Every second you spend shuffling through lots of open windows is time taken away from your study of the Bible. Accordance keeps window clutter to a minimum in two ways: through Window Panes and Workspace Tabs. Window panes enable you to compare multiple Bible texts or translations, view a commentary in parallel with the text of the Bible, or keep your user notes for a passage clearly visible, all within the same window. Window panes can be used to keep Bible texts, commentaries, and user notes neatly organized, but what about all the other resources available, such as lexicons, dictionaries, general books, maps, timelines, and parallels? The Accordance Workspace window will keep all of these separate resources together in one place, all neatly organized and displayed as tabs. You never have to worry about losing one window behind another or having to rearrange them unless, of course, you want to! 7. Personal Preferences Accordance lets you customize the appearance and function of almost every window, so that it displays what you want and how you want it. In the Preferences you can set many defaults which apply throughout the software, until you change them. Then, whatever window you have in front, select the first item in the Display menu, or use the shortcut command-t ( -T), to set the options that apply to that window and the text it is displaying. Conclusion: Understand these seven design concepts, and you re already well on your way to being an Accordance power user! Introduction 4-3

42 4 Getting Oriented The Accordance Interface Accordance follows the standard Macintosh interface; therefore it is very easy for an experienced Macintosh user to learn to use the special windows and features. If you are familiar with the Macintosh, you may want to skip this section and go on to the description of the Search window. Opening Accordance Accordance can be opened by clicking on the program icon in the Dock, or by double-clicking on the icon in the Accordance folder or any Accordance file icon. You can also select an icon in the Finder with a single click, then choose Open (File menu or -O). A welcome message appears for a few seconds, then a Search window opens. Although the appearance of the windows and menus may vary depending on the Macintosh system, the initial screen looks something like this: Menu bar Resource palette Search window Instant Details box desktop Two floating windows also appear at the edges of the screen: the Resource palette lets you open new windows of any module and gives you instant access to further information about selected words the Instant Details box shows more information about the word under the cursor. (See Chapter 5-Floating Windows and Arrange Modules.) 4-4

43 The Menu Bar The menu bar at the top of the screen shows the name of each menu. Each menu contains a list of items that perform functions in Accordance. To choose a item, position the pointer on a menu name and hold the mouse button down. When the menu appears, keep the mouse button down, drag the pointer to the item, and then release the mouse button. The selected function is performed. Note: If you close all windows without quitting the program, double-clicking on the Accordance program icon will only change the menu bar from the Finder to the Accordance menu bar. Use the File menu to open a new window. The File Menu and New Submenu An ellipsis ( ) after an item indicates that selecting this item opens a dialog box with further choices. A triangle pointing to the right. indicates that there is a submenu under the item. When you highlight the item with the mouse, the submenu appears to the right. Drag the mouse out onto the submenu and select the item you want by highlighting it, and then releasing the mouse button. An item is dimmed if it does not apply at this moment. The symbol indicates that you can hold down the command key and press the next key indicated, to perform the same function. A combination indicates the shift and command keys. On Page Setup the symbols indicate control-command P, and on Print Settings option-command P. These additional symbols do not appear on older systems, but the key combinations do work. Quitting Accordance To quit Accordance choose Quit (Application or File menu or -Q). A dialog box appears asking whether you want to save the contents of all independent windows. Click Don t Save or press the d or n key, unless you want to save your work. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) There is no need to close any windows before quitting, and it is best not to close the floating windows, as they will remain closed when you reopen the application. Introduction 4-5

44 4 Getting Oriented Understanding Windows For more information on working with windows, see the Macintosh User s Guide that came with your computer. Most Macintosh windows have the following features: drag the title bar to move the window click the close button to close the window drag the scroll bar slider to scroll the window contents click the minimize button to hide the window in the dock click the zoom button to toggle the window to full screen size click the up and down arrows to scroll the text one line at a time drag the size box to resize the window The title bar across the top of each window displays the name of the window. The title bar is dimmed when the window is not the front or active window. To close a window, either click on its close box or select Close (File menu or -W), All of these have the same effect. Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes and alert messages are somewhat simpler: enter text in the text box click on any button to perform the indicated function and dismiss the dialog box pressing the enter or return keys is like clicking the colored button (the one with a border in older systems) Note: The illustrations in this manual show OS If you have an earlier system, the frames and buttons of windows and dialog boxes will look somewhat different. 4-6

45 The Workspace As in most other software, this documentation and the software start with the use of independent windows. Once you are familiar with the different windows, you may choose to organize them as tabs in a workspace. The only visible difference will be in the top part of the window where the title and a close button appear on a tab below the title bar of the workspace. (See Chapter 22-The Workspace.) Introduction to the Search Window Accordance uses a number of specialized windows for the different features of the software. The Search window is the core window which is used to search Bible texts, and illustrates some common features of Accordance windows. It consists of the search entry section and the text pane. When you launch Accordance, a Search window appears displaying the first Bible text. search text pop-up menu Search for radio buttons Details button search entry section History pop-up menu argument entry box more options section hides additional buttons Add pane popup menus text pane section divider display text pop-up menu reference box text access buttons Opening a Search Window font size buttons To open a new Search window, select a Bible from one of the Text pop-up menus at the top of the Resource palette. You can also open a new Search window by selecting Search Text from the New submenu (File menu or -N), choosing the Bible module in the Open dialog box (File menu or -O), or by double-clicking on the file in the Finder or in the Arrange Modules window (Edit menu or option- -A). Introduction 4-7

46 4 Getting Oriented Accordance will also open a new Search window whenever it is launched or brought to the front, and no other windows are open other than the floating palettes. The Window Title When you open a new Search window, the title shows the name of the current text. The name of the window updates whenever you change the search text. However, if you change the name of the window by selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option -N), the new name will no longer update when you change the text. The Search Entry Section The search entry section is the place where you enter your search or reference criteria. Accordance then uses your criteria to determine which portions of the text to display in the text window panes. The criteria can be as simple as a chapter and verse reference or as complex as an intricate Greek or Hebrew grammatical construct. Only the portions of the text that fit your criteria are displayed in the text window panes. The search entry section is described in detail in Chapter 7. This overview is only an introduction to concepts that are described fully throughout this manual. The buttons and pop-up menus in the search entry section and the More options section set the options that determine the extent and nature of your search. The Search Text Pop-up Menu The search text pop-up menu shows the current search text and allows you to select from any text available to your copy of Accordance. The criteria you enter into the search entry section are matched against the contents of the search text. Hint: To use a pop-up menu, hold the mouse button down anywhere within the rectangle. After the list of items appears, drag the mouse to your new selection and release the button. Your new selection appears in the pop-up menu. Note: If a text does not appear in this pop-up menu, you need to make it available to Accordance by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A), and clicking the Add Module button. (See Chapter 2-Getting Started.) The Search for Radio Buttons The Search for radio buttons toggle or switch the entry section between searching for Words and Verses. You can also press command-semicolon ( -;) to switch the search. Setting the search to Verses allows you to enter the book, chapter, or verse references for the text you wish to view. The Words search lets you enter words or phrases, and other more complex search criteria. When you first open Accordance, the search is set to Verses and an asterisk appears in the argument entry box. The asterisk indicates every verse, so the text pane displays the entire text of the first version you added to Accordance. The asterisk is automatically selected so that you can immediately enter a new reference. 4-8

47 The Argument Entry Box Search arguments and verse references are entered into the argument entry box. Clicking the mouse in the argument entry box causes the blinking insertion point to appear. You can then enter one or more references or the arguments for your search by either typing or using items in the Search menu. Pressing the tab key, or triple-clicking in the box, selects all its contents, so a new entry replaces the previous contents. The History Pop-up Menu The History pop-up menu stores and lets you retrieve the search arguments used previously in this window. Selecting an argument from the pop-up menu lets you go back and repeat the search without having to re-enter it. More Options Clicking the More options disclosure triangle reveals three additional pop-up menus and a checkbox: The Field Pop-up Menu The first pop-up menu labeled Search within every displays the current field or context for the search. (For example, if the search field is set to Verse, then a search for Adam < AND> Eve would find them only when they occur in the same verse.) The Range Pop-up Menu The search range pop-up menu labeled of shows the current search range and allows you to select the whole or a portion of the search text. Some basic ranges are provided for the new user. You can define your own ranges, including nonadjacent sections of the search text. The Compare Texts Checkbox The Compare texts checkbox highlights differences between the first two texts of the same language in the panes below. The Context Pop-up Menu The pop-up menu labeled Add context lets you add additional verses before and after the verses containing the hits. The default is None so that only the hit verses are displayed. The Section Divider The section divider is a double gray line which can be moved up or down to increase the height of the argument entry box. (The cursor changes to a two-headed arrow whenever it is over a line which can be dragged.) Introduction 4-9

48 4 Getting Oriented The OK Button The OK button is dimmed until you enter your arguments into the argument entry box. After you enter your search arguments, the OK button is darkened and clicking it (or pressing the return or enter key) causes Accordance to perform the search. The Progress Window If your search will take more than a few seconds, the progress window appears. The speed of the search is indicated by the advancing bar. Clicking Stop, or pressing escape or the command-period ( -.) keyboard shortcut, causes Accordance to cancel the search. During a long search you can click on the Finder or a window of another program and work on something else while you are waiting. The Text Pane The text pane is the area in the middle of the window where the text that meets the criteria entered in the search entry section is displayed. The text window pane is described in detail in Chapter 6. This overview is only an introduction to concepts that are described in more detail in the following chapters. Setting the Display Text The display text pop-up menu contains a list of all the text versions that are available to Accordance. This pop-up menu shows the abbreviation of the current text that is displayed in the text pane. The display text need not be the same as the current search text. You can use this pop-up menu to change the display text at any time. Changing the Display The font size buttons let you quickly and proportionally increase or decrease the size of all the fonts used in the pane. Selecting Set Text Display (Display menu or -T) lets you choose the font, size, style, and color of different elements in the text, and well as other options. Adding Multiple Panes You can simultaneously view multiple text panes with different versions, as well as reference tools such as Bible Notes and your own Notes. You add panes by choosing the version from the Add pane: pop-up menus at the top right of the text pane. Multiple panes are synchronized so they each display the same verse at the top of the pane. Clicking the Close button at the top left of the pane closes that pane. 4-10

49 Moving through the Search Results You can move through the search results by using the scroll bar to the right of the pane. Clicking on the up or down arrow scrolls the text one line in either direction. Clicking on the scroll bar above or below the scroll bar slider, or pressing the page up and page down keys, moves the text one page in the respective direction. You can also drag the slider to a new location on the scroll bar. The other controls on the bottom of the window enable you to move through the text in increments of verses, chapters, or books, or to a specific reference. Contextual Menus A right-click on a two-button mouse opens a contextual menu with the most important options appropriate for the area of the window that is clicked. Pressing control while clicking also opens the contextual menu. This feature is supported within Accordance in older Classic OS. In the Search window you can right-click in the argument entry box, in the surrounding entry section (for More Options), and in the text pane. Most other windows have areas that support a contextual menu. The options you see also depend on what you have selected in the window. (For details of the contextual menus, see Chapter 24-Other Features.) Saving and Printing Windows and Text Panes You can save most windows as an Accordance file to reopen later. You can also save the contents of individual text panes so they can be opened in a word processor. To save the contents of a text pane as a text file, select Plain Text from the Save As Text File submenu (File menu). To save a Search window as an Accordance file, select Save (File menu or -S). You can print the text of one or all text panes by selecting Print (File menu or -P). (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) Setting Defaults The Set-up assistant offered you certain options that affect the appearance and function of Accordance. The Preferences dialog box allows you to set these and many more options for the entire program, which remain in effect unless you change them, even when you quit and reopen Accordance. This dialog box opens when you choose Preferences (Application menu in OS X, or Edit menu in earlier systems, or -,). (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) Introduction 4-11

50 4 Getting Oriented Recommendations We recommend that most users adjust the following settings in the Preferences: General: Open initial window as workspace with tabs Default startup to Last session or a Default session Suppress opening text information Suppress save warning for all windows Text Display: Show as, Font, Size, and Color, Highlighting color, and Reference display Tool Display: Font, Size, and Color, Highlighting color, and default Bible text Greek & Hebrew: Export options, see Chapter 25 Search Window: Text and other sttings for new Search windows After clicking on Details, show (Plots and Analysis, but not Concordance or Table) Map Window Display: Default tool Timeline Display: Default tool and text 4-12

51 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules Chapter Contents: The Resource Palette Arranging and Adding Modules The Instant Details Box

52 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules When you first launch Accordance two windows appear on the screen floating above any other Accordance windows: the Resource palette along the right side, and the Instant Details box at the bottom. Three additional floating palettes, the Highlight, Text, and Character palettes, are described in Chapters 17 and 23. Features of Floating Windows The floating windows are opened by the first items in the Window menu. The menu has a check beside the item as long as the window remains open. Selecting the item from the menu either opens or closes the window. A floating window does not change the fact that another window is the front or active window. To move a window drag the bar at the top or left of the window. To close a window simply click in the close box in the top left corner or select the item in the Window menu. The floating windows disappear when you click on the Finder or the window of another program, or when you open a modal dialog box (which must be dismissed before you can continue). Selecting Hide Palettes (Window menu or option- -0) hides all the open floating windows until Show Palettes is selected from the menu. When you close and reopen a floating window it will reappear in the position on the screen where it was when you closed it. When you quit and reopen Accordance, the program remembers whether or not the window was open. The Resource Palette 5-2 The Resource palette gives you instant access to almost all the modules and features that are available to you in Accordance. Features of the Resource Palette If the palette is not open, select its name from the Window menu. The palette appears down the right hand side of your screen as a set of icon buttons and triangles. Clicking the triangles, or their labels, opens and closes sections of the palette. The default palette has the Texts and Tools sections open, and the next three sections closed, but Accordance retains the palette the way it is when you quit and relaunch the program. If you slowly move the cursor over an icon, a button tip will appear under the cursor showing the name of the button.

53 Most of the icon buttons access pop-up menus, as indicated by the small black triangle to the bottom right. The pop-up menu buttons either open or search the module(s) you choose. Hint: Click and hold the mouse button on the icon to open the pop-up menu. The result of clicking the buttons depends on whether or not you currently have any words selected or the cursor flashing in a text pane. Opening a New Window If you do NOT have a selection in a text pane, the cursor remains an arrow, so that selecting an item on a pop-up menu opens a new window displaying the contents of that item. This applies to the first four sections of the palette, and to the Search All items in the Search button. Over other buttons that require a selection, the cursor changes to an X. Hint: If you DO have text selected, you can still open a new window by using the right mouse click, or pressing the control key as you click on the icon, or before you select the item. Amplifying If you have a selection, or the cursor is flashing in a word in a text pane, the cursor changes to a magnifying glass over the palette, indicating that Accordance will amplify your selection depending on what you choose from the Resource palette. This usually means that Accordance will search for your selection in the resource you open. The Amplify features enable you to view more information about the words you have selected in almost any window. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.) These features correspond to the items in the Amplify menu. Selecting an item on the Resource palette performs exactly the same function as selecting the corresponding item from the Amplify menu or submenus. There are keyboard shortcuts for many of the amplify actions (see Appendix B). Selecting an Item A single quick click on an icon button opens or amplifies to the last module selected from the list, or the first module on the list. Holding the mouse button down on the icon opens the menu and lets you select another module to open or search. A check mark indicates the previous item selected. Most pop-up menus also have an option to open or search all the modules in that menu. Introduction 5-3

54 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules 5-4 The Buttons The Resource palette is initially set to display icons in a vertical arrangement, but the display can be customized as described on the next page. Texts: The first three icon buttons open or search the English, Greek, or Hebrew text you select (or all the texts). Text sets lets you define and open groups of texts. The Parallel button opens a parallel database or searches it for the reference of the selected Bible verse in a Bible text pane. Context displays the context of selected verses in the same Bible text with the same parallel text panes. Tools: Each icon button opens or searches the category of tool you select. English tools, such as dictionaries. Greek and Hebrew tools, such as lexicons or dictionaries. Reference tools, such as commentaries or Bible notes. General tools, such as writings. Tool sets, lets you define and open groups of tools. Background: These icon buttons open or search for a selected name in special windows. Map opens the background of your choice (requires the Bible Atlas). Timeline (requires the Bible Timeline). My Stuff: These icon buttons access modules you create yourself, and the menu items that let you create these modules. My Tools button opens or searches the user tools. The My Notes button opens or searches the user notes for the reference of the selected verse in a Bible text pane. Language: Each button lets you see more information on your current selection. Parsing displays the parsing details and gloss of selected words in a text with Key (Strong s) numbers or grammatical tags. Diagram opens a window where you can create a grammatical diagram of the selected words. Speak reads any selected words audibly. Syntax opens a syntactical chart of the selected words which you can edit and annotate.

55 Search: A single click on the Search button searches for the selected words in a duplicate of the same Search or Tool window. This pop-up menu also opens the Search All window which searches all available modules, or a st where you can keep a copy of the modules you access most frequently. (See Chapters 13-Amplifying your Selection, G5-Grammatical Windows, A4-Amplifying to and from the Atlas, and T2-Amplifying to and from Timelines.) Customizing the Palette Two sets of radio buttons on the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) let you select a horizontal palette and buttons with text labels. The horizontal palettes have neither section labels nor disclosure triangles. The position of each orientation of the palette is saved independently. Arranging and Adding Modules The Arrange Modules window makes it easy to organize the modules in the pop-up menus of the the Resource palette and many windows. You can add and remove modules and organize them into submenus, as well as add them to your Favorites. The Arrange Modules Window Selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) opens a special window which allows you to manage all your modules. This special window can be left open for quick access, or closed using the close button in the top left. It cannot be merged into a workspace. It retains its position when closed and reopened, and between sessions. The Main Pane The main pane displays the icons for each category of editable pop-up menus. The categories themselves cannot be edited in any way. Clicking the disclosure triangle opens the list of names for that category. You can now arrange and edit the list of modules within the category. The window can be copied and saved as an image, or printed. Introduction 5-5

56 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules 5-6 The Buttons Add Module allows you to add another module to your copy of Accordance. (See Chapter 2-Setting up.) New Folder creates an untitled folder below a selected item (or inside a selected open folder). New Divider places a dividing line below the selected item (or inside a selected open folder). Alphabetize reorders the list of items at the level of the selection. Remove deletes the selected item. Update saves the changes to the popup menus. Using the Window Adding Items Module names can be added to categories (other than Favorites) using the Add Module button as above. The module is added at the bottom of the relevant category. Folders and dividing lines can be added by clicking the buttons after selecting a category or any item. If the selected item is an open folder, the new folder or line is created inside the folder. Modules moved into a folder will appear in a submenu on most pop-up menus which list that category of modules. In dialog boxes with module pop-up menus, items in folders are all in one list, separated by dividing lines. In many ways, all three types of items are treated in the same way in this window. Selecting Items Click on an item to select it. Shift-click to select contiguous items. Command-click to select additional non-contiguous names. Press the up or down arrow keys to select the next item instead. Click and drag the mouse to select items within the marquee. Once you have a selection you can: Move an item by selecting and dragging it to a new location within the same category, or to Favorites. The new location is indicated by the line under an item, or a box around a folder. Alphabetize the names at that level by clicking Alphabetize.

57 Add a folder or dividing line below (or inside) the selection. Click Remove (or press delete) to delete an item. If you delete a module it is deleted only from your user s Preferences files, it can still be added back to Accordance. Note: Removing a folder with items in it, deletes only the folder, not the contents; the contents are moved up to the level of the folder. Folders Modules placed in a folder appear in a submenu of the pop-up menus. This is a convenient way to organize a long list of modules. Click New Folder to add a folder. The name untitled is selected so you can rename it. Names of current modules are not accepted. Double-click a folder name to edit it. Click the adjacent triangle to view the contents of the folder. Drag any item (module, folder, or divider) into a folder to place them on the submenu. Note: All the Texts appear in one category in this window. If all the texts of one language (English, Greek, or Hebrew) are included in one folder, the pop-up menu for that language on the Resource palette will ignore that folder and place the items inside it at the top level of the menu. Opening Modules Double-clicking a module name opens the module in a new window or adds a tab in the workspace behind this window. Hint: You can keep this window open at the side of the screen as a way of finding and opening any modules. It retains its size and position between sessions. Favorites The Favorites pop-up menu lets you collect together for convenience the modules you use most often. Items from Texts, Parallels, Tools, and User Tools can be dragged to the Favorites to add them to that pop-up menu. The items remain in their original position, and a copy is added to the Favorites. The Browser The font size of this window is set in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). Clicking in the left margin of an open folder (where the cursor becomes an X) closes that folder. Option-click on any category triangle opens and closes all the categories and subfolders in the window. This allows you conveniently to view a complete list of modules. Hint: If you copy or print to PDF the complete list of modules, you can then it to OakTree, if they have a question about what you have installed. Introduction 5-7

58 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules Saving your Changes Click Update to implement the changes you have made, but leave the window open for further editing. If you have deleted any modules from the pop-up menus, you will be given a warning and an opportunity to cancel the changes. Click the Close button to dismiss the window. If you have any unsaved changes, a save warning will appear allowing you to save or discard your changes, or return to the window. Hint: Once you have set up your modules in Arrange modules, you can replace the Texts, Tools, and Parallels settings files in the Accordance folder/accordance Preferences with the files from your user s /Library/ Preferences/Accordance Preferences as a backup as well as for new users. If you have to delete your user preferences for any reason, the modules and arrangements will be restored from the Accordance folder The Instant Details Box The Instant Details box displays more information about the word or item currently under the cursor. The information displayed depends on the type of module and the exact position of the cursor. Features of the Instant Details If the box is not open, select Instant Details (Window menu or -B). As you use the mouse to move the cursor over the screen, the instant details are constantly updated. There is no need to click on the word, nor to make the window the front window. Simply place or drag the cursor over the word and the information will appear in the box. The information displayed depends on the type of module and the exact position of the cursor. This text cannot be copied or altered. It is shown only as a quick reference for the text being viewed. To freeze the text temporarily, press the shift key when moving the cursor. Clicking the font size buttons lets you adjust the text sizes in the box. The box can be resized by dragging the square gray grow box in the lower right corner. Selecting Preferences and Instant Details Box (Application or Edit menu or -,) lets you set which items are displayed for keyed and morphologically tagged texts, and turn on the auto-fade (see below). The following types of information may be displayed in the box: 5-8

59 A word in a Keyed Bible text: The English word, the Key (Strong s) number, the dictionary form of the original word, and the English transliteration of the original Greek or Hebrew word. See Chapter 9-Keyed Bible Texts. A word in a German Bible tagged with lemmas: The word and the lemma. A word in a morphologically tagged original language text: The lexical, inflected, and root forms (if different from the lemma) of the word in the original language, and transliterated into English, the grammatical analysis of the word, and the English meaning of the dictionary form. See Chapters G2 and G4. A word in untagged Greek or Hebrew text: The English transliteration of the word. A Map window: The distance from the first option click, elevation, and coordinates of the cursor position. See Chapter A1. A Timeline window: The date and region of the point under the cursor, and the distance from the first option click. See Chapter T1. A Scripture reference in a Tools window, or a User Note or User Tools window: The first verse of the reference, in the default Bible text for that tool. Other hypertextable items in a tool: Details of abbreviations, bibliography, section titles, etc. See Chapter 14-Tools. Introduction 5-9

60 5 Floating Windows and Arrange Modules Auto-fading Checking Set to automatically fade in in the Instant Details page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) turns on the auto-fade. This makes the Instant Details box fade whenever there are no items displayed in the box, thus saving space on small screen monitors. Pressing shift or moving the mouse quickly to the Instant Details box stops the fading and allows access to the title bar, Size buttons and grow box. Setting the Defaults You can set the display of the box by selecting Instant Details Box from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,). These options only affect the items displayed in the floating Instant Details box, not the parsing of selected words in the Parsing window. Set to automatically fade is described above. The Font size: pop-up menu lets you choose Small, Medium, or Large. The Key Number options will be dimmed unless a Keyed Bible text is added. Unchecking the English word, Dictionary form, Key number, or English transliteration removes that item from the Instant Details box. The Greek and Hebrew options will be dimmed unless a morphologically tagged or keyed text is added. Unchecking the Inflected form, Lexical form, Root form, Grammatical details, English gloss definition, or English transliteration removes that item from the Instant Details box. (The English gloss definition is dimmed unless a tagged text has been opened in that session.) The grammatical details can be displayed as Abbreviations or as Full words. Clicking OK closes the dialog box and saves ALL the changes you have made to the different pages. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog box without saving ANY changes. Note: The order of the grammatical tags can be set in the Arrange Tags pane of the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,). 5-10

61 Viewing the Text 6 Chapter Contents: Working with Text Panes The Text Navigating through the Text Selecting and Marking Verses Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel Changing the Display in a Text Pane Comparing Texts Verse Matching and Discrepancies Selecting and Copying Text

62 6 Viewing the Text Working with Text Panes The text panes of the Search window display the results of your search in a Bible text. All the verses in the current search text that meet the criteria you provide are displayed in the text pane. The window can be resized using the zoom or size box to show as much of the text as your screen size allows. The items in the top and bottom bars apply to all the panes below. number of hits current verse/total verses Details button Add pane popup menus display text pop-up menu font size buttons user notes mark bookmark text access buttons reference box The Top Bar This bar shows some search statistics and displays buttons which apply to the window. The large numeral 30 at the far left indicates the number of hits found by the current search criteria. This number disappears when the search is for verses. Verse 1 of 27 indicates the first verse visible in the text pane, and the total number of verses in the text pane. The first number changes as you scroll through the search results. The second number changes when you perform a new search that finds a different set of verses. Note: The number of hits may be more or less than the number of verses. In the above example, Adam occurs more than once in some of the verses, so there are more hits than verses. In a search for Adam <AND> Eve, the number of hits is the sum total of the occurrences of Adam and of Eve in the matching verses. Conversely, the use of certain search fields may cause several verses to be displayed for each hit as described in Chapter 7. The Details button is active when a word search has been performed in the window. Clicking it opens a new workspace which lets you quickly access four types of analysis of the results of your search: Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table, as described in Chapter 11. The Add pane icon buttons open pop-up menus which allow you to add other Bible versions, Reference Tools, and your own User Notes in new panes parallel to the Bible text (see below). 6-2

63 The Panes Bar This bar repeats a set of buttons for each pane. At the top left of the pane is the display text pop-up menu, which allows you to set the text to be displayed in the pane. This pop-up menu contains all the texts that you have added to Accordance, and that belong to the same corpus as the search text. If the search text is a Bible text, all Bible texts appear in this menu, but if, for example, the search text is a Qumran text, only the Qumran versions can be selected as display texts. Changing a display text does not change the results of the search; it only changes the version in which the results are shown. A text tip with the full name of the module appears if the cursor lingers over any text or tool pop-up menu. Note: If a text does not appear in this pop-up menu, you need to make it available to Accordance by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option -A), and clicking the Add Module button. The font size buttons let you quickly increase or decrease all the current font display sizes in the pane below. Clicking on the large A or pressing -= (plus) increases the font size of all text in the pane, with special font styles such as verse references increased in proportion to the main text. Clicking on the small A or pressing -- (minus) decreases the font sizes. Pressing option while clicking this button changes the font size of all the panes. The position button on some panes switches the pane between a second row below the Bible text to a vertical pane parallel to the texts. Pressing option while clicking this button places the pane to the left of the panes in the other row. The Bottom Bar This bar contains buttons for navigating through the text, as described later in this chapter. The Text The results of a search appear in the text pane in its current text version. Right-click or control-click in the text pane opens a contextual menu with options for the text display and for a variety of functions that are available for your text selection. Style of Hits If the version in the text pane is the same as the search text, the words which match the search criteria (the hits ) are highlighted with a different color and/or style. The style of the highlight is selected in the text pane display settings described later in this chapter. Note: No hits are shown if the pane displays a text other than the search text, or when the text is searched by verse rather than by word. Searching the Bible 6-3

64 6 Viewing the Text Text Styles Some texts have certain styles included when they are formatted for Accordance. These styles include italics for words implied but not found in the original text, SMALL CAPS for the Divine Name (LORD), and in some texts, for quotations of the Old Testament in the New, and poetry designated by short indented lines with a further indent when the text wraps around. Note: Texts with poetic styling will be closest in appearance to the printed text if you select the Continuous verse display, and Omit Book and Chapter reference display in the Text settings dialog box described later in this chapter. Note: SMALL CAPS styled text is not as clearly legible at the smaller point sizes. Certain versions of the New Testament show the words attributed to Christ in red letters. You can hide the red letter text as shown below. Certain Bibles include the markers for the margin notes. These markers are for reference only you cannot search for them nor link directly to the note. Pressing the option key while copying, copies the text without the superscript markers. Navigating through the Text The Scroll Bar You can move through the search results by using the scroll bar to the right of the pane. Clicking on the up or down arrow scrolls the text one line in the corresponding direction. Clicking on the scroll bar above or below the scroll bar slider, or pressing the page up and page down keys, moves the text one page in the respective direction. Pressing the home and end keys on the extended keyboard scrolls the window to the top or bottom respectively. You can also drag the slider to a new location on the scroll bar. As you move the slider, the text scrolls rapidly to the new position. The mouse scroll wheel also scrolls the part of the window under the cursor. 6-4

65 The Reference Box The reference box at the lower right enables you to go directly to any verse in the search results. It displays the reference of the verse that is currently at the top of the text pane. To edit a reference, press tab twice to select the text in the reference box, and type or paste the new reference. When you click the Go To button (or press return), the verse closest to the reference appears at the top of the text pane. The Text Access Buttons Use the text access buttons to move quickly and easily through the text pane. Clicking one of the up or down triangle buttons once moves you to the previous or next verse, chapter, or book, respectively. If you hold the mouse down on a text access button, the search results scroll continuously until you release the mouse. An additional pair of buttons, the Mark buttons, appear only when verses have bookmarks, and jump the text to the next mark. Pressing the shift key while clicking a button moves you through 10 verses, chapters, books, or marks at a time. Prior and Next buttons appear after you click a Mark button or a hyperlink in a tool pane, to enable you to retrace your steps. Keyboard Shortcuts Pressing command, option-command, or control-option-command with the up and down keys on the keyboard, performs the same actions as the verse, chapter, and book access buttons. Control-command with the up and down arrows moves to the next mark, and with the left and right arrows moves to the prior or next step. Pressing shift with these arrow key combinations advances the text 10 times. Auto Scrolling You can allow a window with a single pane to scroll slowly automatically. Commandclicking on the up or down scroll bar arrows starts the auto-scrolling, and any mouse click stops it. Select the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) to enable and set the speed of the scrolling. Searching the Bible 6-5

66 6 Viewing the Text Selecting and Marking Verses Selecting A verse is selected whenever the mouse is clicked on the text, or text is selected anywhere within the verse. A selection may include more than one adjacent verse in a pane. After a verse is selected, its reference is used to access some features in the Resource palette (or Amplify menu), and also to add to a reference list in the Selection menu. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features and Chapter 18-Reference Lists.) Bookmarks 6-6 Bookmarks are temporary marks that you can easily add to verses. When the Context pop-up menu is set to All, a bookmark appears on each hit verse. Selecting Mark Selection (Selection menu or -7) adds a blue bookmark to a selected verse or verses. Bookmarks appear in the selected pane only until a new search is performed. They allow you advance the text from one marked verse to another, and to add the marked verses to a reference list. Holding down the option key while the cursor is over a text pane, converts the cursor symbol to a bookmark. Clicking the bookmark cursor on any part of a verse also marks the verse. If the verse is already marked, clicking the bookmark cursor on the verse will remove the bookmark. The first time you select Mark Selection you will get a reminder of the alternative way to add bookmarks. The bookmarks appear in the right margin of the text pane. New Mark access buttons appear in the bottom of the window to enable you to move to the next marked verse, in a manner similar to the other text access buttons. Pressing controlcommand with the up and down keys also moves to the next mark. Prior and Next buttons enable you to retrace your steps after clicking a Mark button. Like selected verses, marked verses can be added to a reference list by selecting a list from the Add Marked Verses To submenu (Selection menu). (See Chapter 18- Reference Lists.) Hint: Adding marked or selected verses to a Reference List window is a convenient way to print non-contiguous verses from a Search window. Selecting Remove All Marks (Selection menu or option- -7) clears all bookmarks.

67 Color Highlighting Color Highlighting lets you mark the background of the text in a variety of colors and line patterns. Unlike bookmarks, the highlighting is saved and can be seen in any window with the same text. (See Chapter 17-Color Highlighting.) User Notes A red dot in the same margin marks each verse in the text pane which has a note attached to it in a user notes file. The dot is visible over a bookmark added to the same verse. Double-clicking on the dot opens all the user notes for that verse. (See Chapter 19- User Notes.) Viewing Texts and Tools in Parallel You can view your search results in multiple versions at the same time by opening new text panes in the Search window. Adding Panes To open a new text pane, select the version from the Add pane: Text pop-up menu in the top bar of the text pane. The menu displays the same texts as the display text pop-up menu described above. A single click on the icon adds the text that was last selected, or the first text. A new text pane appears in the Search window showing all the verses found by the search (provided that those verses occur in the new version). The top of each text pane displays the same verse in the search results. You can open as many text panes as will fit in your window. (There is a minimum width for a pane.) If no more panes can be opened in the first row, the next pane starts a second row below the first. Scrolling Movement of the text panes is normally synchronized. The text of the top verse in every other pane in the Search window matches the verse at the top of the selected pane. Differences in verse numbering are accounted for as described later in this chapter. Searching the Bible 6-7

68 6 Viewing the Text When you use the up or down arrow on the scroll bar, the selected pane moves one line at a time. The other panes do not move until the selected pane has a different verse at the top. When you use the scroll box or reference box to move through the text, all the panes move together. Pressing the control key or the right mouse button while scrolling, scrolls only the selected pane, so you can compare different passages. The panes are synchronized again if you release the control key or right mouse button and scroll to another verse, or if you click any access button. Features of Panes Whenever you are viewing more than one pane, only one of the panes is selected or active. The selected pane has a blue outline inside the pane border. To select a pane, click the mouse anywhere within the pane, or press shift-tab to select the next pane. A selected pane is indicated by a solid blue frame around the pane. Bookmarks and user note marks always appear in the selected pane, and will move across if another pane is selected. The hit words are highlighted only in panes displaying the same text as the search text. The width of a pane can be changed at any time. When you move the mouse over the dotted line that divides the panes, the cursor changes into a two-headed arrow. You can then drag the divider to a new position. Hint: Changing the width of a pane is useful for lining up the verses between texts that are viewed in different fonts or have significantly different translations. Each pane has its own display text pop-up menu and font size buttons. Pressing the option key while clicking a font size button increases or decreases the font size in all the panes. When there are multiple panes a close button appears to the left of each display text pop-up menu. Changing the search text to another corpus changes all the text panes as well (but not any User Notes or Reference tools). The pane position button appears on a text pane when it is added to the lower row for lack of space. It disappears once the pane is switched to the top row. 6-8

69 To close a text pane (when there is more than one in the window), click the close button, or drag the divider to near the window edge or the edge of the adjacent pane. You can also select the pane you wish to close by clicking anywhere within its boundary, then select Close Pane (File menu or -Y). Other Panes The Reference Tool and My Notes buttons beside the Add pane: Text button add special panes to view either Reference tools such as the margin notes or commentaries, or your own commentary (User Notes). These panes are first added in a horizontal pane at the bottom of the window, but can be toggled between the rows by clicking the pane position button. Pressing the option key while clicking the button switches the pane to left of the other row (instead of the right). Pressing option while adding a pane adds it directly to the upper row. Each pane displays the entire tool rather than the entries for selected verses, but all the panes scroll together so that the verses at the top of the panes are aligned as closely as possible. The text of the tools shown in these panes is the same as in the specialized windows for these tools, and allows amplifying and hypertexting. However, you cannot search the tools inside the Search window. Clicking internal links in a tool pane jumps the entire window to the new position. Prior and Next buttons appear in the bottom bar to allow you to return to the original position. The Reference Tool pane is described in detail in Chapter 14-Tools. See also Chapter 19-User Notes. Changing the Display in a Text Pane The Text Settings dialog box allows you to customize how text is displayed in each text pane. You can also set a separate default display format for each available text, and choose different colors for the different elements of each text. The current settings for the display of the text also apply when the text is printed. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) To format the text display, select the pane of the text you wish to format by clicking anywhere in the pane. A blue outline appears just inside the dotted dividing line for the current pane. Select Set Text Pane Display (Display menu or -T). This brings up the Text Settings dialog box. The title of the Text Settings dialog box includes the name of the text or version in the selected pane. Clicking the OK button in the dialog box applies these settings only to the selected pane. To make these the default settings for all subsequent panes created for this text, click the Use as Default button. Searching the Bible 6-9

70 6 Viewing the Text format settings for text of verses format settings for references format settings for search hits Formatting the Text The upper left portion of the dialog box labeled Contents allows you to set the format for the display of the text of the verses themselves. The Show as Pop-up Menu The Show as: pop-up menu sets the layout of the verses in the pane. An example of each layout is shown beside the description. The Paragraphs option shows the text of contiguous verses as a continuous stream without moving to the next line after each verse. If the text supports paragraph markings, the display text starts a new line only when a new paragraph begins. If the text does not support paragraphs, the display text starts a new line at the start of each chapter. This option displays text which has been formatted as poetry so that it resembles the printed text as closely as possible. Note: If the verses are not contiguous, each verse begins on a new line. This makes it easy to identify the beginning of a new section of the search results. In Paragraphs display, only the verse numbers are shown within a paragraph. This overrides the current settings for the reference display location (described below). Paragraph markers are suppressed in this option. 6-10

71 The Paragraphs with space option is the same as the Paragraph option except that there is a blank line before each new section begins. This option helps to differentiate between non-adjacent verses in the search result, as well as between paragraphs and chapters. The Separate verses option causes the displayed text to begin a new line at the start of each verse. The Separate with space option is the same as the Separate option except that it displays a blank line between each verse in the text. The References only option displays only the references of verses that meet the search criteria. These options are also available in the Show Text as submenu of the Display menu (see below). The Font You can choose from any Font available on your system, along with a range of sizes. If the selected text requires a non-roman Accordance font (such as Greek or Hebrew), the font is dimmed and cannot be changed. Note: In Classic systems, Accordance fonts at sizes without bitmaps (especially 11, 16, 21 and 30) may appear very ragged. The Color: pop-up menu lets you choose the color of the main text in the pane. The Checkboxes These options are dimmed if they do not apply to this text. Hide verse highlighting and Hide word highlighting let you turn on or off the background color highlighting that you can add to the text as described in Chapter 17. Hide red letter turns off the red letter color used in some Bibles for the words attributed to Christ. Suppress poetry removes the short lines and indents that indicate poetic lines, and is useful for display in narrow panes. Hide superscripts displays the text without the superscripted numbers and letters which refer to the footnotes. Hide spaces displays Greek or Hebrew texts without spaces to approximate the appearance of early manuscripts. Searching the Bible 6-11

72 6 Viewing the Text 6-12 The Style of the Hits The Search Highlighting section in the lower left of the Text Settings dialog box contains the color and style pop-up menus. The Color pop-up menu controls the color display of the hit words in the text. Hint: You can use the White color to hide the hits for teaching or examination purposes. The Style pop-up menu lets you choose the style of these same hit words. The word Sample displays the currently selected styles. Each style selected in the menu shows a check mark. To remove a style, select it again from the menu, or select Plain Text to remove all styles. The Format of the References The upper right portion of the Text display dialog box labeled References allows you to format the verse references. The Show as Pop-up Menu The Format pop-up menu allows you to specify where the references appear in relation to the verses, and which parts, if any, of the reference are shown. Above Verse positions the reference on a line by itself. The text of the verse begins on the line after the verse reference. Before Verse positions the reference at the beginning of the first line of the verse text. This is the Accordance default. After Verse positions the reference at the end of the last line of the text of the verse. Omit Entire Reference option the text of the verses without references. Omit Book and Chapter displays only the verse number. The book name and the chapter number appear only on the first verse of each book and chapter respectively. Omit Book Name Only displays only the chapter and verse numbers except at the start of each book. The Checkboxes The four checkboxes let you vary the display of the references: Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether you want to display the full book name or an abbreviation of the book name. Include text abbreviation includes an abbreviation of the name of the text in this pane as a part of each reference, i.e. Gen. 1:1 (KJV).

73 Use decimal (.) verse divider separates the chapter and verse with a period (.) instead of a colon (:). Note: An option in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) uses European verse notation in all windows. It uses a comma (,) in place of a colon (:) to divide chapter and verse, and a period (.) in place of a comma to separate a list of references. Use English book names appears for some foreign language texts. If unchecked, the book names appear in the language of the text. The Font You can use the Font, Color, and Size pop-up menus to select from any font available on your system along with a range of font sizes and colors. The Style pop-up menu lets you select from the standard styles. The word Sample displays the currently selected styles. At the bottom of the menu is a Superscript option. This option is effective only when one of the Continuous verse display options is selected as described in the previous section. When both options are selected, verse references within a paragraph are displayed as a superscript number in the currently selected reference style Applying the Changes Clicking the OK button in the Text Settings dialog box applies these settings to the selected text pane in the Search window. To save your settings as the default for each subsequent display of that text version, click the Use as Default button on the bottom left. After clicking on this button you are asked to verify that you want to save these settings as your default. Click the Save button in the verify dialog box to confirm that all subsequent displays of this text will use these settings. To set the default display for ALL Bible texts at once select Text Display from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Preferences or Edit menu or -,). (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) Searching the Bible 6-13

74 6 Viewing the Text Display Menu Options The verse display of the front pane can be quickly changed by choosing items in the Display menu. The Show Text as submenu offers the same options as the Show as pop-up menu in the Text Settings dialog box. The current selection is indicated by a check mark. Hide Verse References displays the text without the references, and cannot be selected together with References only. Selecting List All Book Names with a Search window in front, opens a window displaying English Bible book names and standard abbreviations in order for the selected text, and the alternate names for a text in another language. Comparing Texts Checking the Compare Texts checkbox in the More Options section of the Search window (or on a Text or Reference window), highlights the differences between the first two texts of each language in the panes. Three kinds of highlighting are used: different words (strikethrough) inserted words (heavy underline) deleted words (heavy vertical line). 6-14

75 The highlighting appears in the first pair of panes with the same character set (Latin, Greek, or Hebrew), the first pair of panes with another character set, and any panes that display the same text as one of the highlighted panes. For example, if the panes display NRSV, KJV, GNT-T, NJB, GNT-TR, and KJV, all but the NJB will be highlighted, the NRSV will be compared with the KJV, and the GNT-T with the GNT-TR. The highlighting is printed if it is displayed when the text panes are printed. The following options can be set in the Compare Text page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,): Comparison of words, lemmas or tags (ignored in untagged texts) Case sensitivity (for upper case and final forms) Ignoring punctuation Ignoring accents and other diacritical marks Colors for each kind of highlighting. Note: When the compare is set to lemmas or tags rather than words, an (L) or (T) appears beside an active Compare Texts checkbox. Note: Punctuation differences include tabs and return characters, but blanks and superscripts are always ignored. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences and Grammatical Supplement Chapter G5.) Selecting List Text Differences (Display menu) creates a report of the text differences in the first two columns that use the same character set but different texts. It can also be opened from the contextual menu in the surround of the search entry section. This report can be printed or saved as text with tabs separating the columns. The report depends on the same Preferences as the Compare Text feature described above. It is simply another way of showing and exporting the differences. The report is not updated when the text changes in the Search window. Searching the Bible 6-15

76 6 Viewing the Text Verse Matching and Discrepancies Between different Biblical texts there are often discrepancies in the numbering and order of verses. Accordance always attempts to match the content of verses in parallel panes rather than the actual verse reference. For instance, Psalm titles in Hebrew, though usually a single separate verse, are sometimes merged with the first verse, and sometimes take up an extra verse. This results in a shift of the verse numbers relative to most English translations. (In Accordance, unnumbered Psalm titles are designated verse 0.) The Septuagint (LXX) has many instances of reordering of verses, and so do translations such as the Latin Vulgate and New American Bible (NAB). The order of books in the Bible texts also varies between versions. Accordance matches the order of the books and verses in the text panes to that of the current search text shown in the search text pop-up menu in the upper left of the window. In each text pane the corresponding verses are shown with the correct reference for that display text. Missing Verses Under some circumstances a verse may be found in the search text when there is no corresponding verse in one of the display texts. In this case, two dashes (--) appear in the display text to signify the verse that has no equivalent in this version. In the above example, Psalm 51 is displayed in the Jewish Publication Society (JPS) text which follows the order of the Hebrew Bible. The title takes up two verses so that verse 1 in the NAS95S matches verse 3 in the JPS. The title in verse 0 (KJV) matches verse 1-2 JPS. It has been assigned to verse 2 (JPS) so that verse 1 (JPS) is missing in the NAS95S as indicated by the two dashes. Hint: When a verse is missing from a display text, you can use the Context button in the Resource palette to view the surrounding verses. (See Chapter 13-Amplifying your Selection.) Hint: When a verse is missing from the search text (such as 2 Cor 13:13 in the GNT), it will not display in parallel panes even when the entire chapter is displayed. To see the verse, change the search text to the another version that includes the verse, and click OK. 6-16

77 Verses Out of Order When there is a discrepancy in verse order or numbering between different versions of the text, Accordance matches the order and the text of the verses in the other display versions to the verses in the search text. In the example below, the verses of 1 Kings 4 and 5 have been both renumbered and reordered in the NAB as compared to the KJVS. In the following example the NAB is the search text. The KJVS display is reordered to match the NAB. Note that the NAB has renumbered the end of 1 Kings 4 and the beginning of chapter 5, so that 1 Kings 4:27 (KJVS) corresponds to 1 Kings 5:7 (NAB). In addition, the NAB places 1 Kings 4:20 and 5:1 (NAB) after 5:8. If the KJVS were the search text, the NAB display would be reordered to match the KJVS. Searching the Bible 6-17

78 6 Viewing the Text Selecting and Copying Text The text in a text pane can be selected much like the text in a standard word processor. The text cannot be changed, but you can select it for copying or printing. Copying the selection places it on the clipboard and makes it available for pasting at an appropriate place in Accordance or another program. The selected text is highlighted (surrounded by a color). Selecting Text In Accordance you can select text in the standard Macintosh ways: Click and hold the mouse button down at either end of the text you wish to select, and drag it across the rest of the text. Click the mouse at the starting point of the text you wish to select. The blinking insertion point appears at that location. Move the mouse to the end of the text you wish to select. While holding down the shift key, click the mouse. Double-click anywhere on the word to select a single word without its punctuation. Double-click and drag to select word by word. Use the arrow keys in combination with the shift and option keys to select text word by word or line by line. Click the mouse anywhere in the text and choose Select All (Edit menu or -A) to select all the text in the window, pane, or box where the cursor is blinking. This selects all the text whether or not it is currently visible. After you have selected the text, you can use the copy options below, or: Open the contextual menu with a right or control-click and select the most common functions. (See Chapter 24-Other Features.) Amplify to any of the features of the Resource palette. (See Chapter 12-Amplfy Features.) Print it by choosing Print Selection (File menu). (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) Send it to OS X Services, such as Mail, Stickies, certain word processors, Apple s Summarize service, etc. Copying Text 6-18 To copy your selection, choose Copy (Edit menu or -C). This copies the text to the clipboard. Up to 500 verses can be selected for copying. Copied text can be pasted either in Accordance or into another program. Click the mouse to place the blinking insertion point where you want to place the copied text. Now choose Paste (Edit menu or -V). The pasted text appears, and the blinking insertion point is moved to the end of the pasted text. You can also replace a portion of text by selecting it and choosing Paste. The selected text is replaced by the previously copied text.

79 Note: In Accordance you can paste text only into places where you can enter text. Thus, while you can paste text into the argument entry box, certain other text boxes, or an Edit window, you cannot paste text into the contents of a text pane. Text copied to the clipboard retains its font and style information. When you paste into another program which supports this feature, the fonts and styles used, and the highlighting of hits are preserved. Not all word processors accept this information from the clipboard. You can also retain the font and style information by saving the contents of a pane as an RTF text file and importing it into your word processor. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) Note: Text in SMALL CAPS is converted to ALL CAPS for export. The Superscript/ Subscript styles are not preserved during copying because these styles are not supported in the clipboard. Pasting a List If you copy and paste a list of words or verse references into the argument entry box, Accordance replaces the carriage returns with commas or semicolons, depending on the current Search for setting. This makes it easier to convert the list into search criteria. Copy As Options The Copy As submenu (Edit menu) offers various special options for copying selections: No Superscript (or option- -C) copies the selected text without any superscript characters. Citation (or control- -C) copies the selected text without according to the format set in the Citation page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) References (or option- -R) lets you copy to the clipboard only verse references from the front window. You can then paste the references into the argument entry box of any window, or into another document. The references will be formatted according to Accordance conventions, so that they can be used immediately to find the verses. If there is no selection in the text pane, and the cursor is not flashing in the window, the references for all the verses currently in the window are copied. If text is selected in the text pane, only the references of the selected verses are copied. Pressing the shift key while selecting Copy Citation or Copy References copies references with the full book names (i.e. Genesis rather than Gen.). Transliteration (or option- -T) copies and converts the selected text to Rosetta transliteration font. Searching the Bible 6-19

80 6 Viewing the Text Style Only and Paste Style (or -[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of any selected text, and paste these characteristics onto a new selection in certain panes such as the Edit window for User Notes or Tools. This feature is especially helpful when you repeatedly need to set more than one characteristic, such as the font and size, or two styles together. Drag and Drop Accordance supports the Macintosh drag and drop feature. This feature requires System 7.5 or above. When you select text, the cursor changes to a white arrow and a square. You can now drag the selection to anywhere in the window, or to another window. Holding the option key down while you drag copies the selection to a new location within the same text box. A plus sign on the cursor indicates that it will make a copy. If you attempt to drag the selection to a part of the window which cannot accept it, the cursor changes to a large X. If you drag the selection to a window which does accept it, the selection appears to return to its original location when you release the mouse button. You can also simply drag your selection and drop it in your word processor document. Many word processors support this feature. If you drag and drop your selection onto a Finder window or the desktop, a text clipping is created. It forms a stand-alone file which can be opened in the Finder, and copied to the clipboard at any time. Some programs that support drag and drop also allow you to drag the text clipping and drop it into a document. You can suppress the drag and drop feature in the General page of the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,). Greek and Hebrew Options When Greek or Hebrew text is exported from Accordance, whether by copying, dragging, or saving as text, it is affected by the current options in the Preferences dialog box. Choosing Greek & Hebrew after selecting Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) gives you many options including converting the text to English characters or to Unicode. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) 6-20

81 Doing Searches 7 Chapter Contents: Using the Search Entry Box The Search Text Pop-up Menu Displaying a Text by Reference Defining Search Arguments Expressions in Accordance Entering Words and Phrases Setting the Search Field Search Ranges

82 7 Doing Searches The Search Entry Section The search entry section is the place where you tell Accordance what you want it to find in a Bible text. The search entry section consists of the argument entry box in which you enter the search itself, and various pop-up menus and buttons which affect the search and its display. These items were introduced in Chapter 4, and are now described in detail. search text pop-up menu Search for radio buttons tie symbol recycle symbol argument entry box search field pop-up menu search range pop-up menu Compare Texts checkbox Add context pop-up menu History pop-up menu Entering a Search The basic steps for entering a search argument are: 1. Select the text to be searched in the Search text pop-up menu. 2. Choose between Search for Words or Verses. 3. Enter the search criteria in the argument entry box. 4. Set any applicable options. 5. Click OK. The Right-click or control-click contextual menus give you quick access to the most important options inside the argument entry box, and around it (More Options). The Argument Entry Box The actual criteria for your search (the search argument) are entered into the argument entry box. A wide array of commands and options is available to help you define the precise nature of your search. These can all be entered into the entry box using menus and dialog boxes. You can also simply type a word or phrase in the box, and click OK to perform the search. The entry of search arguments is described in detail later in this chapter. Using the Tab Key Pressing the tab key while the Search window is the front window selects the entire contents of the argument entry box. Pressing the tab key again selects the contents of the reference box in the lower right corner of the window. Subsequent tab actions toggle the selection between these two boxes. 7-2

83 Language of the Argument Entry Box All entries in the argument entry box appear in the system font except when the search text is a non-roman language such as Greek or Hebrew. In these cases Accordance uses the system font only for commands and verse references. When you enter your search criteria, Accordance automatically switches between fonts and languages as needed. Note: In OS 8 and 9 you have a choice of system font settings. Using the OK Button Clicking the OK button, or pressing return or enter, performs the search and updates the search results. If the OK button in the entry box is dimmed, the search argument has not changed since the last time the search was performed. If the button is not dimmed, the search results below do not match the criteria above. The Search for Radio Buttons Above the argument entry box there are two radio buttons labeled Search for Words Verses which set the search mode. Clicking these buttons or their labels, or using the keyboard shortcut commandsemicolon, ( -;) toggles or switches between the two kinds of searches, and selects the contents of the entry box. When Verses is selected (option- -V) you can enter the book, chapter, or verse reference for the text you wish to view. Selecting Words (option- -W) enables you to enter words, phrases and other more complex criteria for searching the text. The search argument is automatically selected when you toggle the radio buttons so that you can quickly enter a new argument The History Pop-up Menu The small double arrow labeled History in the top right corner of the Search window (and on all other windows that have an argument entry box), saves the last search arguments for Verses and Words searches, as well as the setting of the radio buttons, and lets you recall them by selecting one from the menu. The last search argument appears in the menu after the search is completed. Selecting Clear Menu removes the stored items from the list. Up to 50 arguments can be recalled from the menu. Earlier arguments are dropped if this limit is exceeded. The length of the recalled argument is limited to 255 characters. Greek and Hebrew words appear in the system font, but will convert back to the original font when searching a Greek or Hebrew text. The searches on the menu are recalled if the window is saved as a file and reopened (this applies also to Tools windows). Searching the Bible 7-3

84 7 Doing Searches The Tie and Recycle Symbols The brown tie symbol and the green recycle symbol appear above the History pop-up menu when appropriate. They do not appear in a new Search window until one of these options is selected in the Window menu. The tie symbol indicates that the scrolling of this window is tied to the scrolling of another window. The recycle symbol indicates that the window will be reused for repeated Amplify functions. Clicking on it turns it on and off. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features, and Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) Resizing the Entry Section You can resize the search entry section by moving the section divider that separates it from the text window panes. When the cursor is over the line, it changes to a two-headed arrow, allowing you to drag the line up or down to a new location. The More Options Section The More options triangle opens a middle section with the Field, Range, and Context pop-up menus, and the Compare Texts checkbox. The prompt explains the purpose of the first two pop-up menus which are described in detail later in this chapter. If a range other than [All text] is selected, and the section is closed, the range name appears beside More options as a reminder. Similarly, brackets appear beside More options if one of the brackets options is selected in the Field pop-up menu. The field and range pop-up menus are dimmed in a Verses search, as they do not apply. These pop-up menu settings are retained in memory and are restored when you toggle back to the Words search. These pop-up menus are described in detail later in this chapter. The Compare Texts feature is covered in Chapter 6-Viewing the Text. The Add Context Pop-up Menu The pop-up menu labeled Add context: lets you add verses around the hit verses in your search results. The advantage of this feature is that, unlike the Context feature, the hit words in the results remain highlighted, yet the verses can be read in context. Selecting one of the numbers from the menu displays the specified number of verses before and after each hit verse. Choosing None displays only the hit verses. Selecting All displays the entire text with a bookmark beside each hit verse in addition to the highlighted hits. The Mark buttons then appear to allow you to jump to the next or prior hit verses. 7-4

85 You can set the number of context verses at any time. If you have not yet performed the current search, the effect of setting the context will only be seen when you click OK or press return or enter. If you reset the context after doing a search, Accordance performs the search again, updates the window to display the desired number of verses, and returns to the verse you were viewing. The Search Text Pop-up Menu The search text pop-up menu shows the current search text and allows you to select from any text currently available to Accordance. The setting of this menu determines the version of text that is searched. The criteria and arguments that you provide in the argument entry box are matched against the contents of this text. The options available to you in Accordance are tailored to the type of text specified in the search text pop-up menu. Keyed Bible texts (like the KJVS or NIV-G/K) and morphologically tagged Greek or Hebrew texts offer additional capabilities that do not apply when searching plain texts. A text tip with the full name of the module appears if the cursor lingers over any text or tool pop-up menu. To change the search text, select a different text from the search text pop-up menu. If the window is set to search for Verses, and there is an asterisk in the argument entry box, the contents of the text panes will be updated to display the entire new text. Otherwise, the OK button is undimmed and must be clicked to repeat the search for the new text. Pressing control 1 through 9 changes this pop-up menu to the corresponding (first through ninth) text on the list. Pressing control + (=) or control up arrow changes to the next text, and pressing control - or control down arrow changes to the prior text on the list. The search text does not need to be the same as the text displayed in the text panes below it. However, the panes change automatically to display the new search text if you change to a text not currently displayed in the text panes (and there are text panes displaying the previous search text), or if you change to a different corpus such as the Qumran instead of the Bible. Select Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) to set the arrangement of the modules in this and all other pop-up menus of this type. See Chapter 5-Floating Windows and Arrange Modules for more details on the Arrange Modules window. Searching the Bible 7-5

86 7 Doing Searches Displaying a Text by Reference When Accordance is first opened, the Search window displays all the verses of the first text available to Accordance. The window is set to search for Verses and the argument entry box contains an asterisk (*) which signifies every verse in the text. Each time you open Accordance, the entire default text will be displayed in the first Search window unless you set the default search to Words. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) To display a specific portion of the text, set the search to Verses, press tab to select the current entry, and enter the references in the argument entry box. Click OK to display the requested text. Up to 32,000 characters can be used for the entry of references. Finding a Single Book To specify a single book, type the name or abbreviation of the English name of the book. For example, entering gen displays only the book of Genesis. Note: In Accordance, you only need to enter enough of a book name or a command to make it unique. Note: Do not enter a space in between a book number and its name. To find the first book of Kings enter 1Ki or 1Kings. However, if it is the first reference in the list the space is ignored, so 1 Kings, 2Ki is acceptable. The Symbols Submenu The Enter Symbol submenu (Search menu or contextual menu) displays a list of the available symbols with a brief description of their function. The list of symbols depends on whether the window is set to search for Words or Verses. Symbols which are dimmed on the menu are not appropriate for the current setting of the window. Selecting a symbol from this submenu places it in the argument entry box. Of course, you can also enter the symbol from the keyboard. 7-6

87 Using Symbols To specify a range of books, enter the first book name, a hyphen (-) or option hyphen ( ), and the last book name. For example, entering Genesis-Deuteronomy defines a range that covers the first five books of the Bible. A hyphen can also be used to describe a range of chapters or verses. Chapter numbers follow the book name after a space. Use a colon (:) or a period (.) between a chapter and a verse in a reference. For example, Gen 1:2 finds the second verse of the first chapter of Genesis. To specify multiple sections of a text, use a comma (,) between similar items in a list, and a semicolon (;) to separate different items. For example, Gen 2:5-6, 9-10; 3-4 will find Genesis chapter 2 verses 5, 6, 9 and 10, and all of chapters 3 and 4. Note: The European verse notation option in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) affects reference entry as well as display. It uses a comma (,) to divide chapter and verse, and a period (.) to separate a list of references. Adding f or ff after a reference extends it to the end of the last unit. Thus Mal 2:4ff includes all the verses to the end of chapter 2, Mal 2ff includes all the chapters until the end of the book, and Mal f includes all the books to the end of the Bible. If you paste or drag a list of references into the argument entry box, the carriage returns are replaced by semicolons to create a valid entry. (For a detailed discussion of valid names and symbols in Accordance, see Appendix C.). Note: References which are entered out of order are displayed in the order in which they are entered. Note: A reference to a verse or chapter which is missing in the search text displays the closest text to it. Therefore the entry Esther 0-99 displays the whole book irrespective of the number of chapters in that version of the text. Note: In English texts the reference verse 0 is used for Psalm titles. In some apocryphal books such as Sirach, chapter 0 is used for the introduction to the book. Defining Search Arguments The search argument tells Accordance what to find in the search text. It is entered in the argument entry box with the search set to find Words. Usually the argument is a simple word or phrase typed directly into the box. In addition, Accordance allows you to create very sophisticated arguments using symbols and commands. The next chapter is devoted to the details of these search commands and symbols. Up to 32,000 characters can be used for the entry of the search argument. You can also define your searches graphically by dragging and dropping the parts of the argument. These search arguments are described in detail in Chapter 10-Graphical Searches. Searching the Bible 7-7

88 7 Doing Searches Expressions in Accordance Expressions are the basic building blocks that form search arguments in the argument entry box. An expression in Accordance can be a word, phrase, Key number, a stand-alone tag definition, or a group of expressions in parentheses. One form of an expression is simply a word from the search text. A word expression can also contain wild-card characters for one or more letters. For example, the expression king* stands for all words beginning with the letters king, including kings and kingdom. A phrase is also a valid expression in Accordance. A phrase is a group of words separated by spaces. The argument out of the ground and the argument king* of Israel are both phrases. In Accordance, a group of expressions that are enclosed in parentheses are treated as a single expression. This means that they can be acted on by commands and be combined as part of larger search criteria. For example, the argument (king* of Israel <AND> David) is treated as a single expression. Entering Words and Phrases 7-8 The simplest search is one that looks for an exact word or phrase. For example, you can search for each occurrence of Aaron or Moses and Aaron. Word Entry and Spell Checking You can enter words by typing directly in the argument entry box, and also edit the entry. After you click OK to begin the search, your entry is checked to verify that each word actually occurs in the search text. If it does not, the Select Words dialog box appears and highlights a word closest in spelling to the word you entered. You can then select the word you want to enter. The Select Words Dialog Box You can also enter words in the argument entry box by selecting Enter Words (Search menu, contextual menu or -J) so that the Select Words dialog box appears: The Select Words dialog box contains an alphabetical list of every word that appears in the current search text. As in many similar dialog boxes in Accordance, the scroll bar, arrow keys, and scroll wheel scroll the list of words in the usual manner. To see the words from another available text, use the Text: pop-up menu to choose a new text. Choosing a new text in this dialog box does not change the current search text setting in the Search window. Because texts offer so many words to choose from, the Go to: box offers an efficient way to move through the list. Typing in this box scrolls the list to the place where the typed word appears in the alphabetical listing. For example, typing pow in the Go to box scrolls the list to powder.

89 To select a single word, doubleclick on it in the scrolling list, or click once to select it and click OK. This closes the dialog box and places the selected word in the argument entry box (at the insertion point). If you select multiple words, they are placed in parentheses and treated as alternate search criteria. This means that a search field meets the criteria if it contains any of these words. To select more than one word from the list, click once on each word that you want to select. As you click on them, the words accumulate in the Words to enter box on the bottom right of the dialog box where you can edit them if necessary. You can also shift-click to select up to 20 contiguous words. If you use the Go to box to locate the words, it clears after each word choice so it is ready for the next entry. If the Use exact word checkbox is checked, an equal sign (=) is placed before each word in the entry box. This constrains the search to the exact form you have selected, as described in the next chapter. The Select Words dialog box recalls the state of this checkbox when you close and re-open it, for morphologically tagged texts and for all other texts. After you select all the words you want, double-click on the last word you want or click OK to place the selected words in the argument entry box as a comma-separated list of words in parentheses. A multiple-word selection might look like this: (power, powerful, powers). This argument is equivalent to entering power <OR> powerful <OR> powers, but in parentheses it can be combined with other words in a phrase, or with search commands. Phrases and Complex Arguments If you want your search argument to be a phrase, type or copy the phrase into the entry box. Complex search arguments can be built using wildcards and other symbols as well as a variety of commands, and these are described in Chapter 8. Searching the Bible 7-9

90 7 Doing Searches Setting the Search Field The search field pop-up menu labeled Search within every in the More options section displays the current context or field for the search. This sets the granularity of searches that involve relationships between words and phrases. The entire search criteria must be met within the unit of text selected in the search field pop-up menu. For example, if you enter Adam <AND> Eve with the search field set to Clause, then both words must occur in the same clause for the verse to be found. The settings for the search field are Verse, Chapter, Clause, Sentence, Paragraph, and Book. A search field of Book slows your searches and is rarely needed. Note: If the search field is set to Clause, Sentence, or Paragraph, the entire sentence containing a hit is displayed. Because sentences often cross verse boundaries, verses that do not contain hits are often included in the display. Texts with paragraph information use the symbol to indicate the beginning of a paragraph. If a search text does not have paragraph data, the Paragraph item is dimmed (not selectable). If a text has no punctuation, such as the Hebrew Bible (BHS-W4), the Clause and Sentence items are also dimmed. (See Appendix C-Names and Symbols for details of the punctuation symbols which define clauses and sentences.) The options below the line Ignore Words Inside Brackets and Search Words Inside Brackets can be selected when the field is set to Verse. These options limit the search to either words outside the brackets or those inside. Brackets are usually used to mark editorial additions. This feature is particularly useful in the research texts such as Qumran or Inscriptions, the Hebrew Bible, and the Amplified version. When one of these options is selected, either closed or open brackets appear beside the More options label as a reminder. Search Ranges When the Search window is set to search for Words, the search range lets you limit your search to specific books, chapters or verses. For example, you may want to search only the book of Psalms, or create a range of all the books of poetry, and search them together. The search range pop-up menu labeled of in the More options section shows the current search range and allows you to select a previously defined range or define a new search range. You can save any number of ranges. The default value for the search range is [All text], which tells Accordance to search the entire search text. Selecting a previously defined range from the menu limits subsequent searches to the specified range. 7-10

91 The Define Ranges Dialog Box The Define Ranges dialog box lets you define a new range, modify or delete an existing range, and reorder the names on the list. You can open this dialog box by selecting Define Range from either the search range pop-up menu or the Search menu (or -R, or the contextual menu). If you have not defined any ranges, a basic set is provided for you. The first or the currently selected range is highlighted in the list, and its name and definition appear in the text boxes. To define a new search range, click New, and enter a name for the range into the Name box in place of [new range name]. You can enter any name up to 31 characters, however, it should describe the new search range. If a name on the list is selected, the new name is added below it, otherwise it is added at the bottom of the list. Next enter the biblical references which describe your new search range into the Definition box. Pressing tab will highlight [new range definition] and allow you to replace it with your own definition. This can be a single book or a series of references. The range need not consist of adjacent verses. Up to 510 characters may be used in a definition. In general, the format used for defining a range is the same as that used to display a text by reference, as described above. You can specify chapter and verse references if you wish, and use a hyphen to define a series of books, chapters, or verses. However, the range Judges-Ruth will include only those two books in most English Bibles but nearly the entire Hebrew Bible. To avoid such anomalies you can specify each book rather than a range. Once you have completed your definition, click the Verify button to add your new range to the search range list. Clicking on any other button, except Delete, or clicking on another name in the list, also validates the definition. Accordance checks the appropriateness of the definition for the current search text, both the references and the book order of ranges. If you enter Ruth-1Sam, the range will be accepted for English Bibles but not for the Hebrew Bible where Ruth is found towards the end. The text pop-up menu labeled Use book order in shows the current search text. You can select another text to allow validation of your range. Ranges can be added for texts from a non-biblical corpus such as Qumran. You can modify any range in the list by clicking on it and editing its name or definition. Searching the Bible 7-11

92 7 Doing Searches You can add additional search ranges by clicking the New button, typing a name and definition for the range and clicking on the Verify button. The Delete button removes the currently selected range, or a new range that you do not wish to keep. To delete an existing range, click on the name of the range, then click Delete. There is no confirmation dialog box or Undo feature for deleted ranges; however, closing the dialog box without updating discards any changes made since the dialog box was opened. Organizing the Ranges You can organize the search ranges in the list. First click on the search range you want to move to highlight it, then click (or click and hold) the Up or Down button to move it in the list. The order you select will determine the order in which your search ranges appear in the search range pop-up menu. Hint: You can indent ranges to group them on the list by adding blanks (pressing the space bar) before the name. Hint: You can create a dividing line to separate names on the list by creating a range with any valid definition, but only one or more hyphens (-) as the range name. Applying the Ranges When you have finished defining ranges, click the Update button to save all your changes to the Range pop-up menu, and make the current range the selection in the front window. The window remains open allowing you to continue editing the ranges while working in other windows. Closing the window before updating opens a dialog box which lets you save or discard the changes you have made. If a range other than [All text] is selected, and the More options section is closed, the range name appears beside More options as a reminder. Note: An alternative way of defining temporary ranges is to use the Range command which is described in Chapter

93 8 Search Symbols and Commands Chapter Contents: Searches Using Symbols Searches Using Commands Connecting Commands Stand-alone Commands Using Multiple Commands in a Search Linking Search Arguments Searching the Contents of Another Window Searching the Word List of Another Window

94 8 Search Symbols and Commands Symbols and commands enable you to define very specific and complex searches of the texts in Accordance. This chapter describes the use of these symbols and command in plain (untagged) texts. Additional options are available for the Keyed bible texts described in the next chapter. Many more searches can be defined for the morphologically tagged original language texts, as described in the Grammatical Supplement, Chapters G-1 and G-3. Searches Using Symbols You can use symbols in Accordance (such as * and?) to help define your search arguments. The Enter Symbol submenu (Search menu or contextual menu) shows the available symbols with a brief description of their function. Selecting a symbol from this submenu places it in the argument entry box. (See Appendix C-Names and Symbols.) Except for these specific uses, punctuation is not accepted in the argument entry box, and is ignored in the search text unless preceded by a period. Use the field popup menu to limit the search to a clause or sentence. Grouping Parentheses are used to group multiple expressions such as alternative words separated by a comma, or expressions joined by commands. They are described later in this chapter. Wild-cards You can use wild-card symbols both within single words and within words that are part of a phrase. The Asterisk An asterisk (*) indicates a global wild-card; that is, any number of letters in a word. Standing alone or as part of a phrase, the asterisk signifies any word. When used alone the asterisk will find all the words used in the current range. (When searching for Verses the asterisk stands for all verses.) 8-2

95 The asterisk cannot be used to stand for the first or last word in phrase, unless it is qualified by other criteria. Combined with specific letters it stands for any number of letters. For example, the argument sing* finds any word that starts with sing including sing, singer, singleness, etc., and b*g finds any word that begins with b and ends with g, regardless of its length. Negative Wild-card A hyphen immediately following a wild-card expression excludes the words following the hyphen from the expression. For example, the argument sing*-single* finds any word that starts with sing except for single, singleness, etc. Character Wild-cards Use a question mark (?) to represent any single letter in a word. You can specify the characters for the? wild-card by placing them in parentheses immediately following the question mark. A hyphen (-) preceding the characters specifies that the characters after the hyphen may not occur in that position, and a hyphen between the characters specifies a range. For example: b?t b?(a-i)t b?(eu)t b?(-u)t finds any three-letter word that begins with b and ends with t (bat, bet, bit, but). finds bat, bet and bit. finds only the words bet or but. finds all the words with the exception of but. A repeated character in a word can be found using a question mark followed by parentheses containing an equal sign and a numeral referring to the number of a prior question mark in the same word. For example: the entry a??(=1) would find all and add, but not and. To find any 5 letter palindrome such as level use the argument????(=2)?(=1) to specify that the word must have 5 letters, the fourth is the same as the second, and the fifth is the same as the first. Hint: Use the Analysis Detail to see all the words found by the wild-card. For example, set the range to a single chapter, and search for * to get a list and count of all the words used in the chapter. Inflected Form Quotation marks (single or double, straight or smart) are used to enclose inflected forms in morphologically tagged texts. For example: arb finds only the exact word bara whereas arb finds all words derived from this lexical form meaning create. Searching the Bible 8-3

96 8 Search Symbols and Commands 8-4 The At Sign The At sign is used to link together search criteria so that they apply to the same word. Examples include words and Key numbers, tag information with lexical, inflected forms or roots, or some commands. For example bibloß [NOUN] finds biblos followed by a noun whereas finds biblos when it is a noun The symbol is entered automatically when grammatical tags are defined immediately after a word. Exact Search The equal sign (=) requires a search for the exact form which follows it. The exact search includes all accents, word punctuation such as hyphens and apostrophes, and upper or lower case characters. Thus a search for =mark finds mark but not Mark, and =its finds its but not it s. If the equal sign is not used, then accents, punctuation, and case are ignored in the search. The equal sign is automatically entered in front of each word selected from the Select words dialog box, if the Use exact word box is checked. Note: Some older versions of Accordance modules do not fully support exact searches. Root Form The plus sign (+) requires a search for the root form in tagged texts, so that it finds all words derived from that root. For example: arb+ finds additional words that come from the root arb. Single Character A period (.) followed by any single character except a blank space, searches for that character. This can be used for alphanumeric characters, punctuation, accents and cantillation marks. The search is case sensitive, and can only be used when searching the Verse field (not within a sentence, chapter, etc.). Parentheses and commas are used as usual to indicate alternative characters. The character can be part of a phrase, expression, or a connecting expression. For example:.b finds any word including the letter b, but not B..; finds any semicolon. (..,.,) finds any period or comma. said., finds the word said followed immediately by a comma. said <AND>., finds the word said and any comma in the same verse../@[verb] find all Greek verbs which appear with an acute accent. In Hebrew this capability allows searching for cantillation marks either individually or together with a word or tag form. Hint: Use a space before the period in order to see a backspace character that you enter after the period.

97 In both Greek and Hebrew the search ignores differences in the amount of overstrike, and combination with other diacriticals. Therefore similar diacritical marks are found in one search. For example a search for an acute accent will not only find all the different overstrike acute accents, but also all combinations of a breathing mark with an acute accent. The CHAR. item in the Construct window is similar, but allows multiple characters. Many of the symbols are described in the relevant chapters, and summarized in Appendix C. Searches Using Commands Accordance offers a wide variety of commands to facilitate both simple and complex searches. Search commands constrain your search and allow you to specify relationships between words. All commands are indicated by surrounding brackets; either < > or [ ]. In general, the < > brackets denote connecting commands while the [ ] brackets denote stand-alone commands. Double clicking within a command in the argument entry box selects the whole command including the brackets. Entering Commands When you select a command from the Enter Command submenu (Search menu or contextual menu), it is pasted with the correct brackets into the argument entry box at the insertion point (where the cursor is blinking). The keyboard equivalents for the commands are the shift- key combinations indicated on the menu (hold down both the shift and command keys and press the letter key). You can also directly enter the command by typing enough letters to uniquely identify it. For example, Accordance reads <a> as <AND>. connecting commands stand-alone commands Searching the Bible 8-5

98 8 Search Symbols and Commands Connecting Commands Connecting commands are used to set up relationships between expressions. These commands must be preceded and followed by an expression. Multiple connecting commands can be combined in the argument entry box. In the following explanation and examples, X and Z stand for any valid expressions, and the search field pop-up menu is assumed to be set to Verse. <AND> X <AND> Z finds every case where X and Z are both present within the current search field. Both must be present for the criteria to be met. For example, the argument land <AND> promise finds every verse that contains both land and promise. Example of an AND search This example illustrates a simple search with a connecting command: You want to find every verse in the KJV that contains both the words crown and gold. First, set the search to Words and the search text to KJV. Enter crown into the empty argument entry box. Select the item AND from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -A). Now enter the word gold and click OK. The argument should read: crown <AND> gold. Note: The number of hits is the sum of the occurrences of each word in the verses that meet the search criteria, i.e. that contain both crown and gold. 8-6

99 <OR> X <OR> Z finds every case where either X or Z is present in the current search field. If either one is present, the search criteria is met. Entering land <OR> promise finds every verse that contains either land or promise or both. This command cannot be used in combination with other connecting commands. Note: Alternative words that are a part of a phrase are entered in parentheses and separated by commas. Thus, to search for verses that contain either the phrase holy land or the phrase holy people, enter holy (land, people). <NOT> X <NOT> Z finds cases of X, where Z is not present anywhere in the same field. This command is equivalent to <AND> <NOT>. Entering land <NOT> promise finds every verse that contains land and does not contain promise. This command can be used in combination with all other connecting commands except <OR> and <XOR>. <XOR> X <XOR> Z finds every case where only one of X or Z is present in the current search field. The <XOR> command differs from the <OR> command in that it does not find cases where both X and Z are present in the current search field. Entering land <XOR> promise finds every verse that contains either land or promise, but not both. This command cannot be used in combination with other connecting commands. <FOLLOWED BY> X <FOLLOWED BY> Z finds cases where X and Z are in the same field, with X always followed by Z. This command is equivalent to <AND> <FOLLOWED BY>. Entering land <FOLLOWED BY> promise finds every verse that contains promise following land. This command can be used in combination with other connecting commands except <OR> and <XOR>. Hint: To find verses where X occurs twice, search for X <FOLLOWED BY> X. <PRECEDED BY> X <PRECEDED BY> Z finds cases where X and Z are in the same field with X always preceded by Z. This command is equivalent to <AND> <PRECEDED BY>. Entering land <PRECEDED BY> promise finds every verse that contains promise preceding land. This command can be used in combination with other connecting commands except <OR> and <XOR>. Searching the Bible 8-7

100 8 Search Symbols and Commands <WITHIN? Words> X <WITHIN? Words> Z narrows the field of search between the two expressions to a range of words. This is equivalent to <AND> <WITHIN? Words>. Replace the question mark in the argument with a number (with a space on each side). A single number implies a range from one to that number of words. A specific range can be entered by using two numbers separated by a hyphen. A range of 1 means the expressions on either side of the WITHIN command must be adjacent to one another. For example, entering the command land <WITHIN 5 Words> promise means that promise must be from 1 to 5 words away from land (0 to 4 intervening words). A range of 5-7 means that promise must be from 5 to 7 words away from land. Specifying a range of 5-5 means that promise must be exactly 5 words from land. This command can be used in combination with other connecting commands except <OR> and <XOR>. Choosing the WITHIN item from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -W) places <WITHIN? Words> in the argument entry box. The question mark is selected so you can immediately enter your range. Stand-alone Commands Stand-alone commands are used to define an expression rather than to link two expressions together. [LINK ] The [LINK ] command substitutes the arguments from another window, which can be either another Search window or a Construct window. It can be used in combination with other arguments and commands. It can also be used to perform the same search simultaneously in different texts or with different search settings. (See also Chapter 10-Graphical Searches.) [LINK ] can also link the arguments of two Tool or Parallel windows. [CONTENTS ] The [CONTENTS ] command substitutes the list of verses from another window, which can be either another Search window or a Reference list window. It is used in combination with other arguments and commands to perform a search within a set of verses in another window, or to compare the contents of two search results. In a Tool window [CONTENTS ] can get the verse list of a Search window. [HITS ] 8-8 The [HITS ] command lets you search the word list found in another Search window. This lets you compare the words found in one text with another, rather than compare the verse lists as in the CONTENTS command.

101 Note: After choosing the LINK, CONTENTS or HITS item from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -L, C, or H), the name of a window is entered into the argument entry box as part of the command argument. If you type the command, enough characters to uniquely identify the window should be entered after the command. The use of the LINK, CONTENTS, and HITS commands is illustrated at the end of this chapter. [MERGE ] The [MERGE ] command is used only in the Tools window as described in Chapter 14. [RANGE ] The [RANGE ] command lets you enter any set of verse references in the brackets as a temporary range. This command acts like the CONTENTS command in that it limits the search to the specified verses, and can be modified by connecting commands, for example [RANGE Gen 1-3] <AND> man. The results with this command are identical to those obtained with the Range popup menu, except for the following COUNT command, and in the Hits and Analysis Graph windows which cover the range shown in the pop-up menu. If the range specified in the command falls outside the range set in the pop-up menu, the menu defaults to [All Text]. [COUNT ] The [COUNT ] command searches only for the words that occur the specified number of times in the search range. For example if the Search range pop-up menu is set to Gen 1-3, [COUNT 1-2] finds all the words that occur only once or twice in this range. However, when COUNT is combined with RANGE as in [RANGE Gen 1-3] <AND> [COUNT 1] and the Search range pop-up is set to All Text, Accordance only finds the words in Gen 1-3 that occur once in the entire text. Adding other criteria The [COUNT ] command always uses a list of exact words (sensitive to case, punctuation, and accent). It can be modified in three ways: with symbol, with connecting commands, and with an equal sign and modifier inside the brackets. symbol lets you add additional criteria for each word in the list. You can add a word or wildcard expression, the negative hyphen, and Key number, lemma, inflected, or grammatical information, depending on the type of text you are searching. For example, [COUNT 1]@abi* finds any unique words beginning with abi, and [COUNT 1]@-[KEY *] finds any unique words that have no Key number. Connecting commands add additional criteria to the search within the current field, in the usual way. Thus, [COUNT 1] <WITHIN 10 words> Adam finds any unique words within 10 words of Adam. Searching the Bible 8-9

102 8 Search Symbols and Commands The default COUNT search in an untagged text uses the list of words (lemmas in a tagged text) that occur the specified number of times. Additional modifiers can be used inside the brackets to choose a different list for the search. These modifiers are entered with an equal sign directly after the numeral. The modifiers are Keys, Inflected, and Tags. Only the first character of each modifier needs to be entered. [COUNT 1=k] uses the list of Key numbers that occur only once. [COUNT 1=i] uses the list of inflected forms that occur only once. [COUNT 1=t] uses the list of entire tags that occur only once. For example, entering lov*@[count 1 =k] searches for words beginning with lov that are tagged with a Key number that occurs only once within the range. It does NOT find words beginning with lov that are tagged only once, but with a Key number that is also attached to other words. See Chapter 9 for an explanation of Key numbers, and the Grammatical Supplement for details of the use of the commands with morphologically tagged texts. [KEY ] The [KEY ] command lets you enter and search for the Key number of a word in a Keyed Bible text. This feature is described in Chapter 9. [STYLE ] The [STYLE ] command lets you find text that you have highlighted. This feature is described in Chapter 17. [FIELD ] The [FIELD ] command ([FIELD begin/end]) works together with the <WITHIN? Words> command to specify the range from the beginning or end of the current search field. The must be replaced with either begin or end. Thus, Adam <WITHIN 2 Words> [FIELD begin] finds each case where there are less than two words from the beginning of the current search field to Adam. Choosing the FIELD item from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -F) opens a dialog box that lets you select Begin or End. After you click OK in the dialog box, [FIELD Begin] or [FIELD End] is placed in the argument entry box at the insertion point. 8-10

103 Using Multiple Commands in a Search You can combine multiple commands and expressions in the same search. This enables you to perform complex searches with a single set of search arguments. However, complex search arguments are sometimes ambiguous and produce misleading results. They are often more clearly and easily defined in a Construct window. (See Chapter 10-Graphical Searches.) Note: It is best to avoid the use of multiple <WITHIN>, <FOLLOWED BY>, or <PRECEDED BY> commands with multiple expressions or parentheses (except for parentheses containing only <OR>). Parentheses Parentheses are used to specify logical groupings of expressions. The expressions inside the parentheses are evaluated first and then combined with the other expressions in the argument. Example of the use of parentheses The following example shows the use of parentheses in a search: You want to find the verses in the KJV with Adam and either Eve or the woman. First, set the search to Words, and the search text to KJV (or KJVS). Enter Adam into the empty argument entry box. Next select AND from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -A). Now enter (Eve then select OR from the Enter Command submenu or press shift- - O). Now enter the woman) and click OK. The search argument should read: Adam <AND> (Eve <OR> the woman). Click OK to perform the search. Searching the Bible 8-11

104 8 Search Symbols and Commands Precedence with Multiple Commands If there are no parentheses in a search with multiple expressions, the commands are executed in the order of their position in the argument entry box. Thus, X <AND> Y <OR> Z is equivalent to (X <AND> Y) <OR> Z and finds any verses that have either Z or both X and Y. In contrast to this, Z <OR> X <AND> Y is equivalent to (Z <OR> X) <AND> Y and finds all verses that contain Y together with Z or X. Thus, you should use parentheses to specify precedence if you have any doubt about the order in which your commands will be applied. Combining Commands You can use multiple connecting commands in the same search, in order to specify the exact phrase or construction you wish to find. Example of Multiple Commands This example demonstrates a search with multiple commands: You want to modify the previous search to find only cases where Eve or the woman follow Adam in the verse and where the two expressions are, at most, four words apart. To do this, enter this argument in the entry box: Adam <FOLLOWED BY> <WITHIN 4 Words> (Eve <OR> the woman) In this instance, <FOLLOWED BY> constrains the order of the words in the verse and <WITHIN 4 Words> limits the amount of space between the words. Click OK to perform the search. Using <NOT> with Other Connecting Commands When you enter the <NOT> command adjacent to another connecting command, the meaning of the negated command is reversed. For example, land <NOT> <FOLLOWED BY> promise means that a verse is found only if land occurs where it is not followed by promise. When <NOT> is adjacent to another command, the order of the two commands is irrelevant. Thus, promised <NOT> <WITHIN 3 Words> land is the same as promised <WITHIN 3 Words> <NOT> land. Example of <NOT> with Other Connecting Commands This example illustrates the use of multiple connecting commands and the use of <NOT>. You want to find verses in the KJV that contain cave where it is not followed by field within 10 words. Enter the following argument into the entry box: cave <NOT> <WITHIN 10 Words> <FOLLOWED BY> field Click OK to perform the search. The results are shown opposite. Note that field occurs often in these verses, but never in the 10 words following cave. Gen. 23:19 which contains cave of the field is correctly missing from these search results. 8-12

105 Linking Search Arguments Accordance allows you to link Search and Construct windows to a Search window to provide additional arguments for a search. This feature adds power and flexibility to your searches. The LINK command Use the LINK command in the argument entry box to link to the argument of another window. Place the insertion point where you want the LINK command to appear. Select LINK from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -L). If only one Search or Construct window is open the name of that window is automatically inserted in the LINK command. If you open a new Construct window while a Search window is in front, and the argument entry box in this window is empty or all of its contents are selected, Accordance assumes that you want to link them and does it automatically. This results in [LINK windowname] appearing in the Search window as the Construct window opens. If there are no other windows open, a question mark is inserted with the LINK command in the argument entry box. The question mark is selected so that you can immediately enter a new window name. Searching the Bible 8-13

106 8 Search Symbols and Commands If there are other Search or Construct windows open, a dialog box appears showing the names of all available windows. Select the name of the window that you want to link to and click OK. [LINK windowname] is added to the argument entry box at the insertion point. Linking Search windows together enables you to perform simultaneous searches without duplicating your entire search argument. For example, you may want to use identical search arguments in each search but specify a different search text, search range, or search field. You may also want to use the second window to slightly modify your search arguments while still preserving the original search in the first window. When you click OK in any linked window, the search is performed in that window and in all the windows that are linked to it. If you modify the argument in any of the windows, and click OK, the search is updated in all the linked windows. Example of a Linked Search The following example illustrates a simple search with linked windows: You want to compare a search for Adam or Eve in the KJV and ASV. First, set the search to Words and the search text to KJVS. Enter the argument Adam <OR> Eve into the argument entry box. Select Duplicate (File menu or -D) to create a new window and set the search text to ASV. Tab to select the text in the entry box and choose LINK from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -L). If the Select window dialog box appears, select the name of the other Search window and click OK. At this point, the two windows are linked together. Click OK to perform the search in both windows. 8-14

107 Using LINK as Part of a Larger Search Argument When the LINK command is in the argument entry box, it can be used as part of a more complex search argument. In the previous example, [LINK KJVS] is equivalent to Adam<OR> Eve, since this is the argument from the window KJVS. You can add further commands and modifiers to the LINK command in the search entry box. For example, you can make [LINK KJVS] <AND> wife the argument in the second Search window. In this case, the second search finds only verses that also contain wife. Searching the Contents of Another Window Accordance allows you to use the verse list of another window as part of your search argument. You can search the contents of another Search window or compare two search results. You can also search the verse list of a Reference List window which is used to accumulate your own selection of verses. (See Chapter 18-Reference Lists.) The CONTENTS Command To include the CONTENTS command in the search argument, place the insertion point in the argument entry box where you want the command to appear. Select CONTENTS from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -C). If there are other Search or Reference List windows open, a dialog box appears showing the names of all available windows. Select the name of the window that you want to search and click OK. [CONTENTS windowname] is added to the argument entry box at the insertion point. This is similar to the LINK command described above. If there are no other windows open, a question mark is automatically inserted with the CONTENTS command in the argument entry box. The question mark is selected so that you can immediately enter a new window name. If only one Search or Reference List window is open, the name of that window is automatically inserted in the CONTENTS command. You can now complete the search argument. When you click OK in either window, the search is performed in that window and in all the windows that are linked to it by the CONTENTS command. If you modify the argument in any of the windows, and click OK, the search is updated in all the windows. Examples of Contents Searches The following examples illustrate searches of the contents of other windows: In the previous example, the same search for Adam or Eve was performed in the KJV and ASV. You notice that there were 34 hits in the KJV compared to 24 in the ASV. You decide to find all the verses found in the KJV which were not found in the ASV. Duplicate the KJVS window and add another text pane with the ASV. Searching the Bible 8-15

108 8 Search Symbols and Commands Tab to select the argument entry box of the new Search window. Choose CONTENTS or press shift- -C. When the Select window dialog box appears, select the name KJVS and click OK. Now enter <NOT> or press shift- -N. Then enter CONTENTS again and when the Select window dialog box appears, select the name ASV and click OK. The argument entry box should read [CONTENTS KJVS] <NOT> [CONTENTS ASV]. Click OK to perform the search. The resulting Search window is shown here: Note that there are no highlighted words as the search merely compared two lists of verses, and found verses which contain Adam or Eve in the KJV but not in the ASV. You notice that the ASV often uses the man instead of Adam. You can now search this subset of seven ASV verses for the phrase the man. Duplicate the KJVS 2 window and change the search text to ASV. Tab to select the contents of the argument entry box and enter: [CONTENTS KJVS 2] <AND> the man. Now click OK. The new window looks like this: 8-16

109 Searching the Word List of Another Window Accordance uses the HITS command to incorporate the word list from another Search window as part of your argument. Unlike the CONTENTS command which uses the list of verses, the HITS command incorporates the actual list of words from the search results in the other window. This powerful command allows you to compare the vocabulary of different passages, different translations, or even different texts such as the Qumran and the Hebrew Bible. The HITS Command To include the HITS command in the search argument, place the insertion point in the argument entry box where you want the command to appear. Select HITS from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -H). Like the CONTENTS command, either a window name or a question mark will appear in the command, or the dialog box will let you select a window. Also like the LINK and CONTENTS command, clicking OK updates the search in all the linked windows. Example of a Hits Search The following example illustrates searches using the hits from another window: You want to compare the language used in Genesis 1-3 with the language used in the rest of Genesis. Open two Search windows with the same Bible text such as KJVS. In the first put * <AND> [RANGE Gen 4f] in the argument entry box. In the second window put [HITS KJVS] <AND> [RANGE Gen 1-3] in the entry box. Click OK. The first window shows all the words in the rest of Genesis, and the second window highlights all the words in the first three chapters which are also found in the rest of the book. The words not highlighted are unique to Gen 1-3. Searching the Bible 8-17

110 8 Search Symbols and Commands Adding Other Criteria The HITS command is similar to the COUNT command in that additional search criteria can be added to the [HITS windowname] expression in three ways: with symbol, with connecting commands, and with modifiers inside the symbol symbol lets you add additional criteria for each word in the list. You can add a word or wildcard expression, the negative hyphen, and Key number, lemma, inflected, or grammatical information, depending on the type of text you are searching in the second window. For example: to reverse the above search and highlight the words unique to Gen 1-3, add *@- in front of the [HITS KJVS] in the second window. This tells Accordance to find all the words in the range except those that were found in the first window. Connecting Commands Connecting commands add additional criteria to the search in the usual way. For example: to limit the search to unique words occurring within 20 words of the word good add <WITHIN 20 words> good to the search argument, so that it reads *@-[HITS KJVS] <WITHIN 20 Words> good <AND> [RANGE Gen 1-3]. 8-18

111 Additional Modifiers The default HITS search in an untagged text uses the list of words (in a morphologically tagged text the list of lemmas) found by the search in the first window. Additional modifiers can be used inside the brackets to choose a different list for the search in the second window. These modifiers are entered with an equal sign directly after the word HITS. The modifiers are Keys, Inflected, and Tags. Only the first character of each modifier needs to be entered. [HITS=k windowname] uses the list of Key numbers from the first window. [HITS=i windowname] uses the list of inflected forms from the first window. [HITS=t windowname] uses the list of entire tags from the first window. In the dialog box for selecting the window there are radio buttons which allow you to choose between the appropriate modifiers for this text. See Chapter 9 for an explanation of Key numbers, and the Grammatical Supplement for details of the use of the HITS command with morphologically tagged texts. For example: to find the unique key numbers in the above search, the argument should look like this: [KEY KJVS] <AND> [RANGE Gen 1-3]. The Key number wildcard is necessary to exclude all the words which have no Key number assigned to them. Notice that the results are quite different. For example in Gen 1:10 Seas is no longer highlighted as that key number applies to sea in the rest of Genesis, but dry is highlighted as this Hebrew word occurs in Genesis only here. Searching the Bible 8-19

112 8 Search Symbols and Commands Exact Searches Note that the HITS search is exact for all searches except for case sensitivity. This means that it does not find a match between words that have the same characters but are accented or punctuated differently, such as sons and son s (or vowelled differently in Hebrew). However, differences in capitalization are ignored, so that the search will find a match between job and Job. There are many more possible permutations of searches using the HITS command. 8-20

113 Keyed Bible Texts 9 Chapter Contents: Working with Keyed Bible Texts Getting More Information Searches Using Key Numbers Search Arguments with Key Numbers Different Key Number Schemes German Bibles with Lemmas

114 9 Keyed Bible Texts Working with Keyed Bible Texts A Keyed text is a Bible which includes a database of a Key number for each significant word in the original text. Accordance currently offers Key numbers on special modules with the KJV (KJVS), the NASB 1995 revision (NAS95S), and the NIV (NIV-G/K). The Key number may be a Strong s number or another similar scheme such as Goodrick-Kohlenberger. The Greek Texus Receptus is also available with Key numbers (GNT-TRS). Some German Bibles are lemmatized which means that the database includes the dictionary form of the word. These lemmas are treated in Accordance very much like Key Numbers. The Key number links the English word in its context with the dictionary form of the original Hebrew or Greek word. Accordance lets you use these Key numbers as part of a search definition in the search entry section or in the Construct window. You can also view the numbers and original or transliterated words, and link directly to a dictionary entry for that word. You can even amplify directly from the English word to find the original word in any text or tool. This chapter explains how to view and search the Key numbers, and see the results in the Details. (See Chapter 10 on the Construct windows, and Chapter 13 on amplifying from a selection in a Keyed text.) Searching the English Text You can search the English text of a Keyed Bible text for words and phrases in exactly the same way as a regular English text. You can also use the search commands as described in Chapter 8. The results in the text pane will appear identical to those in a plain text without Key numbers. Accordance gives you several ways to view the Key numbers. Displaying the Key Numbers The Instant Details box displays the details of the word under the cursor in a Keyed Bible text. There is no need to click on the word, simply place or drag the cursor over the word, and the Key number, original word and English transliteration will appear in the box. This example shows the Instant Details box when the cursor is over the word beginning in Gen 1:1. For more information on the Instant Details box, see Chapter 5-Floating Windows. Some words are assigned to more than one Key number, so, for example, when the cursor is over below in Gen. 1: 9 (NAS95S), the box displays both numbers. Note: Common words are usually not tagged with a Key number, so the Instant Details box will be empty if the cursor is over these words. Note: The English transliteration of Key number words is derived from the lexicon which accompanies that number scheme, and often differs from the automatic transliteration provided by Accordance. 9-2

115 Getting More Information In addition to viewing the Key number, you can use the Details button and Amplify features to display and analyze the Key numbers with the results of your search. These features are fully described in Chapters and will only be noted here. Opening the Dictionary Triple-clicking on a word with a Key number opens the associated Greek or Hebrew dictionary and finds the Key number. Triple-clicking in the GNT-TRS opens the first Greek dictionary with Strong s numbers (Thayer, NAS Greek, or Greek Strong s). You can also select (or leave the cursor flashing in) a word with a Key number, and then amplify to the associated dictionary, and Accordance will display the relevant articles in the dictionary. Of course, you must select Hebrew for the Old Testament, and Greek for the New. Here is the Hebrew Strong s article displayed when the selection is beginning in Gen. 1:1. If you select the wrong dictionary, Accordance will simply search for the English word. The Contextual Menu A right-click on a two-button mouse (or control click) opens the contextual menu. There are slight differences in function when the selection is in a Key number text. The Search for submenu lets you choose to search for a word or Key number in the same text. Selecting Dictionary from the Look Up submenu searches for the Key number in the related dictionary. The Look Up submenu also lets you select Parsing (see below). Searching the Bible 9-3

116 9 Keyed Bible Texts Details The Details button on the Search window opens a workspace with a number of additional options for displaying the results of your search. In the Graph pop-up menu you can select Analysis Graph, Analysis Bar Chart and Analysis Pie Chart. Each of these can display either the words or the Key numbers found in your search. Clicking the Analysis button in the Details workspace lets you see the results of the search with the Key numbers and original words displayed for each word. See Chapter11-Getting Details for more information on the Graphs and Analysis. 9-4

117 The Resource Palette Selecting a portion of text and clicking Parsing on the Resource palette displays each word in the selection, together with the same details shown in the Instant Details box for the words that have Key numbers. Note: In the Analysis and Parsing windows you can select a word and amplify to any text or tool with the same language to find that word. If you select a Key number you can search a Keyed text or dictionary for that number. Selecting text and clicking Syntax puts all the selected words into a spreadsheet, together with the details of the Key numbers. You can edit this spreadsheet and add your own notes to it. See Chapter 13-Amplifying your Selection for details of Parsing and Syntax. The Option Click Holding the option key down while amplifying from a Keyed Bible text lets you search for the original Greek or Hebrew in two ways: Clicking Search or amplifying to a Keyed Bible text searches for the Key numbers from the selection. See Chapter 12-Amplify Features. Selecting any tool, or a Greek or Hebrew Bible text from the Resource palette, searches for the dictionary forms of the original words. Searching the Bible 9-5

118 9 Keyed Bible Texts Searches Using Key Numbers The shortcuts in the contextual menu and Resource palette are the easiest way to search for Key numbers. When working with a Keyed Bible text, you can also directly search for the Key numbers, and Accordance will find all occurrences of words that are assigned to that number. Entering Key Numbers To specify a Key number as an argument, select Enter Key Numbers (Search or contextual menu, or -L) to bring up the Select Key Numbers dialog box. This menu item is dimmed unless you are searching a Keyed Bible text. You can use this dialog box to select from the Key numbers for every word in the search text. This dialog box functions in the same way as the Select Words dialog box described in Chapter 7. The Key numbers are shown on the left side of the scrolling list. The Greek numbers are prefixed by the letter G, and the Hebrew numbers follow with the H prefix. Enter h in the Go to: box to see the Hebrew numbers. On the right side is a matching English transliteration of the dictionary form of the original word. Selecting the Key number and clicking OK, or double-clicking on the number, places the number in the entry box with the KEY command. Here is a search for the Hebrew word ish, Key number H0376, in Gen 1-3: 9-6

119 If you select more than one entry, each number will appear in the entry box with the KEY command. The numbers are in parentheses, separated by commas: ([KEY H0120], [KEY H0121]) and are treated as alternatives. The results of the search are shown here: The KEY Command You can also enter the Key numbers individually by choosing KEY from the Enter Command submenu (Search menu or shift- -K). This places [KEY?] in the argument entry box. with the question mark selected so you can immediately enter a Key number. Search Arguments with Key Numbers You can search for a single Key number, or a string of alternative numbers as shown above. You can also create a phrase of Key numbers, alone or mixed with words. You can also use all the search commands which have been described in Chapter 8, in combination with the Key numbers. Wildcards You can even use the asterisk wildcard to find related words in the original language. A search for [KEY *] will highlight every word in the text that has a Key number. A search for [KEY G557*] finds most of the Greek words beginning with pseudo. Searching the Bible 9-7

120 9 Keyed Bible Texts Symbol Use symbol to link a combination of the Key number and the word so the linked information all applies to the same word. For example, man@ [KEY H0120] finds man only when it translates the word adam. symbol can also be used with a hyphen to indicate a negative. For example, man@- [KEY H0120] finds man when it translates a word other than adam, such as ish. A search for man@-[key *] finds the word where it occurs without a Key and AND Do not confuse symbol with the <AND> command. Use the <AND> command to denote two different words or phrases that must occur in the same search field. Use symbol to connect a Key number to a word and describe only one word. Thus, a search for [KEY H0376]@man finds man when it translates the word ish, but [KEY H0376] <AND> man finds man when it occurs in the same verse as ish, but not necessarily on the same word. 9-8

121 Multiple Key Numbers Where there is more than one Key number on a single English word, all the numbers are displayed in the Instant Details and Parsing windows. A search for any of the numbers will find that word. However, the only way to search for words with both or all the Key numbers on the same word is to use the <AND> command, and this may also highlight other examples of words with one of these numbers in the same verse. Different Key Number Schemes Different Keyed Bible texts use different schemes of Key numbers, so searches (and amplify functions) based on Key numbers are only accurate within the related modules. The KJVS (and Greek Strong s and Hebrew Strong s) use the original Strong s numbers. The NAS95S, NAS Greek, and NAS Hebrew use a modified Strong s scheme in which most numbers are the same as Strong s, but additional entries were inserted with letter suffixes. For example: the original Strong s 1544 ekballo is 1544b e kba llw ekballo in the NAS Greek; and 1544a. e kbai nw ekbaino is inserted. Thus searching from ekballo in the KJVS to the NAS95S will find no hits, and vice-versa, since the numbers do not match. The NIV-G/K uses an entirely different scheme (Goodrick-Kohlenberger) so the dictionary entry for ekballo is 1675 [1544] e kba llw. The number in the brackets is the Strong s number so you can use this number to compare the search in the KJVS. Note: Even when you search the English texts for the same original words, you may get very different results due to variations in the way the Key numbers were assigned to specific words. The verses found by the searches should be similar, but the list of hit words may vary considerably. Searching the Bible 9-9

122 9 Keyed Bible Texts German Bibles with Lemmas Several German Bibles are tagged with the German root form of the word. The lemmas can be used in a similar way to Key numbers: The lemma for the word under the cursor is shown in the Instant Details box, with the word in the text. Triple-click on a word opens the related dictionary (if available) and searches for the lemma. Details graphs, charts, and analysis display the search results by words or lemmas. Option-click when amplifying searches for the lemma. Enter Key Numbers (Search or contextual menu, or command-l) opens a dialog box with a list of all the lemmas. Lemmas and words can be combined using symbol. For example, the argument [KEY finds all words from the lemma stehen except for the word steht. The KEY item in the Simple Construct window can be used to define a word, and agreement in Key can also be specified. 9-10

123 10 Graphical Searches Chapter Contents: Introduction to Constructs The Simple Construct Window Using a Construct The Element Items The Connecting Items Using Multiple Construct Windows

124 10 Graphical Searches Introduction to Constructs The Construct window is a unique and powerful feature of Accordance. This window allows you to graphically define the criteria that form the heart of your search. The contents of a Construct window together form a single search argument. The major advantages of this window are that you can easily define the words (elements) including their position in the field, and then define relationships between any of the elements using the connecting items. You can see at a glance exactly how you have defined each word, and how it is related to all the other words in the construct, however complex. A construct is especially useful when you want to combine several criteria to search for a word, and when you want to specify relationships between words in a phrase. The Construct window is used in a search by linking it to the argument entry box of a Search window. Because a Construct window is simply another form of search argument, you can combine multiple Construct windows in the same search, and take advantage of all the search entry commands covered in Chapter 8. A Simple Construct window is used to search non-tagged texts, such as English versions, and Keyed Bible texts, as well as non-tagged original language texts. The Greek and Hebrew Construct windows are used to search texts with grammatical tags such as the Greek New Testament and the Hebrew Bible. This chapter introduces and describes the features common to all the types of Construct windows. The Simple Construct window is used to illustrate these features. Even if you are primarily interested in searching tagged texts, you will need to review this chapter to learn the basic functions of the Construct window. (See also Grammatical Supplement Chapters G2 and G4.) The Simple Construct Window The Simple Construct window is shown below, followed by a brief description of the different parts of the window. reverse direction checkbox description box connection area construct palette element column 10-2

125 The Description Box You can enter a description of this construct into the description box. This allows you to state the purpose and other details of this construct, but has no effect on the search. The description becomes a part of the construct and is retained if the Construct window is saved and used again at a later date. The font, size, color, and style of the description can be changed in the Text palette (or Display menu). (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) You can also use the Edit menu to copy and paste text into this box, retaining its font and style information. The height of the description box can be changed by dragging the heavy section divider that separates it from the connection area. The Construct Palette The construct palette contains the items that are used to build your construct. These palette items enable you to define both the nature of individual elements and the relationships between the construct elements. The details of the palette vary, depending on the type of construct window. Simple Greek Hebrew connecting items element items Elements The basic units that make up a construct are called elements. Each element represents a word in the phrase that you want to find. An element is defined by all the items that are placed into an element column. Element items are used to define the elements of a construct. These items are found in the construct palette between the short heavy lines. Elements are defined by dragging element items into element columns and adding details to the items to specify the exact definition of each construct element. Searching the Bible 10-3

126 10 Graphical Searches Relationships between Elements The connection area above the element columns allows you to define multiple relationships between any elements. For instance, you may want to specify the distance in words between two elements. These types of relationships are specified with connecting items. The default relationship is that the elements represent adjacent words in a phrase. Connecting items are the items that are above the short, heavy lines in the construct palette (i.e. WITHIN, INTER, AGREE). Dragging these items allows you to specify relationships between the construct elements. Using a Construct 10-4 The following steps are required to build and use a construct: 1. Open a Construct window. 2. Link the construct to a Search window. 3. Define the elements of the construct. 4. Define the relationships between the elements. 5. Click OK in either window to perform the search. Opening a Construct Window To open a new Construct window, choose the type of construct from the New Construct submenu (File menu or - 1, -2, or -3). Note: The Greek or Hebrew Construct submenu items will be dimmed if Greek or Hebrew tagged texts are not installed. The name of the Construct window is used to link the window to a Search window and is the default name for saving the construct to a file. To change the default name of the Construct window, select Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N). Like other windows, you can save a Construct window as an Accordance file so you can reopen it later. You can also save it as a PICT file which can be opened in a drawing program. You can print the window or copy the whole window to the clipboard and paste it into another program. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) Linking a Construct To use a completed construct in a search, you must link the Construct window to the Search window where the results of the search are displayed. Linking windows is described in Chapter 8. There are a number of ways to accomplish this:

127 1. If you open a new construct while a Search window is in front, and the argument entry box in this window is empty or all of its contents are selected, Accordance assumes that you want to link them and does it automatically. This causes [LINK windowname] to appear in the Search window as the new Construct window opens. 2. If the argument entry box in the front Search window is not empty when you open a Construct window, you must link the Construct window to the search entry section. Either: make the Search window the front window and place the insertion point in the argument entry box at the location where you want the LINK command to appear. Choose LINK from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu, or shift- -L). If only one other window is open, its name is automatically inserted with the LINK command in the argument entry box. If more than one other window is open, a dialog box opens with the names of all open Search and Construct windows. Select the name of the Construct window you want to link. This adds [LINK windowname] to the argument entry box at the insertion point. Or: control or right-click in the Construct window pane and select the window from the Link From submenu in the contextual menu. Using Palette Items to Build a Construct The first step in building a construct involves using the construct palette items. To use an item from the construct palette, drag the item by holding down the mouse when the pointer is over the rectangle that contains the item s name, move the item to the desired location, and release the mouse button. This places the item in your construct and brings up an appropriate dialog box (if further information is required). If you move an item to an inappropriate area in the window, the item is ignored when you release the mouse button. Searching the Bible 10-5

128 10 Graphical Searches Defining the Elements Each element in the construct is defined by all of the element items in one column, that combine to provide the definition for one word. Always a Phrase The elements in a construct are assumed to be part of a phrase. This means that elements in adjacent columns must also be adjacent in the search text for your search criteria to be met. The WITHIN connecting item allows you to override this default and specify that the two elements can appear anywhere within a range of words. Note: Unlike the argument in the search entry section, the elements in a construct are always sequence-specific. This means that the elements must appear in the search text in the same order that they appear in the construct. One or Both Directions The Search in both directions checkbox tells Accordance to search for the phrase as it is shown, and in the reverse direction. The elements remain in order, but the entire phrase is reversed. For example, when the box is checked, the construct David and Jonathan would also find the phrase Jonathan and David. Element Items Element items define the individual elements of the construct. They allow you to define the word itself, or the part of speech, or use certain search commands. The element items in the Simple construct are defined below. Element items must be placed into element columns. If you drag an element item into an area of the window other than an element column, the item is ignored. The NOT item is unique and is described later in the chapter. To define an element item, drag the item into an element column. Each column represents a word in your construct. After you place the item in the desired column, a dialog box appears that lets you fill in any necessary information. If you do not wish to use the dialog box, simply click OK to exit. Then type the details directly into the item in the element column. The Element Item in a Column item label details of item element column second item 10-6

129 When an element item is in a column, it is made up of two parts. The first line of the item is its label, such as WORD. The label is always displayed in boldface, uppercase letters. The lines following the label contain the details that further define the item. The definition of an item continues until there is a horizontal line. Selecting Items You select an entire item in order to move or delete it by clicking on the label. This selects and highlights the entire item. To select more than one item, hold down the shift key while selecting the other items. You can also select items in the element columns and connection area by clicking on an empty area of the window and dragging the mouse to form a rectangle around them. This enables you to select several items at once. Moving and Deleting Items You can move selected (highlighted) items by dragging them with the mouse. Pressing the delete (backspace) key or selecting Clear (Edit menu) deletes any selected item or text. Duplicating and Copying items Holding down the option key while dragging a selection, duplicates the items in the same area of the window. Dragging the selection to another Construct window of the same type (even without holding down the option key), copies the selection to that window. Editing the Text of Items Double-clicking on the label re-opens the dialog box for the item and allows you to modify the details. To directly edit the text of the details below the label, either click at the place you want to begin typing or select the text you want to replace. Then you can either type or paste the desired text. The text automatically wraps to the next line, and the item resizes to show your new entry when you click outside of it. Searching the Bible 10-7

130 10 Graphical Searches Empty Columns When you define the elements in your construct, you must not leave an empty column to the left of any column that has been defined. In other words, the elements in the construct must occupy consecutive columns from left to right (or right to left in Hebrew). Defining the Relationships The connecting items allow you to specify relationships between construct elements. These relationships are defined by WITHIN, INTER, and AGREE. Connecting items are placed above the element columns in the connection area. You can change the height of the connection area by dragging the heavy section divider that separates the connection area from the element columns. Any connecting items already in place are repositioned within the new limits. To place a connecting item, drag the connecting item into a position above the desired element columns. The item automatically connects to the nearest element columns. The Parts of a Connecting Item A connecting item that is placed in the connection area consists of four parts. The boldfaced text at the top of the rectangle is the label. Under the label are the item details, which determine how the item will apply to the element columns. A linking arc extends from each side of the rectangle to delineate which element columns are constrained by this item. A small square handle sits on the midpoint of each arc. The handle is used to reassign the connecting item to other elements. The Connecting Arcs Connecting items are linked to columns by arcs. These arcs specify which elements are being modified by the connecting items. When the item is first placed in the connection area, it is always connected to adjacent columns. A connecting item can apply to any two elements anywhere in the construct. To change one of the connections of an item to another column, move one of the arcs by dragging its handle to the desired new location. When the mouse is over the handle, the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow, enabling you to drag the arc to a new location above another element column. The arcs and items automatically center themselves between the columns to which they are connected. 10-8

131 drag the handle of the arc to widen or narrow the connecting constraint Performing the Search Click OK in either the Construct window or the Search window to which it is linked. After the search, the Search window is automatically brought to the front so that you can see the results. A dialog box reminds you if there is no appropriate linked window. The Element Items WORD When you drag the WORD item into a column, the Select words dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to select one or more words from every word that occurs in the text. In the constructs for morphologically tagged texts, the INFLECT, LEX, and ROOT items replace the WORD item. (See Chapters G2 and G4, Greek and Hebrew Constructs.) The Select Words dialog box functions in the Simple Construct window in the same way as in the Search window with one minor difference: the default word list in the box is the first non-tagged text in the text pop-up menu. If you select a different text from the menu, it becomes the default for subsequent WORD items in that Construct window. As an alternative to using the Select Words dialog box, you can simply click OK in the dialog box and type the desired word directly into the column. You can also use the wild-card characters and related symbols as described in Chapter 8. When you perform the search, Accordance verifies that your input is a valid word. If it is not, the Select words dialog box appears and highlights the word closest in spelling to the word you have entered. You can then select the word you want to enter. (See Chapter 7-Doing Searches.) KEY The KEY item applies only to texts which include information such as Strong s numbers, as described in Chapter 9. When you drag the KEY item into a column, the Select Key Numbers dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to select one or more Key numbers from those that occur in the text. The Select Key Numbers dialog box functions in the Simple Construct window in the same way as in the Search window with one minor difference: the default word list in the box is the first Keyed text in the text pop-up menu. If you select a different text from the menu, it becomes the default for subsequent KEY items in that Construct window. Searching the Bible 10-9

132 10 Graphical Searches Wildcards Use wildcards to define the WORD and KEY items in the same way as in the Search window. For example WORD * finds any word, and KEY * finds only words with Key numbers. CHARACTER The CHAR. item is equivalent to the Single Character search using a period in the Search window entry section, and described in Chapter 8. Used alone it finds any word that includes the specified character. When combined with other criteria it specifies that the word must also include this character. When you drag the CHAR. item to a column, a dialog box appears that allows you to specify the character. It also reminds you that you can enter a space first in order to see backstrike accents and other characters in the box and in the item itself. For example, this construct finds any question ending in here?. If you enter multiple characters, the construct will find any word with one or more of the characters. HITS The HITS item is equivalent to the HITS command in the Search window described in Chapter 8. It uses the word list from the specified window. When you drag the HITS item to a column, and there is more than one appropriate window, a dialog box appears that allows you to choose the window for linking, and select the list of words, Key numbers, lemmas or tags as appropriate for the search text. For example, this construct finds all words with the Key numbers found in the KJVS window, when they are also the fifth word in the search field

133 COUNT The COUNT item is equivalent to the COUNT command in the Search window described in Chapter 8. It limits the search to words that occur the specified number of times in the search range. When you drag the HITS item to a column, a dialog box appears that allows you to set the count or range and select from the list of words, Key numbers, lemmas or tags as appropriate for the search text. For example, this construct finds words beginning with a which are tagged with a Key number that occurs three time in the range. PLACE Use the PLACE item to specify what position in the search field an element must occupy. For example, if your search field is Sentence, a PLACE of 2 means that this element must be the second word in the sentence in order for your search criteria to be met. When you drag the PLACE item to a column, a dialog box appears that allows you to specify a single number in the first box, or a range of numbers using both boxes. Because its purpose is to further constrain an element, the PLACE item cannot be the first item at the top of an element column. A single number in the PLACE item does not imply a range of numbers. Entering a number in each box allows you to specify a range of positions within the search field where the element must be found. Using Multiple Items to Define an Element You can place more than one element item in the same column. Each item can appear only once in a column, but any combination of WORD, KEY, and PLACE can be used to define an element. The resulting hit word in the search text must match each item in the column, although alternative details can be specified within an item. Searching the Bible 10-11

134 10 Graphical Searches Example of Element Definition This example illustrates the definition of an element: You wish to find the words man or Adam when they translate the Hebrew word adam and occur in the first five words of the verse. To do this, first drag the WORD item from the palette to the top of the first element column. When the Select Words dialog box appears, select Adam and man and click OK. Now drag the KEY item into the column below WORD. This brings up the Select Key Numbers dialog box. Select H0120 and H0121 and click OK. Drag the PLACE item to the same column, and enter 1 in the first box and 5 in the second, and click OK. To perform the search, make sure the construct is linked to a Search window and click OK. Here are the results of the search: NOT The NOT palette item negates other items. Dragging NOT over an item negates the entire item and is shown as a diagonal slash over the item. In general, the first item in a column must be positive. For example, the NOT item can be applied to the PLACE item to specify a location or range where the element cannot appear in the search field. In this example the search words may occur anywhere except in the third to tenth places in the current field. To remove the NOT item from an element item in a column, drag the NOT palette item again onto the element that displays a slash

135 Negating the First Item in a Column If you place the NOT item over the top element item in the column, the entire column is negated. This signifies that you do not want that element to appear in this position in your construct. There are limitations on the use of the connecting items with a negative column, and these are described at the end of this chapter. Example of a Negative Column The following example illustrates the use of the NOT item in the first element of a construct: You want to find woman when it is not immediately preceded by an article. Drag the WORD element item into the first element column and release the mouse, so that the Select Words dialog box appears. Click OK and type a, the into the item details area. Drag another WORD element item into the second element column and enter woman. Drag the NOT item over the first element. A slash appears over the element. Make sure your Construct window is linked to a Search window, and click OK in either the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search. The construct finds woman where it is not immediately preceded by the or a. Searching the Bible 10-13

136 10 Graphical Searches The Connecting Items WITHIN The WITHIN item specifies the maximum separation between two elements. WITHIN with a value of 2 specifies that there cannot be more than one intervening word between the two elements. If WITHIN is not used, elements in adjacent columns represent adjacent words. When you drag the WITHIN connecting item into the connection area above two columns, the WITHIN dialog box appears: This dialog box enables you to specify the word separation between the first element and the second. Entering a single number in the first box specifies a range of 1 to that number of words. For example, an entry of 5 means that there can be from 0 to 4 words between the two elements. You can also specify a range for WITHIN. For example, if you enter 4 in the first box and 8 in the second, then at least 3 words but not more than 7 words may intervene between the elements. Unlike the PLACE item, a single number in the WITHIN item implies a range. To specify a distance of exactly 4 words between elements, enter 4 in each box in the WITHIN dialog box. The range limits have the same meaning for the WITHIN connecting item as for the WITHIN command described in chapter 6. Note: The WITHIN item does not override the current field setting. For example, if the field is set to Verse, a WITHIN of 500 words does not extend the search beyond verse boundaries. Example of WITHIN The following example illustrates the use of the WITHIN item: You will notice that in the previous example some occurrences of woman did have a preceding article but with an adjective between the article and woman, so they were not eliminated from the search. To broaden the word separation to include these cases drag the WITHIN connecting item into the area above the two columns. Enter 2 into the WITHIN dialog box and click OK. Make sure your Construct window is linked to a Search window, and click OK in either the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search. The results are shown opposite

137 WITHIN Applies to Intervening Columns The WITHIN item affects the intervening columns beneath the arcs. These intervening elements can occur anywhere in the range of words. That is, they no longer need to be adjacent to one another, even though the WITHIN item does not directly connect to them. To specify that intervening elements are adjacent, use another WITHIN with a setting of 1 to connect them, as illustrated here: Using NOT with WITHIN The NOT item can be used with the WITHIN item to specify a range where the elements cannot be found. Placing the NOT item over a WITHIN with a setting of 3 means that the elements connected by the WITHIN cannot be within one to three words of one another. NOT WITHIN can only connect columns which are enclosed or connected by another WITHIN item. Searching the Bible 10-15

138 10 INTER Graphical Searches The INTER item allows you to specify words that can occur but are not required between the elements in the columns. INTER limits the words that can occur between two elements to those that match the criteria defined in the INTER. If no word occurs between the two elements, the INTER item is ignored. Therefore a word specified in an INTER item may or may not occur in the text, but all words which do occur in the text between the two elements connected by INTER must match the INTER criteria. This INTER specifies that only the words and or or may appear between the two elements below. Used with WITHIN Since INTER refers to words that can occur between elements, the WITHIN connecting item must be used so that it encloses or connects the columns joined by the INTER item. When the WITHIN item is used by itself, any word can appear between the elements constrained by the WITHIN. If the INTER item is also used, it specifies exactly which word or words can appear between the two elements. Using INTER When you drag the INTER connecting item above the elements between which you want to specify the intervening words, the INTER item appears above the element columns. The first time you use INTER in a Construct window, a dialog box appears to remind you that you must drag element items into the INTER item to define the intervening forms. Define INTER Like an Element Column The INTER item holds the criteria that define the words which can occur between the elements. To define these criteria, drag element items into the INTER item in the same way as for an element column. You can also move items between the element columns and the INTER item. When you drag an element item into the INTER item, the same dialog box appears as when you define this item in an element column. Thus, if you drag the WORD item into the INTER item, the Select words dialog box appears and allows you to specify which words can appear between the elements constrained by the INTER. INTER Applies to Intervening Columns When the INTER item connects non-adjacent columns, the constraints also apply to the intervening element columns. Be especially careful with INTER items constraining nonadjacent columns, as they may define a logically impossible construct, as illustrated here: 10-16

139 These element columns require that the word milk appear between land and honey, while the INTER item states that the only word which can intervene between land and honey is the word and. Using NOT with INTER The NOT item can be used to negate the entire INTER item or to negate aspects of the definition of the intervening forms. Negating the entire INTER item Negating the entire INTER item specifies what words must not appear between the elements connected by INTER. When you use a NOT to negate the entire INTER, any word can appear between the connected elements except those that match the criteria in the negative INTER. To negate the entire INTER item, drag the NOT palette item over the word INTER at the top of the item, or over the bottom portion of the INTER item. A slash appears over the word INTER. This INTER item specifies that any words can intervene between the elements except for man with a Key number H0120. Negating individual items in INTER Negating individual items in the INTER item works in exactly the same way as in an element column. You can negate a portion of the INTER definition to limit the words that match the criteria. When you negate items in the INTER item, the INTER itself is still positive; that is, it defines the words that can appear between the two elements. drag the NOT item over the top or bottom to make the entire INTER negative drag the NOT item over a section to negate an individual item To negate an individual item in the INTER item, drag the NOT palette item over that portion of the INTER definition. A slash appears over that portion. This INTER item specifies that man without the Key number H0120 is the only word allowed between the two elements, but it is not required. It allows man with any other or no Key number. Note: The first item in an INTER cannot be negative. To make the entire INTER negative, drag the NOT item over the INTER title. Searching the Bible 10-17

140 10 Graphical Searches Example of INTER The following example illustrates the use of the INTER connecting item: You want to find some examples of man with beast. Create two columns with man and beast. Drag the WITHIN connecting item above the first and second columns and enter 2 in the dialog box. Drag the INTER connecting item below the WITHIN. Drag the WORD palette item into the INTER item and enter and. Make sure that your Construct window is linked to the Search window and click OK in either window to perform the search. So far you have found only man and beast. Now drag the NOT palette item over the INTER label and repeat the search. The search now finds cases where man and beast are two words apart with any intervening word except and

141 AGREE The AGREE connecting item is used to specify that certain details of two elements must match. This item can also be used together with NOT to specify that the details must not match. When you drag the AGREE item into the connection area above the elements you wish to constrain, the AGREE dialog box for English texts opens. The AGREE Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to specify the type of agreement between the two elements. To select a detail in the dialog box, click anywhere on the name of the detail or inside its checkbox. You can select both details. In non-tagged texts you can specify agreement in Word, and in Key number texts also in Key number. Lemmatized German Bibles use the KEY item and agreement in Key to specify the lemma. Morphologically tagged original texts offer many more options for agreement in the type of word and in the grammatical tagging. See the Grammatical Supplement, Chapters G2 and G4. The two elements connected by the arcs of the AGREE item must agree for each detail checked in the dialog box. When you click OK to close the dialog box, the selected details appear as text within the rectangle of the AGREE item. If you double-click on an AGREE item already defined in the connection area, the AGREE dialog box appears and shows the current settings for that item. Using NOT with AGREE The NOT item can be used with the AGREE item to specify the details in which the connected elements cannot agree. Placing the NOT item over an AGREE item negates the detail specified in the item. If there is more than one detail in the item, the linked elements will be excluded from the search results only if they agree on both details. If the elements agree in word but not in number, or vice-versa, they would be included in the search results. Separate AGREE items are used to specify that two elements must not agree in word and must not agree in Key number. Searching the Bible 10-19

142 10 Graphical Searches Example of AGREE This example illustrates the use of AGREE: You notice that the expressions surely die and greatly multiply often translate intensive forms where the Hebrew verb occurs twice, and you decide to look for other examples. Drag the WORD item into the first column, and select greatly and surely. Drag a KEY item into the second column, click OK and enter an asterisk (this requires that this word have a Key number). Drag AGREE into the connection area and click the Key Number checkbox. Add a WITHIN constraint of 5 words, and click OK. Make sure that your Construct window is linked to the Search window, click OK in either the Search window or the Construct window to perform the search. Connecting to a Negative Column The WITHIN and AGREE connecting commands can be used with a negative element column with certain limitations: The negative column is defined like a positive column, with a NOT over the top element item. INTER cannot connect to a negative column A negative column must be enclosed by a WITHIN item unless it is the first or last column. The negative column can be connected only to one adjacent positive column by WITHIN and AGREE items. Only a positive WITHIN can connect to a negative column. Both AGREE and NOT AGREE can connect to a negative column

143 Logic of AGREE with a Negative Column Although the logic may not be completely consistent, Accordance handles these cases in the following way: Each example finds surely or greatly when it is: 1. followed by any other word 2. NOT followed by any word 3. followed by a word which agrees in Key number 4. followed by a word which does NOT agree in Key number 5. NOT followed by a word which agrees in Key number 6. NOT followed a word which does NOT agree (i.e is either followed by no word, or by a word which does agree) Example of AGREE with Negative Columns The following example illustrates AGREE with a negative column. In the previous example, you now want to find surely or greatly when they are not used to intensify a verb. Simply drag the NOT over the KEY with the asterisk and repeat the search. Searching the Bible 10-21

144 10 Graphical Searches Example of Negative Column with Multiple Connecting Commands This example illustrates the use of several connecting items with a negative column. It shows a search for I followed by multiply with up to 9 intervening words. The negative column eliminates from the results any verse in which the intensive form (defined as a preceding word which does not agree in word but does agree in Key number) is used within 3 words of multiply. Using Multiple Construct Windows You can use multiple Construct windows in the same search by using the LINK command in the argument entry box of the Search window, together with other valid search entry commands. Thus the entry [LINK Simple construct.1] <OR> [LINK Simple construct.2] will find cases where either construct is found, and the entry [LINK Simple construct.1] <AND> [LINK Simple construct.2] will find cases where both constructs are found in the same field. The search entry commands are described in detail in Chapter

145 11 Getting Details Chapter Contents: The Details Workspace Characteristics of Details Windows Graphs and Charts Hits Graph Analysis Graph Analysis Bar Chart Analysis Pie Chart Table Bar Chart Analysis Concordance Table

146 11 Getting Details The Details Workspace After you perform a search, the Details button on the Search window becomes active. Clicking the button (or pressing -') opens a Details workspace in which you can see various kinds of analysis of the search results: Graphs and Charts, Analysis, Concordance, and Table. These windows offer different ways to view the results of your search The Details workspace is somewhat similar to the workspace for all other types of windows which is described in Chapter 22. The workspace is a window in which multiple contents are displayed as tabs. The title of the workspace reflects the Search window to which it belongs. The four Add: buttons below the title allow you to add a tab displaying a particular type of analysis. The default tabs that open when you click Details can be set in the Search window page of Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,). By default, only Hits Graph is checked for new users, but users who upgrade from version 5 may find that none of these are checked initially. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) The Tools window for Reference tools also offers Hits Graph and Table details. See Chapter 14 for the Details of Reference Tools. Characteristics of Details Windows In this chapter the description of each type of window applies also to the tab within the workspace. Linked to Search Window Details workspaces and windows remain linked to the parent Search window and relate to the entire search result. They can be opened only when the Search window is displaying search results. They are automatically updated whenever the contents of the Search window change, and they close when the Search window is closed. Pressing -' in a Search window opens the Details workspace, and pressing -' in any Details window brings to the front the Search window to which it belongs. Details windows cannot be saved and reopened as independent files in Accordance. However, when a Search window is saved, any open details windows are saved and recalled with it. 11-2

147 Saving, Printing, and Copying The text of an Analysis, Concordance, or Table window can be printed or saved as a text file. A Graph or Chart window can be printed or saved in PICT format. You can copy and paste text from Analysis, Concordance, and Table windows into other Accordance windows or other programs, using the Edit menu commands. When a Graph window is in front, selecting Copy (Edit menu or -C) places a PICT image of the window in the clipboard so you can paste it into another program. Amplifying from Details Windows You can select a word in an Analysis, Concordance, or Table window, and amplify to a text, tool, or Search All by selecting the item from the Resource palette (or Amplify menu). The search is performed for the language of the selection. If you select a Key number, you can amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a dictionary with the same key numbers. Right-click or control-click in a Details window opens a contextual menu with the relevant options for that window. New Tabs and Windows A Details tab can be converted to an independent window by selecting Detach Tab (Window menu or option- - T). It remains linked to its parent Search window. It can be merged into a workspace with other details windows belonging to the same Search window, by selecting Merge Windows (Window menu or option- -M). Although each window automatically updates to show new search results, you may wish to have more than one window of the same type, with different display characteristics, such as different analyses of the results. Clicking one of the Add: buttons always adds a new tab to the workspace. Clicking the Details button when a Details workspace is already open, brings that workspace to the front. It does not open any new tabs or create another workspace. You can create a new Details workspace by selecting Duplicate (File menu), or by merging separate Details windows. Other features of the Details workspace are similar to the workspace for other windows. See Chapter 22-The Workspace for details on the use of tabs and the workspace. Digging Deeper 11-3

148 11 Getting Details Graphs and Charts The first Add button opens a pop-up menu with several kinds of graphs and charts. Selecting one adds a new tab of that kind to the Details workspace. A single click opens the last graph or chart selected from the list, or the Hits Graph if none has been selected. Hits Graph The Hits Graph window displays a graph which shows the density of your hits throughout the search range. This allows you to identify trends in your search results. To open a Graph window click the Graph button on the Details workspace. The Graph is displayed in the Graph window with the vertical axis representing the density of hits and the horizontal axis representing the search range. For example, clicking Graph after a search of the entire KJV for clauses that contain words beginning with king, displays this Graph: This Graph shows the frequency of occurrences in the search range. Each vertical bar in the Graph represents the number of hits per thousand words at that point in the search range. Each short heavy bar below the horizontal axis represents a book or division. The names of the books are shown only if they can fit without overlapping other book names. Graphs of Non-adjacent Ranges If the search range is not continuous, a vertical dotted line in the Graph shows places where the range skips a portion of the search text. For example, a graph of the same search in Proverbs and the Song of Solomon looks like this: Linking to the Results Double-clicking anywhere inside the Graph frame scrolls the text panes to the corresponding location in the search results. 11-4

149 Resizing the Window If you resize the window, the graph is redrawn and more or less detail may be included along the horizontal axis. Superimposing Graphs The Graph window allows you to superimpose up to seven graphs in the same window. Each graph appears in a different color. The legend below the graph displays the search argument for each color. Clicking on a name in the graph legend, where the cursor becomes an X, removes that name and plot from the graph. The two buttons in the lower right corner let you choose which Graphs are displayed. Clicking the Keep button tells Accordance to keep the current Graph next time you do a search in the related Search window, and to superimpose the graph of the new results on the current graph. After you click this button, it is dimmed to indicate that this graph will be saved. The first time you click this button you will get a reminder that the graph is kept only if the search text and range are not changed for the subsequent search. Pressing shift while clicking OK to perform a new search also keeps the previous graph. The Clear button is dimmed unless there are two or more Graphs in the window. Clicking this button clears the graphs in the background, leaving only the results of the current search. This example shows the results of searches for two different names for God in the first three chapters of Genesis. Setting Hits Graph Display Options When a Hits Graph window is the front window, select Set Graph Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to change the frequency of hits and to set the appearance and colors of the graph. The Words per hit: box lets you change the sample size of the plot. You can enter any number between 100 and 10,000. An entry of 100 means that each bar represents the number of hits in the 100 words surrounding that point in the search range. To display the frequency of hits at each point in the search range, the graph uses overlapping samples from the search range. Thus, you cannot count the number of hits in an entire book or section from the graph. Rather, the graph should be used to spot trends in usage through the search range. To display a count of hits in a book or chapter of the search range, use the Table Bar Chart or Table items. Digging Deeper 11-5

150 11 Getting Details If you change the Words per hit, it will affect only the present and subsequent graphs, not any graphs you have kept. If you click the Keep button and then change the Words per hit, the same search results are plotted again in the next color and with the new setting. The Display buttons affect the drawing of the graph, and make most difference when there are fewer sample points: Bars displays a vertical bar at each sample point Lines draws a line connecting the sample points Areas fills in the shape under the line. The Superimpose as buttons apply to multiple graphs: Overlay uses the same baseline for each graph with the older appearing behind newer graphs but still visible through the transparent colors Stack creates a separate graph for each result, one above the other. Show sum of hits adds another graph with the totals of the graphs currently showing. The Graph appearance section has two checkboxes: Show grid adds a faint gray grid to the background Use black background does what it says, and is particularly effective in presentations. The example shows the same graph as before, with different settings: areas, stack, Grid, and black background. 11-6

151 The Graph colors pop-up menus allow you to customize the color in which each graph is displayed. Up to seven different graphs (and the sum of the hits) can be kept in the graph window at one time, and the color of each is regulated by a numbered pop-up menu. To change the color of one of the graphs, simply choose a new color from the corresponding pop-up menu. The labels beside the colors refer to the current sequence of graphs. Therefore if you have two graphs showing, and you clear the first (earliest) graph, the color of the remaining graph will change to the color of the first pop-up menu setting. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Hits Graph windows for this text. Note: Since there are so many graph defaults which can be saved for each text, Accordance does not save each detail of each type of graph. A setting which applies to more than one type of graph is saved only once. So, if you set the black background as the default, it will be used for every new graph for this text. If you add the grid as a default it will also appear in the Analysis Graph which supports this property. Similarly, color changes apply to each graph or chart, for the text. Once open, each graph can be set independently, it is only the defaults which are combined. Analysis Graph This graph is similar to the Hits Graph as it displays the hits across the search range. It can display multiple hits, not from additional searches, but by splitting up the hits of one search, and displaying the top seven results. This example shows the results of searches for abra* in the book of Genesis, broken down by Word. Only the top seven results in the class are displayed. The legend shows the color used for each result. Clicking on a name in the graph legend, where the cursor becomes an X, removes that result from the graph. Digging Deeper 11-7

152 11 Getting Details Analysis Class Pop-up Menu The pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to select a different class to analyse. If the text is not tagged, only Word is available, and this graph is useful only for wildcard searches. For Key number texts you can select Word or Key Number. Morphologically tagged texts offer more options, similar to those in the Analysis window (see below), except that here you can select only one class. The options include LEX, INFLECT, TAG and the appropriate classes of parsing information. This pop-up menu shows the classes available for Greek texts. Setting Analysis Graph Display Options When an Analysis Graph window is the front window, select Set Graph Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to change the frequency of hits and to set the appearance and colors of the graph. This dialog box is similar to the Hits Graph dialog box, with the addition of the Analysis class pop-up menu which offers the same options the menu on the graph window itself, depending on the current search text. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Analysis Graph windows for this text. 11-8

153 Analysis Bar Chart This chart displays the results of the search with the total number in each class as simple bars, without the distribution across the range of the search. The label on each bar shows the word or form found, and the total count. The legend below the graph gives the search argument. This example shows the same search for abra* in Genesis. The Analysis class pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to select a different class to analyse. It is identical to the menu on the Analysis Graph window. Up to 128 bars can be displayed at once, in up to 4 columns. This example shows all words with Key numbers in Genesis 1:1-5. Setting Analysis Bar Chart Display Options When an Analysis Bar Chart window is the front window, select Set Graph Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to set the appearance and colors of the graph. The Analysis class pop-up menu is just like the menu on the graph window itself. The Chart detail section affects the contents of the chart: Show count on: Left, Right, None determines the position of the numerical label on each bar. The number is suppressed on the left if the bars are too crowded. Digging Deeper 11-9

154 11 Getting Details The Chart colors section allows you to: Use black background and Use identical colors for each of the bars, for a simpler look, or Customize the repeating colors for each seven bars using the color pop-up menus. To change one of the colors, simply choose a new color from the corresponding pop-up menu. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Analysis Bar Chart windows for this text. Analysis Pie Chart This chart displays the same information as the Bar Chart, but in the familiar pie chart form. Each segment is labeled with its name and a count of the number. Only a limited number of items in a class can be shown. The legend below the graph gives the search argument. This example shows the same search for abra* in Genesis. The Analysis class pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to select a different class to analyse. It is identical to the menu on the Analysis Graph window. Setting Analysis Pie Chart Display Options When an Analysis Pie Chart window is the front window, select Set Graph Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to set the appearance and colors of the graph. The Analysis class pop-up menu is just like the menu on the graph window itself

155 The Chart details affect the contents of the chart: Show count on: Below, Right, None determines the position of the numerical label relative to each name. Count as percentage gives the hits as a percentage of the number of hits displayed, instead of the actual number. Note: If the number of items in the class is relatively small, they are all displayed on the pie chart and included in the percentage count. However, if there are many items in the class, such as inflected forms or words, those words that make up about 1% or less of the total are included neither in the chart nor in the percentage calculation, although together they may form a significant percentage of the total hits. The Chart colors section allows you to: Use black background and Customize the repeating colors for each seven bars. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Analysis Pie Chart windows for this text. Table Bar Chart This chart displays graphically the information shown in the Table details described below. It shows all the hits organized by their location. This example shows the search for abra* in the Pentateuch. Each bar is labeled with the book or chapter and the count. Up to 128 bars can be displayed at once, in up to 4 columns. The legend below the graph gives the search argument. The Display pop-up menu in the lower right allows you to select what is counted in each book. Average Hits displays the hits per 1000 words Total Hits displays the count of hits themselves Total Words displays the number of words Total Verses displays the number of verses. The second example shows a count down of the chapter breakdown of average hits in Genesis. Digging Deeper 11-11

156 11 Getting Details Setting Table Bar Chart Display Options When a Table Bar Chart window is the front window, select Set Graph Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to set the detail and color of the graph. The Display pop-up menu is just like the menu on the graph window itself. The Chart details affect the contents of the chart: Show count on: Left, Right, None determines the position of the numerical label on each bar. The number is suppressed on the left if the bars are too crowded. Sort by count sorts the books or chapters in the order of the count, instead of the default Biblical order. Show chapter detail specifies that you want to see the results for each chapter of the search range. The Chart colors section allows you to: Use black background and Set the color for all the bars in the Color pop-up menu. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Table Bar Chart windows for this text. Analysis The Analysis window enables you to view a statistical and categorical breakdown of the results of your search. Much more than simply giving a count of occurrences, this powerful Accordance feature gives you the ability to categorize and examine the hits from your search. To view the analysis of your search results, click the Analysis button on the Details workspace. The following Analysis window shows the search of the KJV for clauses with words beginning with king

157 number of search fields containing hits number of verses displayed total number of hits total number of forms breakdown of hits The Analysis Window The first line of the Analysis window displays the number of search fields that contain the search argument. The search field is set using the search field pop-up menu in the search entry section. In the search for king*, the search field was set to Clause. There are 3173 clauses in the KJV that contain a word beginning with king. The wording of this line changes to reflect the current setting in the search field pop-up menu. The second line of the Analysis window shows the total number of verses displayed. This number matches the number following Verse # of at the top left of the text panes in the Search window. In this example, 3028 verses are displayed. This is smaller than the number of clauses because one verse may include several hit clauses. This number may also be greater than the number of clauses because many sentences (especially in the Greek New Testament) cross verse boundaries. The next item in the Analysis window displays the search argument for each expression, and the number of occurrences in the search results. This is the number of hits in the current search. In this example, there are 3274 words beginning with king. This number is greater than the number of clauses because sometimes there is more than one matching word in a single clause. The fourth line shows the number of forms found, such as capitalization or punctuation even when there is no wildcard. The font size buttons let you quickly adjust the display between small, medium and large. Digging Deeper 11-13

158 Getting Details Categorizing and Analyzing the Hits The bottom section of the window displays information about the forms that matched the search criteria. The above example shows the count of each word found from a single wildcard expression. In the search for a phrase or construct, a dashed line separates the analysis of each word. In the following example, there are 32 hits of the word give, 23 of glory, and 9 of strength. Note: If the same individual word meets the search criteria more than once within the same field, each hit is counted separately. In this search in the King James Version for give followed by glory or strength within 10 words, sometimes give is followed by both glory and strength. Both of these match the search argument and the give is counted twice. Setting the Analysis Display for Non-tagged Texts If you are searching a non-tagged text, choosing Set Analysis Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) brings up this dialog box: The Font size pop-up menu controls the size of the text in the Analysis window. The options in this pop-up menu are Small, Medium, and Large. The Sort pop-up menu controls the order of the sort in the Analysis window. Alphabetical sorts the words from A to Z. Count down lists the word with the highest count first and moves down to the one with the lowest. Count up lists the words in increasing order, from the word with the lowest count to the word with the highest. The Count pop-up menu lets you choose the statistical method by which each word is counted. Number displays the total number of times each word appears in the current search range (hits). Frequency enables you to identify the words which appear most frequently in the current search range. This number shows the number of hits per 1000 words in the search range.

159 Uniqueness enables you to identify those words which are more or less unique to the current search range. This number is computed by dividing the frequency of hits in the search range by the frequency of verses containing this word in the entire text. Importance enables you to identify those words which are most important in the current search range. This number is computed by multiplying the number of hits in the search range by the uniqueness of each word defined above. None displays the words without any count. The following examples show the Analysis window following a search for all words (asterisk) in Genesis 2. The first window shows the Number of each word, sorted alphabetically. Notice that Adam occurs only 6 times in the chapter, much less than many other words. In the second window the Count down option sorts the words with the most frequent at the top. In the third window the Frequency is shown. This number shows the number of hits per 1000 words in the search range. This keeps the words in the same sort order as the count, but gives a number which is useful for comparing with other passages. The next window displays the Uniqueness. This number is computed by dividing the frequency of hits in the search range by the frequency of verses containing this word in the entire text. Pison is shown with an asterisk as it occurs only in this passage. The next three words occur once in this passage, and once elsewhere in the KJV, so their relative uniqueness is very high. Adam appears in ninth place which reflects the fact that this passage includes 6 of a total of 30 occurrences of the word. Digging Deeper 11-15

160 Getting Details The last window shows the count by Importance. This number is computed by multiplying the number of hits in the search range by the uniqueness of each word (as defined above). Adam is now at the top of the list, with Garden in fourth place (the chapter includes 5 out of 52 uses of the word), showing that these words probably have particular significance in the passage. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Analysis windows for this text. Analysis of Keyed Bible Texts The Bible texts with Key numbers such as Strong s allow you to view a breakdown of the different Key numbers found by your search. This is the default display for Keyed Bible texts. When you select Set Analysis Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) for a Keyed text, this dialog box appears. In addition to the options described above, the Show Key Number checkbox lets you display the analysis of all the Key numbers found for each word in the results. Checking the box displays an analysis of the different Greek and Hebrew words translated by this word. The example shows a search for field. The Key number and English transliteration are displayed with the original dictionary form in Greek or Hebrew. Only the Alphabetical sort option can be used when Key numbers are shown, but the various count options are available. When the search argument is a Key number search, the analysis shows all the English words which translate that original word. The Key number could be shown under each word, but in this case they will all be the same. You can select a Key number in the Analysis window, and amplify to a Keyed Bible text, or a dictionary that uses the same Key numbers, and Accordance will search that module for the Key number.

161 Analysis of Morphologically Tagged Texts The Set Analysis Display dialog box for morphologically tagged texts offers many additional options for sorting and displaying the results. These options are described in detail in Chapter G5-Grammatical Amplify Windows. Using the Word Lists The Analysis window lets you create a list of words (hit words or all words) from the current text and range. You can use this window to see the words sorted alphabetically or by their frequency (or the other types of count). If you want to see just the list of words, you must use Set Analysis Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T), and remove both the count and the Key number display, if present. Hint: The plain list can now be copied and pasted, (or dragged and dropped) into the argument entry box, the carriage returns are stripped, and replaced by commas. Concordance Clicking the Concordance button opens the Concordance window which analyses your entire search result similarly to a printed concordance. The window lists all the hit lemmas (or words, that were found in the search), followed by the number of each hit. Below each word is a list of the verse references for each hit throughout the Concordance range, followed by an excerpt of the text before and after each hit. The highlight color and style match the default highlight color and style of the search text. Note: The excerpt does not appear with some Bible texts (older Accordance modules). Digging Deeper 11-17

162 11 Getting Details Setting Concordance Display Options Selecting Set Concordance Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) with the Concordance window in front opens the Set Concordance Display dialog box. The Concord radio buttons let you choose to display verses from the entire text, or just within the current search range. If you select Entire text for a search within a limited range, the Concordance shows all verses in the entire text that have the hit words. In this case, no counts of the hits are shown. Search range only includes only the excerpts that occur within the range of the search. The Font size pop-up menu lets you select Small, Medium, or Large. The Excerpt size pop-up menu offers a range of 1 to 7 words to be displayed before and after the hit word. Note that each punctuation is also counted as a word. The exerpt does not extend past the beginning or end of the verse. (In the Qumran text the excerpts can extend past the ends of lines.) If the word occurs twice in the same verse, two excerpts are shown. The Display thresholds options set the limits for the display of text or references for words that occur often. The Text excerpts box sets the number of verses above which only references are displayed, without the text excerpt. The References only box sets the number of verses above which only (common word) is displayed, without any references. Special options are available for certain texts: Ignore words in brackets box removes from the concordance any words entirely in brackets, which are often editorial alternatives in certain texts. In this case, no counts of the hits are shown. Show part of speech (morphologically tagged texts) adds the part of speech for each lemma. Show lemma on right side, (Hebrew texts) displays the lemma or word to the right of any other text on that line. Limit context size (Qumran text) ends the excerpt if a period or hyphen occurs within the specified number of words. These examples show the same concordance with and without checking all four options

163 Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Concordance windows for this text. Table The Table window enables you to view a table that shows the number of hits and the number of words per book or chapter in your search range. To open a Table window click the Table button in the Details workspace. If you select this item while viewing the results from the search for kings, a window similar to this appears: Setting Table Display Options When a Table window is the front window, selecting the Set Table Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) displays the Set Table Display dialog box shown on the next page: The Sort by pop-up menu sets the order of the results. Reference sorts by Bible book and chapter. A range of books or chapters without hits is grouped together. Average Hits sorts by the hit frequency per 1000 words. Books or chapters with no hits are omitted from the list. Total Hits sorts by the number of hits. Books or chapters with no hits are omitted from the list. Digging Deeper 11-19

164 11 Getting Details Total Words sorts by the number of words in the book or chapter. All the books or chapters are listed. Total Verses sorts by the number of verses in the book or chapter. All the books or chapters are listed. The checkboxes define what is displayed. Show chapter detail specifies that you want to see the number of hits in each chapter of the search range. When sorting by Reference the total for each book is displayed before the totals for individual chapters. With other sort criteria only the chapters are shown when this box is checked. The Table window always displays the total number of hits in each section of the search range. Show average hits per 1000 words adds a second column of information that displays the average number of hits. This is helpful when you want to compare usage across books or chapters of different lengths. Show total verse count adds the actual count of the verses in the books or chapters of the search. Show total word count adds the actual count of all words in the books or chapters of the search. When all four boxes are checked, and the sort is by Average Hits, the resulting table looks like this: The Font size pop-up menu allows you to change the point size of the font in the table display. Note: The word count includes all punctuation marks. In Hebrew the count includes all prefixes and suffixes. Hint: To get a count of words excluding punctuation for a specified range, search for * and use the number of hits. Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Table windows for this text

165 12 Amplify Features Chapter Contents: The Amplify Menu Using Amplify Features Special Features of Amplify Windows General Features of Amplify Windows Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts Amplify Details

166 12 Amplify Features The Amplify features enable you to explore and analyze your search results, or follow a train of thought through all your Accordance modules. Simply selecting a word, phrase, or reference and clicking a button lets you move seamlessly between text and tool modules and the special features. Amplify features can be accessed from the Resource palette, the Amplify menu, or the contextual menu. See Chapter 5-Floating Windows for details of setting the display of the Resource palette to text or icon buttons. The Amplify Menu 12-2 The menu items correspond to the buttons in the Resource palette described in Chapter 5, with slight differences of organization. Most items open a submenu listing the modules or options available in this category. Selecting an item usually searches that module for the selection that you have in the front text pane. Texts: The first three items open submenus with the English, Greek, or Hebrew texts available to your Accordance. Text sets: groups of different texts which you can define yourself. Parallels searches the parallel for the reference of the Bible verse in your selection in a Bible text pane. Context displays the context of selected verses in the same Bible text with the same parallel text panes. Tools: English Tools such as dictionaries. Greek and Hebrew Tools such as lexicons or dictionaries. Reference Tools such as commentaries or Bible notes. General Tools such as writings. Tool sets: groups of different tools which you can define yourself. Background: These items search for a selected name in special windows. Map displays the background of your choice (requires the Bible Atlas). Timeline (requires the Bible Timeline). My Stuff: These items search modules you create yourself: User Tools and User Notes. User Notes finds the Notes on the verse with your selection in a Bible text pane. Language: The submenu lets you select from these options: Parsing displays the parsing details and gloss of selected words in a text with Keys or grammatical tags. Diagram opens a window where you can create a grammatical diagram of the selected words. Speak reads any selected words audibly. Syntax opens a syntactical chart of the selected words which you can edit and annotate.

167 Search: Search searches for the selection in a duplicate of the current Search or Tool window. Search All searches all available modules, or a user defined group of texts, tools, or user tools. Favorites searches any modules that you have added to this list. Note: This chapter introduces you to the available options in the Amplify features, but the specific items are described in detail in the following chapters. Chapter 13-Amplifying your Selection covers the Search, Context, and Speak items, and Chapter G5-Grammatical Amplify Windows describes the Parsing, Diagram, and Syntax windows. Amplifying to the maps in the Atlas is described in Chapter A4, and to the Timeline in Chapter T2. See Chapter 14-Tools, Chapter 15- Search All Groups and Tool Sets, Chapter 16-Parallels, Chapter 19-User Notes, Chapter 20-User Tools for details of amplifying to these modules. Chapter 5-Floating Windows describes the Favorites feature. Using Amplify Features To use an Amplify feature, simply select a word, phrase, or verse reference in a text or tool pane (or in many of the Details, Amplify, or report windows displaying text), then select the desired item from the Resource palette or the Amplify menu. The Contextual menu in any text pane gives you an appropriate selection of amplify items depending on the type of text. See Chapter 24. In general: the Search or Search For item will search for the word (or Key number, root, or lemma) in the same text or tool Search In lets you search in any of your texts Look Up amplifies to the first (or last selected) module in the category Search All lets you select a search all group. After you select an Amplify item, either a new window appears containing the information you requested, or an existing window is updated and brought forward. Digging Deeper 12-3

168 12 Amplify Features Special Features of Amplify Windows Most windows opened by amplifying are recyclable windows. They display the green recycle symbol in the top right of the window. The window will be reused automatically if the same Amplify item is selected again under the same conditions. A new recycling window opens whenever the settings in the pop-up menus of the current window are not appropriate for the new selection. For example, if you select Context when the cursor is flashing (or text is selected) in a pane displaying the KJV, a Text window opens which displays that verse in its context. If you select a different verse in the KJV and select Context, the same Text window will display your new verse. However, if you select a verse in a different Bible text such as the ASV, and select Context, a new text window opens displaying the verse in the ASV. When a window is recycled it is bought to the front and becomes the active window, but only if most of the window was previously hidden from view. If the window is positioned so that part of it can be seen, the contents will update when the window is recycled, but the original window remains the front window. This feature lets you select and amplify repeated portions of the text, without having to click to bring the window to the front each time. Clicking on the recycle symbol, or selecting Recycle Contents from the Set submenu (Window menu or -K) removes or replaces the recycle symbol in the top right corner of the front window, and the check mark beside the menu item. This lets you temporarily preserve the contents of a window while using the same Amplify item, or to recycle a window that was opened as a new window. Selecting Duplicate Window (File menu or -D) makes a copy of the front window, except for the recycle symbol. This is another way to preserve the current contents of an independent Amplify window. (See Chapter 23-Working With Windows.) General Features of Amplify Windows 12-4 You can control the display of information in an active Amplify window by choosing Set windowtype Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T). The name of this menu item changes to reflect the type of window that is currently in front. For example, if a Parsing window is in front, the item reads Set Parsing Display. This dialog box allows you to set display options such as font sizes, parts of speech for parsing, and categories for analyzing search statistics. The changes you make in this dialog box take effect when you click OK. If a Search window is the front window, this item sets the display of the selected text pane as described in Chapter 6. The options you set using this dialog box apply only to the front window unless you click the Use as Default button before you close the dialog box. The default settings usually apply to new windows of the same type opened for the same text. The display options available for each Amplify item are described in the chapter that explains how to use that item. Because each of the Amplify items opens a window to display results, the contents of any Amplify window can be copied to the clipboard, printed, or saved as a text or PICT file. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.)

169 Triple-click Amplify Shortcuts A triple-click on a word or verse reference immediately opens the related resource as follows: If you click in a: English word Keyed word German word with lemma Greek word Hebrew word you amplify to: the first English dictionary the related Greek or Hebrew dictionary for that text the related German dictionary the first Greek dictionary the first Hebrew dictionary Verse reference in a text pane the first Reference tool Name in the map or timeline The triple-click can be modified: the default English tool (double-click) by pressing the shift key to amplify to the tool last used in that menu (in a Key number text, to the last English dictionary). by pressing command key to open the window as an individual window rather than a tab in the workspace. Amplify Details You do not need to study the following details in order to use the Amplify features to explore a topic throughout your Accordance library. When you amplify to a text or tool module, Search All, or Text or Tool Set, the principles which govern the treatment of the selection or blinking insertion point as a search argument are as follows: Verse Reference in a Pane If the selection is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane amplifying to a Reference tool or Bible text opens that module to the same verse. amplifying to any other tool searches for that verse reference in the Scripture field. (If the selection is in a manuscript reference of a non-biblical text like Qumran, amplifying to a tool such as Qumran Index will find where that manuscript is cited.) Clicking on a hypertextable verse reference in a tool automatically opens a Text window for that verse. Selecting a reference in a tool (that is not in the hypertext style) to a Bible or non- Biblical text, and amplifying to that text, finds the reference if the words are not found in the text. Digging Deeper 12-5

170 12 Amplify Features Text Content of a Pane If the selection, is in the text content of a Bible or tool text pane, amplifying to any text or tool module searches the appropriate field for that selection. In the tools in general the fields with the same language as the selection are searched until a hit is found, and all the hits in that field are displayed. Once hits are found, no more fields are searched (for example, if the search argument is found in the Entry field, the Contents are not searched). In the same way you can select a word in a Report window (Analysis, Table, Concordance, Parsing, or Timeline Data), and amplify to any text or tool, using that language, or to the Map or Timeline. If you select a Key number you can amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a Keyed dictionary. Note: When tools are included in the Search All, all fields of the tool that are in the same language are searched, and the results are summarized in the Search All window. The Form that is Searched For most texts and tools Accordance searches for the selected words and phrases in the same form as in the selection, with certain exceptions for the grammatically tagged Greek and Hebrew texts: See Chapter G5. However: A selection in a Keyed Bible text will search for the Key numbers if: you amplify to a Keyed dictionary of the correct language, or you press the option key when amplifying to a Keyed Bible text. A selection in a Keyed Bible text will search for the Greek or Hebrew word if you hold down the option key and amplify to a text or tool containing those languages Note: In general, you cannot amplify from a mixed selection which begins in a verse reference and ends in the text, or vice-versa, nor from a selection which includes more than one verse. Amplifying from a Verse When amplifying from a Bible text to the Context, a parallel text module or a user note file, you can make your selection anywhere in the text pane verse reference, text, or multiple verses. Accordance always searches the new window for the references of the verses in your selection. 12-6

171 13 Amplifying Your Selection Chapter Contents: Context Parsing Syntax Speak Search Favorites

172 13 Amplifying Your Selection This chapter covers the items in the Resource palette and Amplify menu which do not simply open or amplify to a module which you have added to Accordance. These are rather features which give you convenient access to more information about your selection. They include the Context item, and the Language and Search Amplify features included in the two lowermost sections of the palette and menu. All these items amplify the words you have selected in a text pane. If no words are selected, and the insertion point is not in a text pane, these items cannot be selected. The Favorites item is also described at the end of the chapter. Most of these items can amplify any word selection, but the Parsing, Diagram, and Syntax features apply mainly to the grammatically tagged original language texts, and are further described in Chapter G5. However, both the Parsing and the Syntax windows are very useful for Bible texts with Strong s or another numbering system that links the English words to the original. These texts are described in Chapter 9-Keyed Bible texts. Text Sets, Tool Sets, and Search All are described in Chapter Context The Context item in the Resource palette (and Amplify and contextual menus) opens a Text window in which you can view the surrounding context for verses in a Bible text pane. The Text window is also used to display the content of verses when hypertexting from a Tools window. (See Chapter 14-Tools.) The Context feature shows the context for the selected verses in the text pane. First select some verses in any Bible text pane by clicking and dragging the mouse. Then click the Context button, press command-5 ( -5), or select Context from the Amplify menu or Look Up submenu of the contextual menu. A Text window appears with the same Bible text panes as the original window. The window displays the entire text from which the selected verse comes. The selected verse is marked with a bookmark and appears two verses down from the top of the pane. If only the blinking insertion point is in a verse, the window marks that one verse. The Text window does not automatically update if the original Search window changes. If you select more than one verse and then select Context, each of the selected verses appears as a marked verse in the Text window. Displaying the Context of a Missing Verse Sometimes a single verse is omitted from a translation, or combined with another verse. When the verse is present in the search results but not in the display text, it is shown as two dashes. You can display the context of verses adjacent to the missing verse by clicking anywhere in the space for that verse, and selecting the Context item. The verse before the missing verse is marked. See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.

173 Hint: In certain circumstances you may select Context for a missing verse, and get a blank Text window. To get around this you can select Context for the equivalent verse in the search text. The Text Window The title bar of the Text window displays the first and last verse references in the original selection, and the text version. The title bar updates each time the window is used, and thus the name of the window cannot be set by the user. The Show all text Checkbox In the top left of the window is a Show all text checkbox. This control toggles the display of the window between a display of the entire text with the hits marked with a bookmark, and a display of the hit verses only. This checkbox also appears in the User Notes window. When the box is checked, the entire Bible text is shown in the text pane, with the first hit verse or entry near the top of the window, marked with a bookmark. You can then use the scroll bar or text access buttons to view the surrounding text, and you can view the next hit verse by clicking the Mark buttons. When the box is unchecked, only the hit verses or entries are shown in the text pane. When you use the Context item, Accordance assumes that you wish to view more than one verse and only recycles a Text window if it is showing all text. If the Show all text box is not checked, a new Text window opens. The Compare Texts Checkbox Checking this box highlights the differences in the text between the first two versions of any language displayed. See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text. Digging Deeper 13-3

174 13 Amplifying Your Selection The Text order Pop-up Menu The Text order pop-up menu lets you change the text from which the verses are taken, so that verses can be viewed in the order of a different text. The Context feature will only recycle the window if this text pop-up matches the text in which the selection is made. The Recycle Symbol At the top right is the recycle symbol which indicates that the window will be reused. (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.) The Text pane The pane of the Text window is very similar to the text pane of the Search window. You can add new panes by selecting a text from the pop-up menus of the Add pane: buttons. You can also add Tool panes and User Notes panes as described in Chapters 14 and 20. You can change the text for each pane in the display text pop-up menus. The font size buttons let you quickly enlarge or reduce the size of the text. You can set the display of each pane by selecting Set Text Pane Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T). (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.) The close buttons and pane position buttons work in the same way as the Search window. Selecting Tie to from the Set submenu (Window menu) lets you tie the display in this window to any other window whose contents are listed by verse references. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) Hint: Using the Tie option with a Text window is a good way to display the full context of verses in another window while quickly scrolling through them. The text in the pane can be selected and copied, marked with a bookmark or a user note. You can also access all the Amplify functions from this text, including the instant parsing in the Instant Details box. These features are fully described in Chapters 5 and 11. Hypertexting from a Tools window 13-4 If you open a Text window by hypertexting from a Tools window, the Show all text box is not checked, and the text displayed is the one selected in the Text Settings dialog box for tools. However, if any recyclable Text windows are open, they will be used to display the hypertexted verses whatever the current settings in the windows. The Set Tools Display dialog box and hypertexting from a Tools window are fully described in Chapter 14. You can therefore create and save a Text window with several panes. As long as you select a text in the Text order pop-up menu which contains all the verses you wish to view, you can hypertext to this window from any Tools window. For example, a Text window with NRSV in the Text order pop-up menu, and additional panes with GNT-T and BHS-W4 will let you see the full text of any verse in the Old or New Testaments, or the Apocrypha, in English and the original languages.

175 Parsing To see the parsing information for a selected word or words in a text pane displaying a Keyed Bible text, choose Parsing from the Resource palette (or Language submenu of the Amplify menu, or Look Up submenu of the contextual menu). If no text is selected, Key number information is displayed only for the word that contains the blinking insertion point. If no words in the search results are selected and the insertion point is not in a word in the search results, the Parsing window shows only the reference. If the insertion point is not in a text pane of a Keyed or tagged text, the cursor becomes an X over the Parsing button, and the Parsing item in the submenus is dimmed and cannot be accessed. The Parsing Window The font size buttons let you quickly adjust the display between small, medium and large. The contents of the Parsing window are recycled or updated the next time you choose Parsing from the same text. Recycling is described in Chapter 12. The title bar of the window includes the name of the window and the text from which the parsed words are derived. The name of a Parsing window cannot be changed, nor can it be saved and recalled. However the contents of the window can be printed and saved as described in Chapter 25. Digging Deeper 13-5

176 Amplifying Your Selection The Parsing Details The first column of the Parsing window shows the English words from the search text. Words without a Key number are shown on the same line as the next numbered word. The second column shows the Key number of the last word. The third column shows the dictionary form of the original word. The last column shows the English transliteration of the dictionary form. You can set the display of the Parsing window to show only some of these items as described below. If a word is tagged with more than one Key number, the second number information is displayed on the next line after a hyphen. Amplifying You can select a word in a Parsing window, and amplify to a text, tool, or Search All. The search is performed for the language of the selection. If your selection is a Key number, you can amplify to a Keyed Bible text or a dictionary using the same Key numbers, and Accordance will search that module for the Key number. Setting the Parsing Display The contents and display of the information in a Parsing window are determined by selecting Set Parsing Display item (Display or contextual menu, or -T) when a Parsing window is in front. The Set Parsing Display dialog box appears: The Font size: pop-up menu allows you to control the size of the text in a Parsing window. Because there is a mixture of fonts in a Parsing window, the options available are Small, Medium, and Large. The Include: pop-up menu enables you to choose which words in the selected text should be included in the Parsing window. All Words includes each word in the selection Hit Words Only displays only the words within your selection that were found by the search (the words that are highlighted in the text pane). Key Numbers Only displays only the words to which a number was assigned. Hint: If you attempt to parse a selection and do not see any results in the Parsing window, check the parsing display. You may be limiting the parsing to words that do not occur in the selected text. If so, select All words and click OK. The Show checkboxes labeled Key number, English transliteration, and Dictionary form are checked when you first open this window. Clicking on a box or label removes that item from the display of each word in the Parsing window.

177 Clicking OK applies these settings to the front window. Click Cancel to discard all the changes. Clicking Use as Default makes these settings the default for new Parsing windows for this text. Syntax The Syntax feature allows you to annotate each word of a selection from a Bible text, according to syntactical function. The syntactical chart aids Biblical exegesis by encouraging you to analyze each word s function as well as its form. To open a Syntax window, first select some words in the text pane (in any Search, Text, Reference List or Parallel window). Then select Syntax from the Resource palette (or Language submenu of the Amplify menu). The Syntax Window The Syntax window consists of a chart which is arranged like a spreadsheet. The column headings show the intended use of each column. The next line displays the verse reference for the beginning of your selection. The first column lists each word in the selection, The text in this column cannot be edited. The next three columns show the Key number, dictionary form, and English transliteration of the original word (in a Key number text). The fifth column is intended for your comments on the Function of the word in the sentence. Any other Comments can be entered in the sixth column. Digging Deeper 13-7

178 13 Amplifying Your Selection If the selection is from a plain Bible text (no keys or other tags), all words in the verse are included, and only the Word, Function, and Comments columns appear. You can scroll the window by pressing the command and arrow keys, or using the scroll bars. Editing the Text To replace the entire contents of a cell, select the cell and enter the text. To add or edit the text in a cell (except in the first column), double-click in the cell to open the text box. In the text box you can use the Edit menu to copy and paste, as well as the Text palette (and Display menu) to set the font, size, style, and color. The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu (Edit menu or -[ and ]) let you quickly transfer all the font characteristics from one selection to another. To close the text box simply select another cell or press tab or return to move to the next cell. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) Click on the title to select an entire column. To select a vertical or horizontal block of cells, drag the cursor across the cells. The selected cells can be cleared of content by pressing delete or clear. You can use the font items in the Display menu and Font palette to set the font information for all selected cells. The font characteristics (except for style) you set for a cell (not within a text box) become the default font, size, and color for new text boxes. You can select an entire line or several lines by dragging the cursor over all six columns. Pressing delete or clear removes the lines. Dragging selected lines to another window copies them to that window and inserts them in the original word order. This allows you to merge all or part of two Syntax windows. To resize any column, drag the vertical dotted line (when the cursor changes to a two headed arrow). The line heights are automatically resized as necessary whenever you change the column width, type characteristics, or text contents. Printing and Saving Like all Accordance windows, you can directly print your chart. Page margins are shown as blue lines, and can be set in Print Settings (File menu or option- -P). The horizontal page margins automatically adjust to the cell margins. Column lines can be adjusted to fit the vertical margin. You can also save the chart as a text file to open in another program, or copy the entire chart (or a selection) and paste it into another program. When you export the chart, the columns will be separated with tabs so that the vertical alignment can be recreated in a word processor or a spreadsheet. The Save item (File menu or -S) saves the Syntax window for future use in Accordance. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) 13-8

179 Setting Defaults The Syntax Window pane of the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) lets you set the default font, size and color for the English text in new Syntax windows. Any Greek or Hebrew text is sized and styled to match the English. Speak Most models of Macintosh computers include the Speech Manager extension which enables the computer to read selected text. This capability is utilized by Accordance in the Speak Amplify feature. To hear the text read, select a portion of text in almost any text pane, and select Speak from the Resource palette (or Language submenu of the Amplify menu, or Look Up submenu of the contextual menu, or press -9). The currently selected synthesized voice will read the selected text. Greek or Hebrew text can also be read, although some minor pronunciation inaccuracies may be encountered. If the selection is long, a reminder appears on the screen that the reading can be terminated by clicking the mouse button anywhere. Up to 150 verses of Bible text or 150 paragraphs in Tools windows can be read at one time. If the Speech Manager is not installed, a dialog box appears with the appropriate message. Setting the Voice To change the character of the voice, select Speech from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,), and the following dialog box will appear: The list in the Voice pop-up menu will depend on the voices available in the current system. You can select any voice from the menu, but the Greek and Hebrew pronunciation has been optimized for the standard voices of Fred and Junior, and may be considerably less accurate with other voices. Carlos is the best voice for the Spanish Bibles. The slide bar lets you set the speed of the voice, and the Try Voice button gives you a sample of the speech. Digging Deeper 13-9

180 13 Amplifying Your Selection Search The Search item in the Resource palette (and Amplify menu or contextual menu) enables you quickly to search for any words you have selected in a pane of a Search or Tools window (or any Text pane). First select one or more words or parts of words in the pane. Then click the Search button, press command-4 ( -4), or select Search from the Amplify menu, or Search Word from the right-click or contextual menu. A new Search or Tools window with the same panes as the original window appears, searching the same module, and with the selected words automatically entered in the argument entry box. The search is performed and the results are displayed. Selection in a Bible Text Pane In this example the words the heavens and the earth were selected in the ASV pane. The new search window searches the ASV for these words

181 If the selection is in a Keyed Bible text, holding the option key down while clicking Search places the Key numbers from the selection in the argument entry box of the new or recycled Search window, and performs the search. If there is more than one Key number in the selection, the numbers are separated by <AND> so the search finds verses containing all of the numbers. In this example the words the heaven and the earth were selected in the KJVS pane, and option was pressed when Search was selected. The new search window searches the KJVS for [KEY H8064] <AND> [KEY H0776]. The search text popup menu shows the text from which the words were selected. The field and range pop-up menus in More Options duplicate the settings in the previous window. If these settings are inappropriate for the text, or the previous window was not a Search window, the default settings Verse and [All text] are used respectively. The green recycle symbol appears above the OK button. If a subsequent Search amplify from the same text is performed, the window will be reused with its current range and field settings and text panes. If the selection is made in a different text, another Search window opens. The new Search window can also be used just like any other Search window, and the recycle symbol can be removed by clicking on it or by selecting Recycle Contents from the Set submenu (Window menu or -K). Digging Deeper 13-11

182 13 Amplifying Your Selection Search from a Tool If the selection is in a tool pane or Tools window, a new Tools window opens with the results of the search for that selection in the same tool. The field searched depends on the language of the selection. See Chapter 14-Tools. The Search All Pop-up Menu A single click on the Search button on the Resource palette activates the Search as described above. Clicking and holding this button opens the pop-up menu with other items which belong to the Search All feature which is described in Chapter 15. Favorites This menu lets you add your favorite modules from those that you have available to Accordance, and then open or amplify to them in the usual way. It is intended as a short list where you can keep a copy of the items you access most frequently. Add To Favorites adds the front text, tool, parallel, or user tool module to the list. You can use the Arrange Modules window to add to and organize the favorites. Items from Texts, Parallels, Tools, and User Tools can be dragged to the Favorites section to add them to that pop-up menu. The items remain in their original position, and a copy is added to the Favorites

183 Tools 14 Chapter Contents: An Overview of Tools The Tools Window The Text Display of a Tool The Browser Pane Selecting a Range in a Tool Hypertexting in Tools General Features of Tools Windows Amplifying with Tools Searching in Tools Additional Search Options Details for any Reference Tool The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts

184 14 Tools An Overview of Tools 14-2 Accordance gives you immediate access to the relevant information in a wide variety of Bible reference works which are described as tools in this manual. The available tools fall into five categories: English dictionaries or topical resources indexed alphabetically such as Easton s Bible Dictionary or Nave s Topical Bible. Greek lexicons such as Greek Strong s, BDAG, or Louw & Nida which are indexed by Greek words. Hebrew lexicons such as Hebrew Strong s, HALOT, or Brown, Driver, & Briggs which are indexed by Hebrew words. Reference works indexed by verse reference including text notes such as NET Notes, commentaries, apparatus modules, crossreferences or Outlines General works or writings indexed neither alphabetically nor by verse reference such as Journals, Hymns, or Church Fathers. These tools are each available as separate Accordance modules which must be added to Accordance before being viewed. (See Chapter 2-Setting Up.) Tools in the same category appear together in the same pop-up menu on the Resource palette. A separate Tools window must be opened for each category, but it can switch between tools in the same category. In Classic Mac OS, some large tools modules such as the PhotoGuide require increased memory especially when opened with other tools, maps, or texts. If you reach the limits of the memory allocated to Accordance, you can increase the memory allocation. (See Chapter 2-Setting Up.) Each tool can easily be accessed from a selection in any Bible or tool text pane using the Resource palette (or Amplify menu), and is also fully searchable in its own right. This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced in Chapter 4 and covered in full in Chapters 6-7. If you are not familiar with the Search window, please review those chapters first. General Structure of Tools Each tool is divided into articles which can contain different types of text. The articles are indexed primarily by the entries. For example, in a Greek lexicon the entry is the Greek word, while in a commentary the entry is a verse reference. The entry is followed by the contents and other special areas such as Scripture. (The special areas are discussed later in this chapter.) Some articles do not start with an entry. These are often introductory articles to major sections. Larger tools tend to be more complex, with titles and a hierarchy of sections, articles and subarticles. An article may be divided into paragraphs, each of which begins on a new line. In many tools the entry and the entire article form one paragraph. In other tools the entry is on a separate line and forms a separate paragraph. These divisions within tools are important in the use of the various features of the Tools window described in the following pages.

185 The Tools Window Opening a Tools window To open a window displaying all the contents of a specific tool, select the tool from one of the Tool pop-up menus of the Resource palette (see Chapter 5-Floating Windows). If this floating window has been closed, you can reopen it from the Window menu. If no tools modules have been added in that category, a dialog box appears asking you to select a tool to add. The first single click on any button opens the first module on the list. Subsequent single clicks open the last module selected from the list. Holding the mouse button down over the button opens the pop-up menu. The choice of modules in this list is displayed with a check mark beside the prior selection, if any. Selecting any item opens that module. You can also open a new Tools window by selecting the category from the New submenu (File menu). The window displays the first tool in that category. Tools can also be opened by selecting Open (File menu or -O), or double-clicking on the icon in the Finder, or the name in the Arrange Modules window. The Tools Window The Tools window is similar to the Search window and consists of the tools entry section in the upper portion, and a text pane in the lower part. In many of these illustrations Easton s Bible Dictionary is used as an example of a tool. The title bar shows the name of the tool. The Tools Entry Section The entry section includes the tool, field, and History pop-up menus, the argument entry box, the OK button and the More Options section. The tie and recycle symbols may appear above the OK button when appropriate. (See Chapters 12 and 22.) The tool pop-up menu shows the current tool and allows you to select from any tool in the same category available to Accordance. The criteria you enter into the entry box are matched against the contents of the tool. Consulting Study Aids 14-3

186 14 Tools tool pop-up menu History pop-up menu entry section field pop-up menu text pane 14-4 Note: When the tool pop-up menu is changed to another tool, all search results from the previous tool are removed. If the entry box contains only an asterisk, the entire contents of the new tool are displayed Select Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) to set the arrangement of the modules in this and all other pop-up menus of this type. See Chapter 5-Floating Windows for more details on the Arrange Modules window. The field pop-up menu functions somewhat differently from the field pop-up menu in the Search window. A field in a tool is defined as a type of information, analogous to a field in a database. The names and number of the fields depend on the particular tool. For example, a simple dictionary may have only: Entry for the indexed words which head each article, Contents for the article itself, and Scripture for the scripture references. When you search the tool, your search entry is applied to the current field. For example, if your search entry is Job, you can either search for entries including the word Job, or search the Contents for articles including the word job or Job, or search the Scripture for references to the book Job. Fields in other tools may include Entry Number, Greek or Hebrew Content (Greek or Hebrew words included in the contents), English Gloss (a short definition), or the longer English Definition. Page numbers, if present in the tool, are a separate field and are often shown in the text in a different color. When you open a new Tools window, the field is set to the first field, an asterisk is placed in the argument entry box, and the Show pop-up menu is set to All Text. The entire tool is automatically displayed without bookmarks. These settings do not apply when amplifying to the tool in the Resource palette (or Amplify menu), as explained later in this chapter. The argument entry box is very similar to that of the Search window. The search arguments and commands which can be used in tools are described at the end of this chapter.

187 Right-click or control-click in the entry box or the surround opens a contextual menu with appropriate options for setting the search criteria. The More options triangle opens a middle section with the Search within every and Extra Fields pop-up menus. These additional search options are described in detail below. If extra fields are selected, and the section is closed, a plus sign appears beside More options as a reminder. Note: The scripture references are treated as true references, so that the reference to Dan. 3:12-30 will be found whether you search the Scripture field for Dn, Dan, Dan 3, or Dan 3:20. The Text Pane The text pane is also similar to that in the Search window, except that you cannot add other text panes in parallel. There is no text pop-up menu since the pane always displays the tool that you are searching. The scroll bar functions in the same way as in the Search window. Show pop-up menu browser button hypertext buttons reference box The top bar of the pane shows the number of hits, current and total number of paragraphs. The browser button opens and closes the browser pane which is described later. The font size buttons let you quickly and proportionally increase or decrease all the current font display sizes in the pane. The page number of the line at the top of the pane (available in some in tools) appears when the entire text of the tool is displayed. The Show pop-up menu lets you set the display of the window to display the hit paragraphs (with search results) in different ways. Selecting All Text displays the entire text of the tool, with a bookmark at the beginning of each hit paragraph. The window displays the first bookmark at the top of the pane. You can now scroll back to see the context of the paragraphs, including any headings or introductory sections. Consulting Study Aids 14-5

188 14 Tools Selecting Articles displays the entire contents of all articles (or subarticles) containing hits. When Paragraphs is selected, only the paragraphs containing hits are shown. Choosing Add Titles shows the article title (or titles) with each hit paragraph The pop-up menu reverts to All Text whenever you hypertext within the tool as explained below. Note: In some tools the entry or title of an article forms a separate paragraph. In these tools, if you search the Entry field, you will see only the title unless you choose All Text or Articles. Pressing command-semicolon ( -;) toggles the text pane display between the items in the pop-up menu. The text access buttons are similar to those in the Search window. The Article buttons advance the text to the next article. The Mark buttons appear only if there are bookmarks in the window, and move the text to the next bookmark. Pressing the shift key while clicking the button advances the text by ten articles or marks. The reference box displays the entry for the article at the top of the text pane. The first field in the list of fields for that tool is the one displayed, whether a word or phrase, numerical entry, or verse reference. If the article has no entry (such as the introduction to a commentary), the box is blank. You can use the reference box to enter the name of the entry which you wish to view, and the buttons to its right to page through the list of entries. Clicking Go To advances the tool to the new entry. The Prior and Next hypertext buttons only appear when you hypertext or jump within the tool. They allow you to retrace your steps backwards and forwards between the articles you have viewed. Certain actions activate these buttons and leave a trail which can be retraced: using the text access buttons to go to the next or prior Mark or Article clicking on another entry in the browser using the reference box to go to a new entry hypertexting to another entry as described below. As soon as you perform a retraceable step, the Prior button appears. Clicking on the button moves the text back one step. The Next button then appears and allows you to move one step forward. Pressing the control-command left and right arrow key combinations performs the same actions. Note: Simple scrolling through the tool does not allow you to retrace your steps. The buttons disappear if you switch the Show pop-up menu from All Text, or perform a new search. To summarize the various relationships: the Article access buttons advance the text by one article to the next entry the current and total counts are of paragraphs the paragraphs containing hits are bookmarked when the Show pop-up menu is set to All Text. 14-6

189 The Text Display of a Tool The text display is partly determined by the tool and partly dependent on the settings in the Text Settings dialog box. The Text Styles Titles and headings are usually in Bold style, in a larger point size than the main text. Greek and Hebrew words are shown respectively in Helena or Yehudit font in a size proportional to the main text. Some tools also use the Rosetta transliteration font, or the MSS manuscript font. Entries may be in Bold style. Words which were italicized in the printed text (often the primary definitions, or abbreviations) are in Italics on the screen as well. References to the Bible or to other entries in the same tool are distinguished by a hypertext style. The default hypertext style is Blue Underline. The style of both the hypertext and the highlight or hit words can be set by the user. Setting the Text Display You can customize how the tool is displayed in the front window, and set a separate default display format for each tool installed on your system, as well as different colors for the hypertext and highlight styles of each tool. This is very similar to setting the text pane display which is covered in Chapter 6. The current settings for the display of the text also apply when the text is printed, as described in Chapter 25. To format the text display, bring the Tools window to the front and select Set Tool Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T). The Text Settings dialog box appears. The title of the Text Settings dialog box includes the name of the tool in the front window. Clicking the OK button in the dialog box applies these settings only to this window. To make these the default settings for all subsequent displays of this tool, click the Use as default button. The top left portion of the dialog box labeled Contents allows you to set the format for the display of the main text. You can choose from any font available on your system, along with a range of sizes and colors. All titles, superscripts, and Greek or Hebrew text will be resized proportionally to match the main text. The Hide word highlighting checkbox hides any highlights that you have applied to words in this tool. Consulting Study Aids 14-7

190 14 Tools The Search highlighting section in the lower left sets the display of hit words in the text. This is identical to the Text Settings dialog box described in Chapter 6. Note: The hits are shown in the current highlight style for that tool, although this may be masked by the internal style of that field in the text. For example, if the highlight style is boldface, the hits will not be obvious in the entries which are already boldfaced. The Hypertext section on the right allows you to format the display of verse references and other hypertextable links in the text. The Color and Style pop-up menus work in the usual way and set the appearance of the links. The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus let you set the Bible text used in a new Text window whenever you hypertext from a scripture reference in this tool. These pop-up menus display all your Bible texts. For example, you could set the GNT-T text for hypertexting from BDAG, and KJVS from Easton. The Alternate Text will be used both for Instant Details and for the Text window, if the verse is not found in the first text, so it is useful to select a text which covers books that are not included in the first text, such as the Apocrypha. The Picture pop-up menu controls the display of the thumbnail images which appear whenever there is a link to a picture, chart, or map image. This popup menu is described below in the section on Hypertexting. Setting the Default Display for All Tools Choosing Tool Display from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,) lets you set the default display for all tools currently available to Accordance. The window offers the same options as the Text Settings dialog box for individual tools. If you make any changes in this window and click OK, all the settings will become the default for all your current tools. You can then set individual default displays for different tools in the Text Settings dialog box. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) The Browser Pane The browser pane displays the sections, articles and subarticles in the tool. It allows you to see the context of the paragraph currently viewed, and to navigate easily to any other article. It can be opened by clicking the triangle or label in the top left corner of the text pane. 14-8

191 In a dictionary the primary sections are alphabetic, so the first level of the browser shows the letters of the alphabet. The second level shows the first word of each article. In a commentary or Bible notes, the primary sections are the books of the Bible, and the second level usually shows the chapters in each book. The third level is a list of the articles in each chapter. In this general tool the primary sections are the works included in the database, and the second level shows chapters or subsections, with further levels for paragraphs as needed. This example shows a more complex structure in a commentary: Consulting Study Aids 14-9

192 14 Tools Features of the Browser To open and close the browser pane, click on the arrow at the top left of the text pane. You may get a message that Accordance is building the browser index. Click Stop if you wish to cancel the browser. You will also get a message if the Tools window is too narrow for the browser. Initially the browser displays the first level with the primary sections. A side-facing arrow beside the name indicates that there are subsections. Clicking on an arrow opens that section. Some tools may have several levels of subsections. The final level is usually the list of entries, but a few tools have very large articles which are divided into sections. These divisions may also appear in the browser. Holding the option key down while opening the browser or any section, scrolls the browser and opens all levels to show the current paragraph. Close a section or subsection by clicking on the down-facing arrow or in the left margin of the browser pane, where the cursor changes to an X. You can scroll the browser pane independently of the text pane. The mouse scroll wheel also scrolls the browser or the tool pane, depending on the postion of the cursor. The width of the browser pane depends on the position of the cursor. If text in the browser extends beyond the right edge of the pane, when the cursor is over the pane it widens to show the longer entries and more of the hierarchy. When the cursor leaves the browser, the pane reverts to its previous size. To narrow or widen the browser pane, drag the section divider to the right of the scroll bar where the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow. If you approach the section divider from the text pane, so that the browser is in its narrow state, you will reset the narrow width. However, if you move the section divider when the browser is already wide, you will reset the wide state of the browser. The amount that the browser widens under the cursor is fixed, so you cannot independently reset both the narrow and wide positions. These changes apply as long as the window is open. Note: The Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) has an option to suppress the autosizing of the tools browser, as well as to set the font size. See Appendix A-Setting Preferences. As you scroll in the main window pane, the browser pane also scrolls and highlights the line relating to the paragraph at the top of the tools window. This enables you to see the context of this paragraph. Clicking on a title in the browser (where the cursor changes to a magnifying glass) scrolls the main tool pane to that section (and automatically toggles the Show popup menu to All Text). Right-click or control-click in the browser pane opens a contextual menu with options for expanding the levels and working with ranges. Note: Older versions of tools may need to be updated in order to best use the browser.

193 Certain tools have multilingual hierarchies, so that for example, the section headings may be in English while the word entries are in Greek. The reference box in the lower right of the window can also display either language. The small L button appears to the left of the reference box and lets you switch the language of the heading currently showing. In this example, this lets you select all the text, enter a Greek word, and click OK to go to the entry for that word. Selecting a Range in a Tool You can select, search, and display just a part of a tool, by selecting a range in the browser. This feature lets you export the text of specific articles in the tool, and limit your searches to specific sections or articles. The latter is especially useful in collections of works such as the Journals, Church Fathers, or the works of Whitefield. The option key lets you define and remove the ranges in the tool browser, and the color red is used to identify the range. The following actions and results apply to this feature: Pressing the option key when the cursor is over a title in the browser turns the cursor to a hollow red arrow. Clicking on a title with the red arrow selects that section as the current search range, and places a red bar in the margin of the browser. Consulting Study Aids 14-11

194 14 Tools The browser label is underlined in red to remind you that there is a range selected. If you close the browser the underline reminds you that your searches of the tool are limited to the specified range. The OK button is undimmed so that you can repeat the search using the new range. If you open the selected section the red bar will extend to the end of the section. To select a different title, click the red arrow on that title. To remove all selections, move the red arrow to the margin, and it will change to a red X. Click the red X and the range is removed. If a subtitle is selected, it is marked with a full red bar, and the title of its section is marked with a faded red bar. This bar remains as a reminder even if the section is closed and the actual range is not visible. To add an additional title, hold down the shift as well as the option key. The selections do not need to be contiguous: as long as you hold down both the shift and option keys when you click, you can add titles and subtitles from any part of the tool. To remove one of the titles from the selection and leave the others, click again on the title while pressing shift-option. To display all the text in the selected range so that you can save it as a text file, perform a search for * in any field and select Articles in the Show pop-up menu. The selected range is saved and recalled if the window is saved. Hypertexting in Tools When reference works are formatted for use in Accordance, certain hypertext links are included in the text. There are three kinds of hypertext links: internal, scripture, and display. All links are distinguished by the hypertext style and color, which is blue underline by default, but can be set by the user for each tool. When the cursor is over a hypertext section, it changes to a magnifying glass, as shown. To select the text of a hypertext item without hypertexting, start your selection in the space before the item and finish in the space after it

195 Scripture Hypertexting Scripture hypertexting lets you see the full text of the scripture reference. You can simply place the cursor over the reference and see the first verse in the Instant Details box. Note: This feature does not work with earlier versions of some Bibles. The Text Window A single click of the mouse within a scripture reference opens a new Text window displaying the text of the selected reference. The Bible text used is the Text set in the text settings dialog box for this tool. If the verse is not found in that text, the Alternate Text is used. If a recyclable Text window is already open, the contents of that window will be updated to show the verses in the current settings of that window. If the Text order is the default text or the alternate text, and the verse is not found, the window will switch to the other text. If the Text order text is a another text, only the contents of the panes will update. (See Chapter 13 for a description of the Text window.) To view all the references in one paragraph, press the command key while clicking on a reference. To view the full text of more than one reference, click the mouse inside the first reference and drag to the last reference before releasing the mouse. If the selection both begins and ends within scripture references contained in the same paragraph, all the selected references will be displayed in the Text window. If either the beginning or end of a selection does not fall on a scripture reference, no hypertexting will occur. Hint: If the final verse reference consists of only a single digit, end the selection just before the digit to include that reference. If you end the selection after the digit, it will be outside the hypertext region and the hypertext will not work. Note: Selecting a reference in a tool (that is not already a Scripture link) to a Bible or non-biblical text, and amplifying to that text finds the reference. This allows you to hypertext from references to Josephus, Mishna or Qumran, for example. Note: Reference tools from a non-biblical corpus such as Qumran or Josephus use the above scripture hypertexting within the contents of the tool. In addition, the entry reference for each article supports the Instant Details and the hypertexting to a Text window, using the first text (in Arrange Modules) of the corpus to which it belongs. Consulting Study Aids 14-13

196 14 Tools Internal Hypertexting Hypertext links can also refer to other parts of the same tool. These links allow you to follow leads within the tool, and then retrace your steps. Different tools include different types of text link. The example below shows the more complex structure of the Louw & Nida Greek lexicon. scripture reference gloss footnote reference entry number Greek entry cross reference Clicking on a link moves the text to another part of the text, converts the Show popup menu to All Text and makes the Prior button visible. Clicking on the Prior button returns the window to the previous position. The cross references refer to other entries, like the Azariah in the illustrations from Easton. They appear in the same style as the other hypertext items. Clicking once in the reference makes the text move to the entry indicated in the cross reference. In Louw & Nida the entry number is also a cross reference. Clicking on it moves the text to the beginning of the domain or section. Click on the Prior button to return to the entry. The footnote references consist of a simple number, superscripted in the hypertext style. To see the content of the footnote, click once on the reference. To return to the same place in the text, either click on the number of the footnote or on the Prior button. Some tools include a table of abbreviations to which abbreviated words are linked. Similarly, a bibliographic reference can take you to the full bibliography. Section headings in some tools are also hypertextable to the main heading. Most of these hypertext links are also displayed in the Instant Details box. (See Chapter 5-Floating Windows.). For example, holding the cursor over the entry number in the Louw and Nida entry shown above, displays the domain name

197 Display Links Another type of hypertext link opens a Display window so that you can view items which cannot be displayed in the text pane. These include pictures, maps, and tables. Some modules include many images, such as the Bible Lands PhotoGuide which illustrates this section. When an image of a picture or map is included in the database, the cursor changes to show the word PICT when it is over the thumbnail or the reference to the image. Clicking on the reference or the thumbnail opens a Display window which allows you to scroll and magnify the image. The Display Window The Display window for images includes the annotation of the picture. The window displays the recycle symbol and will be reused for another image from the same tool. Pressing command as you click on the thumbnail opens the image in a new, non-recyclable window. The following features let you navigate this window: Click the In and Out buttons to increase or decrease the magnification, or press command + or -. To zoom in on a specific point click and drag the mouse across an area to select it and double-click in the selection. Alternatively you can hold down the shift and command keys and click in the picture. Press the option key and click Out to see the entire picture. Consulting Study Aids 14-15

198 14 Tools To scroll the window, click the scroll bars or drag the sliders, use the mouse scroll wheels, or press the command and arrow keys. Press the command key and use the grab hand to scroll the window by dragging. Drag the horizontal divider to widen or narrow the text area. To copy or save the entire image at full size, select Copy Picture (Edit or contextual menu, or -C), or Save As PICT File (File menu). To select part or all of the picture at the size displayed, choose Select All (Edit menu or -A) to select the visible image, or drag the mouse to select a portion. You can now select Copy Picture Selection (Edit or contextual menu, or -C), or Save Selection As PICT File (File menu). See Chapter 2- Printing and Saving. Choose a white or black background for the windows in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). Hint: Some drawn images have a transparent background and only appear correctly over a white background. Thumbnail Sizes The Picture pop-up menu in the Text Settings dialog box sets the display of the thumbnail images. Select Set Tool Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T) to open this dialog box. The default setting is Small unless QuickTime is not installed, when the default is None. You can choose to increase the size of the thumbnails to Medium or Large, or to replace them with a small Icon. The larger thumbnails allow easier identification of the picture itself, but they also add large white spaces to the text which does not wrap around the image. The icon allows faster scrolling of the window, and does not introduce additional spacing in the text. If there is not enough memory to display the thumbnails, the space is filled by the icon. Neither the thumbnails nor the icon are included when the text is printed or copied to another window. The illustrations show the actual sizes of the different thumbnails

199 Older Table Links Some tools include tables in the text. In older tools, the text of the table is included in the contents of the tool so that it is searchable, but only small tables can be displayed properly within the width of the text pane because of the way the text wraps. Clicking on the title of the table opens a Display window which scrolls horizontally to display all the columns. (In newer tool modules the text wraps within the columns so the table window is not needed.) If you copy the table, or save it as text, the columns are separated by tabs so that they are preserved in a word processor. Although you can print the table, Accordance does not currently support the printing of multiple pages across this window. Printing with the horizontal page orientation, and a smaller font size, will print most wide tables correctly. General Features of Tools Windows The text in a Tools window can be selected and copied, and the paragraphs can be marked with a bookmark as described in Chapter 6. Most of the window features described in Chapter 23 apply to the Tools window. This includes duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the Tools windows with all other open windows. You can also tie the scrolling of the Tools window to another window if both windows are indexed by verse reference. Therefore you can tie any Search, Reference List, User Notes, or Text windows to a Reference Tools window. Hint: Using the Tie option with a Tools window is a good way to display a commentary, outline, or cross reference for verses in a Search window while scrolling through them. You can also tie two reference tools together to view their contents in parallel. Tools windows can be saved and printed just like most other windows. the open or closed state of the browser is saved with the window. (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) When you open a Tools window, the title shows the name of the current tool. The name of the window updates whenever you change the tool to another tool in the same category. However, if you change the name of the Tools window by selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or shift- -N), the new name will no longer update when you change the tool. Consulting Study Aids 14-17

200 14 Tools Amplifying with Tools The five categories of tools which can be viewed in the Tools window, correspond to the first five buttons in the Tools section of the Resource palette English Tools, Greek Tools, Hebrew Tools, Reference Tools, and General Tools. The items in the second section of the Amplify menu show the same categories. The pop-up menus and submenus list the tools available in each category, and allow you to select a different tool. (See Chapter 5-Floating Windows and 12-Amplify Features.) Until you add to Accordance a tool belonging to a particular category, the category is dimmed on the Amplify menu. After two or more tools in a category are added, another item appears at the bottom of the pop-up menu or submenu allowing you to select all the tools in that category. You can change the order of the tools in each pop-up menu as described above for the tool pop-up menu. To use a tool as an Amplify feature, simply select a word or leave the cursor flashing in the text pane of a Bible text or a tool window, and then select the tool from the Resource palette or Amplify menu. The actions of the buttons are described in Chapter 5-Floating Windows. Amplify Shortcuts Triple-clicking on a word in any text pane results in an automatic amplify to the first tool in the appropriate category. If the cursor is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane, the first reference tool or commentary is opened and searched. If an English, Greek, or Hebrew word is triple-clicked, Accordance searches the first lexicon or dictionary of the same language. If the word is in a Keyed Bible text, Accordance amplifies to the related dictionary. If the word is not found in the tool, the triple-click is ignored. Pressing the shift key while triple-clicking amplifies to the first tool set (see Chapter 15), and pressing the control key while triple-clicking amplifies to the last tool selected from the same pop-up menu. Selecting any word or phrase in a tool and clicking Search on the Resource palette (or Amplify menu, or -4) or selecting Search Word in the contextual menu, searches for the selection in the same tool. The Look Up submenu of the right or control-click contextual menu lets you quickly amplify to the top (or last selected) dictionary of the same language, or Reference tool on your list. Note: It is not necessary to be familiar with the following details. You can move seamlessly between all your Accordance modules simply by clicking in or selecting the word, phrase, or verse reference of interest, and selecting the new module from the Resource palette or Amplify menu

201 Tools Window Settings When a Tools window is opened as an Amplify feature, Accordance sets the window based on the current selection, independent of the default settings. The tool pop-up menu is always set to the tool you have selected. The Show pop-up menu may be set to All Text or Articles, depending on the tool. When All Text is showing, the text pane scrolls to display the first hit paragraph. Changes in the Show pop-up menu setting do not affect the recycling. Thus if you open Easton, the setting is All Text, but you can switch to Paragraphs and the window will still recycle. The argument entry box contains either the verse references or the words you selected. The field pop-up menu setting depends on the selection in the text pane which you are amplifying, as described below. Fields Searched The principles which govern amplifying from one text or tool to another are described in Chapter 12-Amplify Features. If the selection, or cursor, is in a verse reference in a Bible text pane amplifying to a Reference tool opens that module to the same verse. If the selected verse is not found in the reference tool, the previous article is displayed if it is in the same chapter. If more than one entry is found for the reference, and the tool is set to show All Text, the window scrolls to the last entry, as this is usually the actual commentary on the verse. If an article is not found close to the reference, the Scripture field is searched. amplifying to any other tool searches for that verse reference in the Scripture field. If the selection, or cursor, is in the text content of a Bible or tool text pane, amplifying to any tool searches the appropriate field for that selection. Accordance first searches the primary field for that language in that tool. If the word is not found, any other fields of that language are searched and the field is set accordingly. Once hits are found, no more fields are searched (for example, if the search argument is found in the Entry field, the Contents are not searched). A new Tools window opens to display the results unless there is a window already open displaying the same tool, searching the same field, and showing the green recycle symbol. If the word is not found at all, a dialog window opens with that message. In the example on the next page, if you amplify to Easton from Genesis 1:4 with the word light selected (or with the cursor flashing in the word light), the window displays the articles containing the word light in the Entry. However, if you select the word divided, Accordance finds no entries containing this word, so it displays all articles containing the word divided in the Contents. Consulting Study Aids 14-19

202 14 Tools In the example, note that Accordance has opened another window in order to search the contents: Note: If the insertion point is flashing in a word, Accordance searches for the entire word. If part of a word is selected, only that part is used in the search. The Greek and Hebrew Tools The Greek and Hebrew tools, as well as other scholarly tools, use different languages in the different fields. Accordance searches only the fields which use the language of the text selection. If you amplify from a Greek or Hebrew word in any text or tool, or in an Analysis, Concordance, or Parsing window, or press the option key when amplifying from a Keyed Bible text, you will search the tool for the Greek or Hebrew word. Amplifying from the original language texts is described in Chapter G5. This example shows that four entries for the Hebrew word rwøa (light) were found in the Hebrew Strong s. (The search ignores accents and vowel points.) The field pop-up menu is open to show the different fields. Note: When hypertexting from an Aramaic lemma with a suffix _0 to a tool with Aramaic fields (such as HALOT), the Aramaic fields are searched

203 In dictionaries which support Key numbers you can directly search for these numbers by amplifying from a selection in a Keyed Bible text, or from the Key number in an Analysis or Parsing window. If there is more than one Key number in the selection in a Bible text, they are placed in parentheses separated by commas, so that all the entries are found. The match will only be exact if the same Key number scheme is used (see Chapter 9-Keyed Bible Texts). This example shows the Hebrew word translated light in Gen. 1:3. Searching the Definitions You can also look up English words in a Greek or Hebrew dictionary. If you amplify from an English selection (without Key numbers) to an original language lexicon, you will search the English Gloss for related articles. If one or more of the words are not found in the gloss, the English Content or English Translation are searched. For example, amplifying to NAS Hebrew from light finds 15 hits with light in the English Gloss, whereas amplifying from lights finds 2 hits with lights somewhere in the English Translation. In the case of the NAS Dictionaries, the English Translation consists of the words used in the NASB to translate this entry Note: In some lexicons the distinction between the English Gloss and the English Content is not always clear cut. Consulting Study Aids 14-21

204 14 Tools Window Recycling When opened by amplifying from a selection, Tools windows display the green recycle symbol in the top right of the window. The window will be reused automatically if the same tool is selected again under the same conditions. A new recycling window opens whenever the settings in the pop-up menus of the current window are not appropriate for the new selection. In the previous example you can see that when the field pop-up menu setting changed, a new window was opened for the same tool. You can have several windows open with the same tool but different fields, and the correct window will update each time. Refer to Chapter 12 for a complete description of window recycling. Searching in Tools Searching the tool is as easy as searching the Bible text. You can simply type or copy a word or phrase in the argument entry box, choose the field you want to search, and click OK. Selecting Enter Words (Search menu or -J) brings up the Select Words dialog box with the vocabulary list for the currently selected field in the tool. so you can select the words you want to search. The Select Words dialog box is not used in Scripture fields. Your entry is checked for validity against the list of words in the current field. Many of the symbols and commands used in the Search window can also be used in the argument entry box of the Tools window, with an additional [MERGE] command. There are slight differences which are outlined below. Entering an asterisk (*) displays the entire tool. (See Chapter 8-Search Symbols and Commands.) Hint: To highlight every word in a particular field, use this entry:?*. Punctuation is not accepted in the argument entry box, but unlike the Search window, it is not ignored in the search. If you paste a phrase into the Tools window, punctuation must be deleted from the argument. Hint: You can use an asterisk alone to stand for one or more punctuation marks in a phrase. For example, to search for e.g. you can enter e * g. This is done automatically when you amplify. Language of the Argument The language of the argument entry box varies with the language of the current field (Greek, Hebrew, or English). In Greek or Hebrew you should use the lexical form to search the Entry field. The Greek or Hebrew Contents often include inflected forms. Accents, breathing marks and vowel points are ignored in the search. Accordance also takes related Greek forms into account. For example, if you search for ei pon (say) you will also get the entry for le gw (say). Limiting Searches to a Range You can use the browser as described earlier to define a range within the tool. All subsequent searches are limited to that range until the selection in the browser is removed

205 Symbols and Commands The basic symbols and commands function in the same way as in the Search window. The others are dimmed in the menus. The Connecting Commands The connecting commands such as <AND>, <NOT>, <XOR> apply to an entire article or paragraph as determined by the Set within every pop-up menu in the More options section. For example, in the Scripture field you can find articles which refer to Gen. 1 <AND> Isaiah. Linking to Other Windows Three different multiple window commands allow you to link the search entry section of a Tools window to another window LINK, CONTENTS, and MERGE. You can enter these commands from the Enter Command submenu (Search menu) or the key commands shift- -L, C, or M. If there are appropriate windows open, a dialog box appears showing the names of all these windows. Select the name of the window that you want to link to, and click OK. [Command windowname] is added to the argument entry box at the insertion point. If only one appropriate window is open, the name of that window is automatically inserted in the command. If there are no other windows open, a question mark is automatically inserted with the command in the argument entry box. This question mark is selected so that you can immediately enter a new window name. You can now complete the search argument. When you click OK in either window, the search is performed in that window and in all the windows that are linked to it by the multiple window command. LINK You can use the LINK command to link the search arguments of two Tools windows. Accordance checks the field settings of both windows to see whether the language is the same. If a window is set to the Scripture field, linking is only allowed with another window set to the Scripture field. The LINK command itself imports just the argument from the linked window. When you update the argument in the linked window and click OK, the search is repeated in both windows. For example, you can use LINK to search two different Greek lexicons for the same lexical form, or two fields of the same language in the same tool. You can add other expressions to the search argument to further define the search. The next page shows the results of a search for Joshua in the Entry and the Content fields of Nave s. Consulting Study Aids 14-23

206 14 Tools CONTENTS The CONTENTS command can be used to link a Reference tool such as a commentary to the verse list in a Search window. The Tools window then bookmarks or displays only the articles relating to the verses showing in the Search window. If you add another search criterion in the Tools window, the search is performed in the current field, but only in the articles with entries matching the verses in the Search window. This feature lets you continuously display only the commentary articles on the search results in the Bible text. It also lets you perform a search in only a limited part of the tool for example, display only Genesis in the Search window and link and search the Tools window to find Cain only in the commentary on Genesis. In the example below, the Search window shows only the 27 verses containing Adam. The commentary search for Cain has 16 hits in the articles on those 27 verses (actually 13 for Cain and 3 for verse references) whereas a search simply for Cain finds 30 hits in this tool

207 MERGE The MERGE command is unique to the Tools window, and has two different functions to import both the contents and the search argument from a Bible text, and to allow searching of two fields in the same tool. In each case you are merging the search results from one window to another. MERGE from the Bible to a Reference Tool The first use of MERGE is an extension of the CONTENTS command for Reference tools. You can use MERGE to link a Reference tool to a Search window with a search argument. Accordance will find all the articles in the commentary which apply to the verses in the Search window, and will also search those articles for the hit words found in the Search window. You can also add additional search arguments to the MERGE command. The main application of this command is when additional search criteria can be used in the Search window, and then applied to a tool such as the MT/ LXX parallel database, as described in Chapter G6- Searching the MT/LXX. An example in a more basic tool could be to search the KJV for Adam and set Henry s Commentary to merge with the Search window. The Tools window shows articles on the verses in the Search window, but only if they also contain Adam. If you change the argument in the Search window to Moses, the Tools window will also update and search for the new argument. MERGE in the Same Tool The MERGE command can also be used to link to another window searching a different field of the same tool. This is similar to the Extra Fields option described below, but allows you to see the results of individual searches before they are combined. For example, search the Scripture field of Nave s for the book of Joshua, Open another Nave s window and search its Content for Jerusalem. Now add a MERGE from the second to the first Tools window and click OK. The search finds articles with both a scripture reference to Joshua, and the word Jerusalem in the contents, and is shown on the next page. Consulting Study Aids 14-25

208 14 Tools This use of the command is different from the LINK command because it does not import the search argument, but rather the lists of hits and articles found in the first window. The window containing the MERGE command must be searching a different field of the same tool, and should have an additional search argument. Additional Search Options Clicking the More options triangle opens a section with two pop-up menus. The Search within every pop-up menu lets you choose Article (default) or Paragraph. This lets you define the context of searches with <AND>, [FIELD], or other search relationships in a similar manner to the pop-up menu on the Search window. For example, Adam <NOT> Eve finds Adam when Eve is not mentioned in the same paragraph or article, depending on the setting. Extra Fields The Extra Fields pop-up menu allows you to add up to four more search fields. When the section is opened, one field is automatically added. Each new field adds two pop-up menus and an argument entry box. You can use this feature to search, for example, for a Greek word, and an English word or phrase in the same article, or to limit your search to a specific article. The first pop-up menu lets you choose the relationship between this field and the preceding fields. The options are AND, OR and NOT. The field pop-up menu offers the same choices as the main field pop-up menu, i.e. all the fields defined in this tool

209 The search argument is entered in the adjacent text box using all the relevant options in the Search menu. The example shows the same search as the MERGE command on the preceding page: Joshua in the Scripture field and Jerusalem in the Contents. Choosing fewer or more search fields removes or adds to the end of the set. The arguments in these fields are not saved in the History, but are recalled if the window is saved. Extra fields without search criteria are ignored. If you close the More options section while you have extra search fields defined, a plus sign appears beside the More options label as a reminder. This example shows a search of the Greek-English lexicon for paragraphs with words starting with agap* (love) in the Entry or Greek Contents, English content beginning with lov*, and Scripture references to the epistles of John. Right-click or control-click in the surround of the entry box opena the contextual menu with the options of Search Within and Extra Fields. Order of the Fields Each search field is evaluated in order. Thus: A and B or C not D is equivalent to (A and B not D) or (C not D) A or B not C and D is equivalent to (A and D not C) or (B and D not C) A and B not C or D is equivalent to (A and B not C) or D A or B and C or D is equivalent to (A and C) or (B and C) or D. Consulting Study Aids 14-27

210 14 Tools Details for any Reference Tool The Details button appears only on windows with Reference tools. Clicking the button open a Details workspace which offers Hits Graph and Table tabs similar to those available in the Search window. This feature is especially useful in research Reference tools such as the MT/LXX, Qumran Index, or an Apparatus. This Hits Graph window shows a graph of the MT/LXX with a search for hco and poiew in the same paragraph within the Torah, and then the same search superimposed with NOT. The Table window below shows the second search with all the details showing, confirming that hco is frequently not translated by poiew in Ex. 36 and 37, where it is in fact often left untranslated. Note: Some commentaries have very complex structures, as shown in the Browser. In this case the Details windows may not function correctly. The usual Hits Graph and Table settings can be accessed from the Display menu ( -T) and saved as the default for each tool. The only differences are that the Graph display has Verses per hit (allows 5 to 2000) and the Table display has hits per 100 verses and does not have the option of total word count. There is no separate option in the Preferences to set which details appear when the Details button is clicked on a Reference tool: the Hits Graph and Table appear if they are selected in the Search Window preferences. See Chapter 11-Getting Details, and Appendix A-Setting Preferences

211 The Tool Pane in a Bible Text Window The Add pane: Reference Tool button on the Search, Text, and Reference List windows lets you add any Reference tool in a new pane in the window. This lets you view the margin notes which accompany many translations, or any commentary, in the same window as the Bible text. Each new pane is first added in a horizontal pane at the bottom of the window. Pressing option while adding the pane adds it directly to the upper row. Clicking the pane position button with the two arrows switches the pane betwen the two rows. Pressing the option key while clicking the button switches the pane to left of the other row (instead of the right) Hint: A narrow vertical pane is ideal for margin notes, whereas a full commentary is often better displayed in a wide horizontal pane. Consulting Study Aids 14-29

212 14 Tools Scrolling the panes Each pane displays the entire tool rather than the entries for selected verses. The access buttons and reference box at the bottom of the window always move the Bible text panes. The scroll bar (and page up and page down keys) scroll the selected pane so that you can view the entire text of a commentary by clicking in its pane before scrolling. All the panes behave like tied windows: they scroll together so that the verses at the top of the panes are aligned as far as possible. If the exact verse showing at the top of the pane which has been scrolled is not present in another pane, that pane scrolls to the nearest verse. However, if no verses from that book are present, the pane does not scroll at all. The text of the tools shown in these panes is identical to the text in the Tools window. The internal and scripture hypertext links are all supported. Clicking a scripture link in the pane of a Search window opens a Text window with only the Bible text panes from the original window, as well as a pane showing the default text for the tool (if necessary). Clicking a reference in a pane of a Text window recycles the same window to show the new verse. Clicking an internal link jumps the same pane to the new position, and the Bible panes also follow if it is an entry with a verse reference rather than, for example, an index of abbreviations. The Prior and Next buttons appear and allow you to return to the verse you were viewing, whenever you: use the reference box to go to a new entry click on an internal hyperlink in the tool pane recycle a text window by clicking a scripture reference in a tool pane click a Mark up or down button. The buttons diappear when: you perform a new Search you un-click Show All text in the Text window when you select a different text in the Text order pop-up menu You can select words in the pane and amplify from them. If you amplify to Search, a new Tools window opens with the same tool. However, you cannot search the tools inside the Search window, nor can you open a Browser pane or choose which parts of the tool are displayed. Hint: Add your favorite reference tools and Bible texts to a Text window showing all text. This window will update whenever you choose Context, or click on a verse reference in a tool. You can even click on a Scripture link in one of the tools showing in the window, and it will update to display that verse in each pane

213 Adjusting and Closing Panes You can adjust the width of the panes and the height of the second row of panes by dragging the heavy divider lines. If the divider is dragged all the way across the pane, the pane closes. Close Pane (File menu or -Y) closes the selected pane, as does clicking the close button in the top left. The last pane in the lower row can be closed by dragging the divider to the bottom of the window. Printing Parallel Panes When you print a window with parallel panes you have many options which enable you to print all the panes in a synchronized manner. These options are shown when you select Print Settings (File menu or option- -P), and are described in Chapter 25-Printing and Saving. Although the tool pane displays all the tool, when printing tool panes Accordance includes only the entries that match each Bible verse being printed, and not the intervening entries. Consulting Study Aids 14-31

214 14 Tools Reference Tools for Non-Biblical Texts Certain tools are indexed by the references of non-biblical texts such as Qumran, Josephus, Apostolic Fathers, Mishna, Inscriptions, or Pseudepigrapha. These can be tied to a Search window for synchronized scrolling, or added as a pane in the Search or Text window. When the search text is a non-biblical module, only tools that belong to the same corpus can be added in parallel panes from the Add pane: Reference Tool pop-up menu. Hypertext Links The index reference in these tools is linked to the corpus to which the tool belongs. Other cross references are linked to the Bible texts. Thus, for example, if you click in the Qumran Index on the entry reference, a Text window opens with the first text you have of that corpus, i.e. QUMRAN or QUMENG. If you click a Scripture reference, the default Bible text opens in a Text window. If you click a Related manuscript internal reference, you hypertext within the tool. The same texts appear in the Instant Details when the cursor is over a linked reference. The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus in the Text Settings dialog box (Set Tool Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T)) only set the Bible texts for references from these tools. The text used in the primary entries is always the first text of the relevant corpus. For example, if QUMENG is above QUMRAN in the Arrange Modules dialog, the instant Details will show the QUMENG and the QUMENG will open in a Text window unless QUMRAN is already open. See Chapter 5 for details of the Arrange Modules window

215 15 Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets Chapter Contents: The Search All Window Creating and Editing Groups of Modules Amplifying to the Search All Window Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set Differences between Sets and Groups

216 15 Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets The Search All Window The Search All window lets you search all of your available Accordance text, tool, and user tool modules (or a user-defined group of modules) at the same time. To open a new Search All window select [All] from the Search button of the Resource palette or Search All from the New submenu (File menu or -F). Like other Accordance windows, the Search All window consists of a search entry section and a browser text pane to display results. This window can be saved and recalled with the current search argument. The Search Entry Section The search entry section of the Search All window includes three pop-up menus: Language, Group, and History. The Language pop-up menu shows the language of the search, and lets you select English, Greek, or Hebrew, or Scripture references which are always searched separately. The Group pop-up menu has four permanent items: [All] requires the search to include all Bible text, tool, and user tool modules currently available to Accordance. [All Bibles] limits the search to all the Bible texts [All Tools] limits the search to all the tools (not user tools) Define Group lets you define a group of modules to search. The menu also shows any groups which have already been defined. The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window. The argument entry box is similar to the Tools windows. Simply enter a word or phrase and use the search commands and symbols from the Search or contextual menu as necessary. If you select the Greek or Hebrew language, the appropriate font and direction are used automatically, and you can select from the Tags submenu. The Enter Words (Lexical or Inflected Forms) dialog boxes use the words from the first module of that language, unless a different module is selected from the popup menu in the dialog box (see Chapter 8-Doing Searches). The scope of the connecting commands <AND>, <NOT>, and <XOR> is within one verse in Bible texts, and one article in tools. Thus Adam <AND> Eve finds Bible verses and tools articles containing both words. You can use the <WITHIN> command to define a closer relationship, or directly search for the phrase Adam and Eve. Any search argument which does not apply to a particular module will be ignored in that module. 15-2

217 Hint: You can define a more complex search in a Construct or Search window, and use the [LINK] command to use it in the Search All window. Performing a Search Clicking the OK button performs the search in the selected module group. A dialog box informs you which module is currently being searched, and a progress dialog box appears if the search takes more than a few seconds. Accordance searches Bible texts of the appropriate language for the search argument. (All languages other than Greek and Hebrew are treated as English.) When searching grammatically tagged texts the lexical forms are searched unless the words are enclosed in quotation marks. In each tools module, Accordance searches each field of the appropriate language. The results for each field are displayed separately in the browser. When Scripture is selected in the language pop-up menu, Accordance searches only the Scripture references in each module. Use the same criteria to enter scripture references as in the Verse reference mode of the Search window, or for the Scripture field of the Tools window. A dialog box informs you if no hits are found in any module in the group, and any previous results in the browser pane are cleared. If the search is canceled the results are displayed up to that point. The Browser Text Pane The results of the search appear in the browser pane below the search entry section. This browser is similar to the tools browser described in Chapter 14. The the font size of the browser can be set in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). The first level shows the list of text and tool modules in which hits were found, the field of the tool, and a count of the hits. Clicking on the side-facing arrow beside a module opens the list of articles (in tools) or books (in Bible texts) containing the hits. Clicking on the downfacing arrow or in the left margin (where the cursor becomes an X) closes that section of the browser. Note: For tools, the relative importance of the number of hits depends upon which field is searched. (For example, searching article Titles will often give a much smaller number than when the Contents are searched.) To see the hits in the module, click on the module name (where the cursor becomes a magnifying glass). This opens a recyclable Search or Tools window, performs the search again in the same field, and scrolls the window to display the first hit. Clicking on a book, chapter, or article name opens, searches, and scrolls the window to display that part of the results. Note: If you perform a linked search using the argument from a Search or Construct window, and then close that window, you will be unable to open modules to display the results, as the search argument is no longer available. Consulting Study Aids 15-3

218 15 Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets Creating and Editing Groups of Modules You can define your own group of modules for the Search All, and these groups will appear in the group and Search pop-up menus. First select Define Group (Search menu or -R) with the Search All window in front, or from the Search pop-up menu in the Resource palette or the group pop-up menu in the Search All window. The resulting Define Groups dialog box is somewhat similar to the Define Ranges dialog box described in Chapter 7. If you have not yet defined a group, [New name] appears on the list. Otherwise, the first or the currently selected group is selected in the list and its name and item list appear in the boxes. The four scrolling lists at the bottom of the window show (from left to right) all the Bible texts, tools, and user tools you currently have available to Accordance (in alphabetical order), and the item list of modules you have selected for this group. To add a module to the selected group, select its name in one of the left-hand lists, and click on the Text», Tool», or My Tool» button (or double-click on the module name). Use the lower Delete, Up, and Down buttons to remove modules and change the order of the items in the Group Items list. The New button adds [New name] to the list. Enter a name for the group in place of [New name]. Clicking on the upper New, Up, Down, or the OK button, or on another name in the list, adds the new group to the scrolling list of groups. Clicking the upper Delete button removes the selected group. The upper Up and Down buttons move the selected group name up and down the list. The groups will appear on the Search and group pop-up menus in the order that they appear on this list. Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without saving ANY changes to the groups. Clicking OK closes the window and saves ALL changes. Note: If a user tool has the same name as a Bible or tool on one of the other lists, the Search All will not find it correctly. User tools are described in Chapter

219 Amplifying to the Search All Window You can select verse references or text in any Bible text pane, or text in any tool pane, and amplify to the Search All window. This feature lets you search your entire set of Accordance modules for a specific word, phrase, or verse reference, with a single click of the mouse. Simply choose the group you want to search from the Search pop-up menu in the Resource palette or Search All submenu (Amplify menu or contextual menu). In most cases your selection will appear in the argument entry box in the same form as in the original text or tool. If the selection, or cursor, is in: a verse reference in a Bible text pane, all texts and tools will be searched for that reference. the text content of a Bible or tool text pane, the appropriate fields of each module are searched for that selection. a Keyed Bible text pane, and you press the option key, the texts and tools are searched for the original word or words. Accordance searches each module in the selected group, and opens the Search All window only if it finds hits. A dialog box informs you if no hits are found. Creating and Editing Text and Tool Sets The Text and Tool Set features allow you to define sets of modules, and open a set or amplify to it directly. For example, you can group related tools together, or create a set of favorite Bibles that you consult for a particular type of study. The sets you define appear in the Text Set or the Tool Set pop-up menus of the Resource palette and Amplify menu. To define your own set of texts first select Define Text Set from the Text Set pop-up menu in the Resource palette. To define your own set of tools, select Define Tool Set (Search menu or -R) with a Tools window in front, or from the Tool Set pop-up menu in the Resource palette. The resulting Define Sets dialog box is very similar to the Define Groups dialog box described earlier except that only the one kind of module is available to add to a set. If you have not yet defined a set, [New set] appears on the list. Otherwise, the first set is selected in the list and its name and item list appear in the boxes. Consulting Study Aids 15-5

220 15 Search All Groups, Text and Tool Sets The two scrolling lists at the bottom of the window show all the texts or tools you have available to Accordance (in alphabetical order), and the list of modules you have selected for this set. The buttons and lists work in the same way as in the Define Groups dialog box. Check the Open with automatic tiling checkbox if you want the windows in the set to be tiled when you first open them. This option also automatically ties the scrolling of the Bibles, or of any Reference tools in the set. Both apply only if the modules are not opened in a Workspace. (See Chapter 23 for details of tiling and tying.) Amplifying to a Text or Tool Set You can select verse references or text in any Bible text pane, or text in any tool pane, and amplify to a defined set in the pop-up menus in the Resource palette or Amplify menu. Accordance opens a new window for each module in which the selection is found and performs the search in each window. If the Open with automatic tiling checkbox is checked for that set, the windows are tiled and tied as appropriate. If the front window is a Workspace, new tabs are opened, but not tied or tiled. Pressing the command key when amplifying to the set opens separate windows in front of the workspace. When tied together, the first Bible or Reference tool in the list scrolls to show the first hit, and the others scroll to show the nearest verses to that hit. However, if the selection is a verse reference and the tool is a reference tool, the window scrolls to the last hit as this is usually the actual comment on that verse. Differences between Sets and Groups Text and Tool sets and Search All groups are both similar to the All (such as All English) item at the bottom of each tool and text pop-up menu in the Resource palette and Amplify menu, but each feature is also distinctive. The All includes all the tools or texts in its category. It can only be accessed by amplifying from a selection. Text and Tool sets are user definable, and can include texts of any language or tools from any category. They also allow automatic tiling of the windows and tying of Bibles and Reference tools. Sets can be opened as new windows from the Resource palette as well as by amplifying. The Search All group can include Bible texts, tools, and user tools. For tools it searches all the fields of the language at once. It opens a specialized window displaying a summary list of all the modules which contain search results, rather than immediately opening the modules. This gives an overview of the results, and lets you choose which modules to open and inspect. The Search All window also lets you define your search directly, include some search commands, or link to a more complex search. 15-6

221 Parallels 16 Chapter Contents: Parallel Text Modules The Parallel Window The Parallel Text Panes General Window Features Amplifying to a Parallel Window

222 16 Parallels Parallel Text Modules The parallel text modules available for Accordance consist of sets of Bible verses that are parallel in content to each other. Each module lets you compare passages which are parallel or similar in different books or parts of the same book. Currently available modules include the Old Testament, Old Testament Quotations in the New Testament, Epistles, and three different parallel treatments of the Gospels. Each module must be added to Accordance before it can be viewed. (See Chapter 2-Getting Started.) This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced in Chapter 4 and covered in full in Chapters 6-7. The Parallel window is also similar to the Tools window described in Chapter 14. General Structure of Parallel Modules Each module consists of a list of pericopes consisting of passages of one or more verses, which have been identified as parallels within the context of the module. Each pericope has a title number, a title, and a list of references to the passages. In this chapter the parallel text modules will be referred to as parallels for the sake of brevity. You can search for a title number, search the titles for specific words, or enter a verse reference. Any of these searches will result in a list of pericope titles which meet the criteria. You can view the details of each pericope in parallel panes by selecting them from the list. The Parallel Window To open a new Parallel window, select the name from the Parallel popup menu of the Resource palette. You can also select Parallel from the New submenu (File menu) or double-click on the icon of a parallel in the Finder, or the name in the Arrange Modules window. If you have not added any parallels, you will get a dialog box asking you to select the first parallel to add. The Parallel window is similar to the Search window, and consists of an upper portion containing the entry section and the pericope title list, and a lower portion containing text panes. In these illustrations the Old Testament parallel is used as an example. The Entry Section The entry section includes the parallel, field, display text, and History pop-up menus, two checkboxes, the argument entry box and the OK button. The recycle symbol appears above the OK button when appropriate as described in Chapters 7 and

223 parallel pop-up menu field pop-up menu display text pop-up menu History pop-up menu pericope title list scroll bar for pericope title list checkboxes for tie scrolling and add text argument entry box selected title close pane button new pane button passage pop-up menu font size buttons scroll bar for text panes panes with parallel passages The parallel pop-up menu shows the current parallel and allows you to select from any parallel available to Accordance. The criteria you enter into the entry box are matched against the contents of the parallel. Note: When the parallel pop-up menu is changed to another parallel, the titles and passages from the previous parallel are removed. You can delete a parallel or change the order of the parallels in this pop-up menu in the Arrange Modules window (Edit menu) described in Chapter 5. The field pop-up menu is similar to the Tools window pop-up menu of the same name. The fields which you can search in a parallel are the Title Number, Title, and References. When you search the parallel, your search entry is applied to the current field. For example, if your search entry is Job, you can either search for Titles including the word Job, or search the References for the book Job. The display text pop-up menu sets the text version in which all the parallel passages in this window are displayed. You can choose from any text available to Accordance. Consulting Study Aids 16-3

224 16 Parallels Each pane uses the same text except in the case of the Old Testament Quotes in the New Testament parallel. When you select this parallel, a second text pop-up menu appears to the right of the first, labeled NT Text. This sets the text of the New Testament passages, while the first pop-up sets the text of the Old Testament passages. (You may need to make the window wider and move the vertical section divider in order to view the NT text pop-up menu.) The Tie Scrolling and Add Text checkboxes are described below. The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window. The argument entry box is similar to that of the Search window. The Search and contextual menus offer the usual options. All the symbols can be used in the Parallel window, but only the simple connecting commands <AND>, <OR>, <NOT>, and <XOR>, and the [LINK] command are valid in this window. Word proximity and phrase searches are not supported, since they are rarely needed in these modules. Entering an asterisk (*) will display all the pericope titles. The Fields In the Title Number and Title fields, each word entered is checked for validity against the list of words in the field, and if the word is not found, the Select words dialog box appears. (See Chapter 7-Doing Searches.) Note: The Title numbers are treated as words. The connecting commands are therefore not helpful in this field, but the wild card symbols are more useful. For example the entry 2?(0-5) finds the Title numbers The References field lets you enter references just like the Verse reference mode of the Search window described in Chapter 7. In addition you can use the simple connecting commands to define the relationships between passages in a set. For example, Ps. <AND> Is. in the References field finds six sets of parallel passages which have verses from both the books of Psalms and Isaiah. 16-4

225 The LINK Command You can use the [LINK] command to link the search arguments of two Parallel windows. Accordance only allows a link when the windows are set to the same field. Therefore, you can use [LINK] to search two parallels for the same word or verse reference, or two windows with the same parallel but displaying the results in different versions. For example, here are the results of a search for parallel passages to Exodus 20 within the Old and New Testaments: The Pericope Title List The pericope title list appears in the top right corner of the Parallel window. This list shows the titles of the pericopes found by the current search criteria. One title is always selected with a colored background. When you click once to select another title, the contents of the text panes update to show the new pericope. The scroll bar for the pericope title list lets you scroll up and down the list. The mouse scroll wheel scrolls the list or the selected pane, depending on the postion of the cursor. Pressing the up and down arrow keys moves the selection one title at a time. The order of the titles is determined by the canonical order of the first passage for each pericope. Therefore if you select parallels to Isaiah, the first pericope is a parallel to Exodus, followed by a parallel to Deuteronomy, irrespective of the order within Isaiah. Consulting Study Aids 16-5

226 16 Parallels Adjusting the Window Size You can enlarge the entire window by dragging the grow box at the bottom right of the window. You can adjust the size of the pericope title list by dragging the two heavy section dividers below and to the right of the entry section. Over an adjustable line the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow. The Parallel Text Panes 16-6 The parallel text panes are somewhat different from the text panes in the Search window. Each pane displays a different passage from the selected pericope. All the panes in a row use the text version (or versions) set in the display text pop-up menus. The number of panes present when you open the window depends on the default settings as described later in this chapter. The selected pane is indicated by a solid blue line around the text. To select another pane click once on that pane. The passage pop-up menus display the reference for the first verse in each passage. The menu lets you select a different passage from the pericope to display in that pane. The menu for each pane retains its setting when you view a new pericope. For example, if you set the first pane to display the third passage in the list of references, it will continue to display the third passage, if present, when you select another pericope. Some pericopes have only two passages, some have many more. This illustration shows the passages in the second pericope found for Exodus 20. The order of the passages in the menu is generally the canonical order of the books in English, except in the Old Testament parallel. In the Gospels parallel all passages are included, so verses which are unique to one gospel are present in the module but have no parallels.

227 Adding a Text Pane The new pane button appears to the upper right of the text panes whenever there are more passages in the pericope than there are text panes in the window. Clicking the new pane button adds another pane to the window, unless the resulting panes would be too narrow. You can add as many text panes as the width of the window will allow. To add another pane click the new pane button if present. The pane will display the next passage from the pericope. To close the selected pane, select Close Pane (File menu or -Y). Scrolling In other windows with parallel panes, the scrolling of all the panes is synchronized, and it can only be suspended temporarily. In the Parallel window the Tie Scrolling checkbox determines whether or not the panes scroll together, since the passages are parallel by topic but not by verse. The default setting in Preferences is that the box is not checked (see below). When the Tie Scrolling box is checked, the scrolling of the panes is synchronized so that each pane moves the same number of verses at a time. When the box is unchecked, only the selected pane scrolls. To scroll another pane, first click in it to select it. Holding down the control key or the right mouse button while scrolling temporarily reverses the current setting of the checkbox. Thus, if the box is checked, control-scrolling is not synchronized, and if the box is unchecked, control-scrolling is synchronized. There are no text access buttons or reference box at the bottom of the window. The Text in Each Pane The text in each pane is just like the Bible text in a Search or Text window. It can be selected for copying or for any of the Amplify features described in Chapter 11. Bookmarks and user notes can also be added. The font size buttons let you quickly change the display size in each pane. If there are two rows, both panes in a column are adjusted together. Pressing the option key while adjusting the font size changes it in all the panes. (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.) They are hidden if the pane width is too narrow. You can customize how the text is displayed in each pane, and set the default display format for new panes with that text, by selecting Set Text Pane Display (Display, contextual menu, or -T). This is identical to setting the text pane display for a Search window which is covered in full in Chapter 6. Consulting Study Aids 16-7

228 16 Parallels Adding Another Translation The Add Text checkbox adds a horizontal pane to each text pane, and a second display text pop-up menu which applies to the lower set of panes. This lets you view the same verses in another version. If the OT in NT parallel is selected, a fourth text pop-up menu appears below the NT Text, to allow an alternative version for the New Testament passages. General Window Features 16-8 The window can be printed with all the panes in columns or interleaved, depending on the current Print Settings (File menu or option- -P). Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the Parallel window. This includes saving and printing, duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the Parallel windows with all other open windows. However, you cannot tie the scrolling of the Parallel window to another window. When you open a new Parallel window, the title shows the name of the parallel, such as Old Testament. The name of the window updates whenever you change the parallel you are displaying in that window. However, if you change the name of the Parallel window by selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N), the new name will no longer update when you change parallels. Setting Defaults for Parallel Windows To set the defaults for a new Parallel window when opened from the New submenu (File menu) or the Resource palette, select Parallel window from list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,).

229 Note: There is an important difference between the function of this page and the other window default pages in the Preferences dialog box. For the Parallel windows only, you can separately set the defaults for each parallel available to Accordance. Most of these settings will apply however the parallel is opened, whether from the Resource palette or Amplify menu, or from the File menu. The Parallel pop-up menu sets which parallel will be opened when you choose Parallel from the New submenu (File menu), and determines to which parallel the settings below will apply. The Field pop-up menu sets which field will be searched (except when the window is opened by amplifying from a selection). The Text pop-up menus set the Bible text to be displayed (the NT text item is dimmed unless you select the OT in the NT parallel). The Number of panes box lets you enter the number of text panes in the window. The Tie scrolling checkbox links the scrolling of all the panes. To set the defaults for each parallel, first select the parallel in the Parallel pop-up menu, then set its display in the other dialog items. Then select another parallel and set its display likewise. When you have set the display for each parallel, set the Parallel pop-up menu to the parallel you want in a new window, and click OK. The different settings for each parallel will be used any time you open it. Consulting Study Aids 16-9

230 16 Parallels Amplifying to a Parallel Each parallel module that is added appears on the Parallel pop-up menu on the Resource palette. After two or more parallels are installed, another item appears at the bottom of the pop-up menu allowing you to select All Parallel. The items in the Parallels submenu of the Amplify menu match the items in the pop-up menu. (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.) To use a parallel as an Amplify feature, select some text or leave the cursor flashing in a Bible text pane (text or reference gives the same result), and select the parallel from the Resource palette or Amplify menu. The Look Up submenu of the right or control-click contextual menu lets you quickly amplify to the top (or last selected) parallel on your list. When a parallel window is opened as an Amplify feature, the parallel pop-up menu is always set to the parallel you have selected. The field pop-up menu is set to References. The display text pop-up menu, the Tie scrolling checkbox, and number of panes are based on the default settings. The argument entry box contains the references of the verses you selected. A dialog box informs you if none of the selected verses is found in the parallel. When opened by amplifying, Parallel windows display the green recycle symbol above the OK button. The window will be reused automatically if the same parallel is selected again. (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.) The example shows a search for Jerusalem in the KJV text, followed by an amplify to the Old Testament parallel for 2Sam. 5:

231 17 Color Highlighting Chapter Contents: Highlight Styles Deleting a Style The Highlight Palette Adding Highlights to Words and Verses Multiple Highlight Files Searching for Styles

232 17 Color Highlighting Color highlighting lets you mark the background of words or verses in a variety of patterns and colors, and store the marks for future reference. This allows you to mark texts and tools in many ways, such as to indicate themes, or grammatical uses. Highlighting can be applied and viewed in any pane with text from the Bible or another corpus, as well as to tools. When applied to a verse, the highlight style can be viewed in any translation. The individual word highlighting is specific to the text or version or the tool. Both kinds of marking are saved and can be recalled at any time. You can also search for the specific highlight styles in any module. Highlight Styles 17-2 Accordance lets you define the styles that you will use to highlight the text, by setting the color, intensity, shape, and pattern. The number of possible combinations is almost unlimited. Each style can be given a name indicating its meaning. Multiple files can be created to store different sets of highlight styles and different highlight markups. The Define Highlight Styles Dialog Box Before you can use the highlight feature you must create some styles, or just use the default Important style. Select Define Highlight Styles (Display menu or -E) to open the Define Highlight Styles dialog box. This dialog box is similar to the Define Ranges dialog box described in Chapter 7, and others which follow the same design. The Highlight File pop-up menu lets you select the file of highlights, or create a new one. A default style appears in the scrolling list on the upper left of the dialog box. The details of the currently selected style appear in the pop-up menus in the Style box below. The New button adds [New style name] to the list, below the selected name. Enter a name for the style in place of [New style name]. The name should reflect the meaning that this style will have for you. Clicking on the New, Up, Down, or the OK button, or on another name in the list, adds the new style to the scrolling list of styles.

233 The Up and Down buttons move the selected style name up and down the list. The styles will appear on the Highlight palette in the order that they appear on this list. Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without saving ANY changes to the groups. Clicking OK closes the window and saves ALL changes. To define the characteristics of the new style, set each of the four pop-up menus in the dialog box. The Color pop-up menu lets you choose from the standard range of colors. The Intensity pop-up menu offers a range of color density from Normal to Very Light. In general, the higher intensities are best applied to thin lines, and the lower intensities work best with thick lines. The Shape pop-up menu lets you select the shape of the line that is drawn through the text. The first three shapes are the full width of the text and either solid, or hollow with a thick or thin border that draws a box around the selection. The other shapes are varieties of strike-through lines of different widths and offsets, in the middle, above or below the text. the white box indicates where the line will be drawn relative to the text. The Pattern pop-up menu offers a solid line and a series of horizontal patterns. When applied to a thin line the patterns create a dotted line. With a thick line they appear as stripes. The Sample Text item demonstrates how the highlighting will look. Hints: If you highlight with a full width solid line you will be unable to see a selection in the highlighted text, even with a very light density. Any other combination of shape and pattern allows you to see your selections with the highlight. If you highlight with the thickest strike-through you will be able to see your selections, but continuously highlighted text will have horizontal white lines between the lines. Use a fine horizontal pattern with the full width solid shape to see your selections within the highlighting, but with an appearance of solid color. The various offsets of the lines allow you to apply overlapping underline styles. Doing Your Own Thing 17-3

234 17 Color Highlighting Deleting a Style Clicking the Delete button removes the currently selected style. A dialog box will warn you that if the style is used by any module, all text highlighting in that style will also be deleted. Click Cancel to preserve the style and its highlighting. The style is not actually deleted until you also click OK in the Define Highlight Styles dialog box. The Highlight Palette This palette displays the highlight styles which you have defined so that you can apply them to selected text. Open the palette by selecting Highlight Palette (Window menu). A check ( ) indicates that the palette is open. Like the other floating windows, this palette remains on screen floating above all Accordance windows, until you close it. The pop-up menu lets you select a different set of Highlights. The rest of the palette shows the name of each style highlighted in its own style. The gray square at the lower right lets you resize the palette to show the styles in as many vertical columns as you choose. The first styles on the list are always shown, but if the palette is too small to show all the styles, the last ones will be hidden. The Clear button removes the styles from your selection in the text. Adding Highlights to Words and Verses Highlighting Words Simply select the words (or parts of words) you want to highlight and click on the style in the Highlight palette, or select the name of the style from the Highlight submenu of the contextual menu. The chosen style appears in your selection and in any other text panes displaying the same version and verse. To highlight another selection with the style you last used, press

235 Styles can be overlapped, but solid colors will hide the highlighting that was applied behind them. To remove a highlight, click any part of the highlighted area and click the Clear button, or Clear Highlights from the contextual menu. The entire area of highlighting is removed. The highlighting is automatically saved and recalled whenever that module is opened. Highlighting Hits When you have hit words showing in the text pane, pressing the shift key while clicking on a style will highlight every hit word in the text. A warning dialog allows you to cancel this step. You can also select the name of the style from the Highlight Hits submenu of the contextual menu. Hint: This feature allows you to highlight an entire text with the result of any search: a grammatical tag, a key number, rare words, etc. To remove the highlighting from all current hits, press the shift key and click the Clear button. Doing Your Own Thing 17-5

236 17 Color Highlighting Highlighting Tools Word highlighting can be applied to tools (but not User Tools) in the same way as to Bible text. However, whenever the tool is updated, the highlighting may be displaced and appear on different words. It is therefore probably unwise to invest a lot of effort in highlighting any tool module. Highlighting Verses To highlight an entire verse, click in the verse reference and then select a style in the Highlight palette or contextual menu. The highlighting now applies to the entire verse, and to the same verse in any translation or version. The verse highlighting includes the entire text of the verse, as well as the reference, unless there is word highlighting in that verse. In that case, the verse highlighting appears only in the reference. If you add word highlighting to a highlighted verse, the verse highlighting disappears from the text of the verse. To remove a verse highlight, click anywhere in the verse reference and click the Clear button, or select Clear Highlight from the contextual menu. Verse highlighting applies only to texts, not to tools. The verse highlighting is automatically saved and recalled for any Bible text, or text of the same corpus. Mixed Selections If you select both the reference and some of the text in a single verse, and select a style, you will get a dialog box telling you that you cannot highlight anything in a mixed selection. However, if you select text and references from more than one verse, the highlighting is applied to all the verses included in the selection. If you select text and references from more than one highlighted verse and click Clear, both word and verse highlighting is removed from the selected verses. Displaying the Highlighting The Set Text Pane Display (Display or contextual menu or -T) lets you turn on and off both the verse and word highlighting for the selected text pane, or as a default for that version. The Set Tool Display dialog box has a similar option to Hide word highlighting. In the Text and Tool Display pages of the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) you can set the same options as defaults for all your texts and tools. Both the verse and word highlighting turn on automatically if you add any highlighting to a word or verse, or if you search for a highlighting style. 17-6

237 Exporting the Highlighting The visible highlighting will automatically be printed with the text. Use the Set Text Pane Display to hide the highlighting if you do not wish to print it. The highlights cannot be exported from Accordance, except by taking a snapshot of the window (screenshot) which creates a PICT file. The Keyboard shortcuts page in Mac Help: Shortcuts and tips explains how to do this using a combination of keystrokes. The picture of the window can then be incorporated in another document. Your highlight files can be shared with other Accordance users as explained below. Multiple Highlight Files Accordance allows you to create multiple sets of highlighting which are stored in separate Highlight files. In Mac OS X these files are in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/Highlights. In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/modules/shared Highlights. Each file has its own set of defined styles, and its own set of words and verses to which a style has been applied. Creating and Adding Files To create a new file, select New Highlight File from the pop-up menu in either the Highlight palette or the Define Highlight Styles dialog box. Enter a name for the new file in the dialog box and press OK. A new blank file is created in the correct folder. If you place a Highlight file from another user or another computer in this folder, or if you duplicate or rename a file in the folder, the new file will automatically appear on the list when you launch Accordance. Hint: This feature lets you save different sets of highlights, and to share highlights with other users. Note: Highlight files for version 7+ have a.hlt suffix. They are not compatible with earlier versions of Accordance. However, you can rename a Highlight Settings file from an earlier version, and add the suffix, and Accordance will load it correctly. When you load a Highlight file from another source, any highlighting which has been applied to texts or tools will be available to your copy of Accordance. Verse highlighting will appear on all Bibles (or texts of the same corpus), but word highlighting on texts or tools will only appear on the module of the same name. Doing Your Own Thing 17-7

238 17 Color Highlighting Switching Between Highlight Files Changing the file on the pop-up menu in the Define Highlight Styles dialog box changes the list of styles in the dialog box. If you make any changes to the styles and then switch to another file you will be asked whether you want to save your changes. When you click OK the file currently selected will appear on the Highlight palette. You can also change the file on the pop-up menu directly in the Highlight palette. This changes both the styles displayed on the palette, and the styles which appear on the texts and tools. Searching for Styles The [STYLE] command allows you to search for the words or verses you have highlighted in a specific style. Selecting Style from the Enter Command submenu (Search or contextual menu or shift- -S) places [STYLE?] in the argument entry box with the question mark selected. Enter the first letters of the style you want to find, or an asterisk (*) to find all the styles. Add any other search criteria and select the range for your search. All verses (paragraphs in tools) highlighted with this style, or with highlighted words in this style, are found, but the search highlighting applies only to any words in the search argument. This example shows a search for the Important style with the word earth in the same verse, in the book of Genesis. 17-8

239 18 Reference Lists Chapter Contents: Opening a Reference List Window The Reference List Window Adding and Deleting Verses Searching the Contents

240 18 Reference Lists The Reference List window lets you accumulate verses of interest as you come across them. The list of verses can be viewed in any version, amplified, saved, or printed just like the results in a Search window. You can also search the set of verses in the list using the [CONTENTS] command in the Search window as described below. This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window and the text panes which are introduced in Chapter 4 and described in detail in Chapters 6 and 7. If you are not familiar with the Search window, please review Chapter 4 first. Opening a Reference List Window Select Reference List from the New submenu (File menu) to open a new Reference List window. To open a previously saved Reference List window, select Open (File menu or -O) and choose the window name from the list in the dialog box. You can also open a new Reference List window by selecting or marking text in a text pane, and choosing New Reference List Window from the submenu of either the Add Selection To or the Add Marked Verses To items (Selection or contextual menu). Any open Reference List windows will also appear in this submenu. The Reference List Window The Reference List window consists of an upper description box and the text panes below. The description box is identical to the description box for the Construct window which is described in Chapter 10. It allows you to enter notes for future reference about the verses which you collect in the window. The Text palette (and Display menu) can be used to set the font and styles of your comments. The Top Bar The Number of Verses The large numerals 45 in the top left of the middle bar indicate the total number of verses in the list. 18-2

241 Verse 1 of 41 indicates the number of the verse currently at the top of the pane, and the number of verses showing in the window. Some verses are present in the list but not displayed because they are not included in the text in the Text order pop-up menu. Compare Texts The function of this checkbox is identical to that described in Chapter 6-Viewing the Text. It highlights differences between the first two texts of each language. The Text Order Pop-up Menu The Text order pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book and verse order of your verses. For example, if you select JPS, the books will appear in the order of the Hebrew Bible, and no verses for the New Testament will be displayed. The Text Panes The text panes are identical to the Search window text panes described in Chapter 6. You can add as many panes as the width of the window allows, and set the text in each pane in its display text pop-up menu. You can also add Tool panes and User Notes panes as described in Chapters 14 and 19. The font size buttons, scroll bar, text access buttons, Prior and Next buttons, and reference box function in the same way as in the Search window. The text in each pane is just like the Bible text in a Search or Text window. It can be selected for copying or for any of the Amplify features described in Chapter 12. Bookmarks and user notes can also be added. (See Chapter 6-Viewing the Text.) You can customize how the text is displayed in each pane by selecting Set Text Pane Display (Display or contextual menu or -T). Doing Your Own Thing 18-3

242 18 Reference Lists General Window Features Most of the window features described in Chapter 18 also apply to the Reference List window. This includes duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the windows. You can also tie the scrolling of the Reference List window to another window indexed by verse references, such as a Search, User Notes, Text window, or a Tools window indexed by reference, such as a commentary. When you open a new Reference List window, it is given a default name such as Reference List. You can set a new window name by selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N). Saving and Printing You can save and print a Reference List window as described in Chapter 23. Note: Unlike the user notes and tools which are saved as Accordance modules, the reference list is only saved as a window. You must save the window if you wish to keep and reopen the list in Accordance. Hint: Using the Reference List window is a convenient way to collect non-adjacent verses from a Search window for printing or export as a text file. Adding and Deleting Verses There are two ways to add verses to your reference list. You can either select verses in a Bible text pane, and select the name of the reference list from the Add Selection To submenu (Selection or contextual menu). Alternately, you can bookmark verses in a Bible text pane, and select the name of the reference list from the Add Marked Verses To submenu (Selection menu). Both of these submenus show the names of any open Reference List windows as well as the item New Reference List Window. To delete verses from your reference list, either select or mark the verses you wish to delete, and select Delete Selected Verses or Delete Marked Verses (Selection menu). Searching the Contents Although you cannot directly search in the Reference List window, you can search its contents by using the [CONTENTS] command in a Search window as described in Chapter 6. You can add other commands, or a link to a Construct window. For example, the search argument: [CONTENTS Reference List] <NOT> Isaac finds the verses on the list that do not contain Isaac, and the entry [CONTENTS Reference List] <AND> [LINK Simple Construct] finds all the verses in the reference list containing the search defined in the Construct window. Hint: This is a convenient way to create and search a set of verses. 18-4

243 User Notes 19 Chapter Contents: Creating a User Notes File The Edit Window The User Notes Window The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window Setting Defaults for User Notes Amplifying to User Notes Duplicating or Renaming User Notes Merging User Notes Files

244 19 User Notes Accordance lets you create your own user notes files which are linked to the verse references of any version you view. You can use any font and style in the notes including Greek and Hebrew, and add hypertextable Scripture references. The notes file forms an Accordance module which can be opened, searched, and accessed from the Resource palette (or Amplify or contextual menu) like any other Accordance module, but which can also be edited by the user. This chapter assumes that you already know how to use the Search window which is introduced in Chapter 4 and covered in detail in Chapters 6-7. If you are not familiar with the Search window, please review chapter 4 first. The word processing capabilities are described in Chapter 24-Working with Windows. Creating a User Notes File There are various ways in which you can create a new user notes file: Select New User Notes from the User Files submenu (File menu), or New Notes File from the My Notes pop-up menu in the Resource palette. If you have no user notes already saved, you can also create a new file if you select Edit User Note (Selection or contextual menu, or -U) A warning appears to remind you that this will create a new user notes file. The intention of this warning is to remind you that you do NOT need to go through this procedure just to add or save individual notes to a notes file you have already created. You must create at least one user notes file before you can add notes to a verse as shown below. You may create or install as many files as you wish. If you decide not to save a new set of notes, click Cancel. If you click OK, the standard Macintosh dialog box lets you save the notes with any name. In Mac OS X these files are in your user / Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes. In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/ Modules/Shared User Notes. 19-2

245 A further dialog reminds you that you are creating a notes file for the text in the front window. Notes on a Bible text can be used with any Bible, but if the text is from a non-biblical corpus the notes will apply only to texts of that corpus. You can add a previously created notes file to the pop-up menus by selecting Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option -A), and clicking the Add Module button, or by double-clicking on the icon. This may be necessary if the user notes were removed in the Arrange Modules window, were not found by Accordance, or were transferred from another computer. Note: If you upgrade from an earlier version of Accordance, all your user notes files will be moved to the Accordance folder/modules/shared User Notes folder. In Mac OS X the files are then copied to your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes. These latter files are the ones that Accordance will access and update when you edit them. The Edit Window User notes are added or edited in the Edit window, which can be opened either from a Bible text pane or from a User Notes window. The window displays the contents of the note on a single verse. Creating a New Note There are three ways to add a new note to a verse: 1. A new Edit window for a new verse can be opened from a Bible text pane by clicking in the verse for which you want to make a note, then selecting Edit User Note (Selection or contextual menu, or -U). If you have saved or installed only one notes file, or if one User Notes window is already open, the Edit window appears directly. If you have more than one notes file available or open, a dialog box opens allowing you to choose which file you want to edit. Note: By default this dialog box opens only once in a session, so that it automatically adds new notes to the same file. You can change this setting in the User Notes page of the Preferences dialog, as described later in this chapter. Doing your own Thing 19-3

246 User Notes If you have not saved any user notes files, the Save dialog box will let you create a new file, as described above. If your selection includes more than one verse, the window opens for the first verse. If an Edit window is already open for this set of notes, it will change to display the new note. 2. A new Edit window will also open if you amplify to a notes file in which there is currently no note saved for your selected verse or verses. Amplifying to user notes is described later in this chapter. 3. To add a note to the next verse: press option as you click the up or down access button at the bottom left of the Edit window. This saves the current note and adds a note to the previous or next verse, which makes it easy to annotate a series of verses. If you then enter no text and go on to the next verse, the empty note is not saved. The new Edit window opens with the verse reference in the window, and the cursor flashing on the line below. This lets you quickly add a note under the verse reference. The Edit window always opens in a detached window. You can resize and place it wherever it is convenient to you, and Accordance will recall its size and position when it is reopened for any user notes file. Note: By default only one Edit window can be open for each notes file. You can change this setting in the User Notes page of the Preferences, as described below. Reopening the Edit Window The text in the User Notes window cannot be edited directly. User notes can only be added or edited in the Edit window. The Edit window can be reopened either from a Bible text pane or from a User Notes window or pane. To reopen an Edit window for a note you have already saved, click in the verse in the Bible text, or in the text of the note itself, and select Edit User Note (Selection or contextual menu, or -U). Accordance will also automatically open the Edit window if you attempt to type in the User Notes window or User Notes pane. The selection point will be placed correctly so that you can continue to type modifications or additions to the note. The Title of the Window The title of the Edit window (e.g My Notes (Gen. 1:9) Edit) shows the verse reference to which the note belong, and the title of the notes file. Entering Text You can enter text in the Edit window by typing or by copying and pasting. The Text palette (and contextual and Display menu) enable you to set the font, size, style and color of the notes. (See Chapter 22-Working with Windows.)

247 The Font, Size, and Color submenus allow you to select from any font available on your system along with a range of font sizes and colors. The check mark indicates the current selection. The Style submenu and buttons let you select from the standard styles, and support the standard keyboard shortcuts. The Superscript/Subscript options raise or lower the selection relative to the baseline of the text. The Style only and Paste Style items in the Copy as submenu (Edit or contextual menu, or -[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of any selected text, and paste these characteristics onto the selection in the Edit window. Scripture Links The Scripture Link button sets the color and style of the selection to blue underline so that it forms a hypertextable link in the notes. Clicking the button again resets the style to plain black. Enter a verse reference or string of references using standard Accordance notation, select the reference so that the Scripture Link button becomes active, and click it. You can also select Add Scripture Link from the contextual menu or press - L to create the link. You can add links to a non-biblical corpus in the same way. A string of references appears as a single link in the Notes, unless the book name is added to each reference, and it is linked separately. There is no validation of the reference until you click on the link in the User Notes window, as described below. For new users, the reference at the top of the Edit window is automatically set to blue underline. You can change this setting as described below. Both the Scripture reference that appears when you open a new Edit window, and any additional references you define, are saved as part of the Content of the notes. Find and Replace Selecting Find/Replace (Search or contextual menu or -F) opens a dialog box that lets you find a word or phrase and replace it within the text showing in the Edit window The dialog box is similar to those used in other applications. You enter or paste the text you wish to find on the left, and the text to replace it on the right (leave it blank to delete the found text). Use the checkboxes to limit the find to whole words and Latin characters and make it case sensitive. The buttons perform these actions: Find highlights the next occurrence. Doing your own Thing 19-5

248 19 User Notes Replace, Find replaces the highlighted text and finds the next occurrence. Replace replaces the highlighted text. Replace All replaces every occurrence throughout the text displayed in the current Edit window. The Status section reminds you of the document being searched. To undo the replace, click on the Edit window and select Undo (Edit menu or -Z). The dialog box remains open for repeated use until you close it. Click the access buttons in the Edit window to go to the next section of the module and repeat the Find/Replace as necessary. Spell Checking Selecting Spelling (Search or contextual menu or -:) opens a dialog box that lets you correct any mispelled words within the text in the Edit window. This feature is only available in Mac OS 10.4 and above. The dialog box is similar to those used in other applications for spell checking. It finds the first unknown word in the English text (Latin characters) showing in the Edit window, and offers a selection of possible replacements. The word found is highlighted in the text entry box, and the suggested replacements appear in the scrolling box above. A single click on a suggested spelling places the new word in the text box. A double-click on a word in the list replaces the word in the text of the Edit window and moves on to the next word. The buttons perform these actions: Guess is active after editing the selected word, and produces a new list of suggestions. Find Next finds the next unknown word in the text. Skip ignores the spelling of this word, during the current session only. Correct All corrects every occurrence in the text in the current Edit window. Correct replaces the selected word in the text with the word in the text entry box text, and moves on to the next misspelled word. Learn permanently saves the selected word as a correct new word. The Status section reminds you of the document being searched, and when the search is complete. To undo the replace, click on the Edit window and select Undo (Edit menu or -Z). The dialog box remains open for repeated use until you close it. Click the access buttons in the Edit window to go to the next section of the module and repeat the spell check as necessary. 19-6

249 Saving Changes Selecting Save (Edit menu or -S), or clicking the Update button adds any changes you have made to your notes file without closing the Edit window. Any open User Notes windows are updated and the present search is repeated. If you close the window without updating, you will be asked whether or not you want to update the notes. The Access Buttons The access buttons at the lower left (or pressing command and the up and down arrow keys) advance the text to the next or prior saved user note. Only one note is displayed at a time. When you click the up or down access buttons, the current user note is updated with any changes you have made, and the next note is displayed. If that note is already open in another Edit window, Accordance will ask your permission to update and close the other window. Pressing option as you click the up or down access button (or press the keys) creates a note for the next verse, if there is no note on that verse in this notes file. Edit Window Defaults You can set the default font and styles for both the reference and the rest of the notes in the Edit Windows page of the Preferences dialog, as described later in this chapter. You may prefer to do this before you add any notes. The new defaults will be used whenever you open an Edit window for a new note. The Verse Reference When you open the Edit window for a new verse, the verse reference appears in the window, and the cursor is flashing on the line below. This convenient feature lets you quickly add a note under the verse reference. However, when you update the note, the verse reference is saved as part of the contents of your notes. Note that this is NOT the reference which indexes the note and links it to the Bible text. Therefore you can edit or delete this verse reference as you desire. In this example, the reference for Gen. 1:3 has been expanded to cover verses 3-5, and the references for verses 4-5 have been deleted. This does not affect searching in the Reference field, as the search still found and bookmarked the note which refers to Gen. 1:4. Doing your own Thing 19-7

250 19 User Notes The Edit window is always linked to the specific verse reference and user notes file displayed in the title. To add or edit a note for another verse, you can use the access buttons to page to that verse, or find the verse in the text of the bible or your notes, and select Edit User Note (Selection menu or -U). The Red Dot in the Bible Text Pane A red dot appears in the margin of a verse in any selected Bible text pane to indicate that a note has been added. Double-clicking on the red dot opens all user notes for that verse. Deleting a Note To delete an entire user note, select and delete all its contents including the reference in the Edit window. When you update the notes, the red dot for that verse will disappear from the text pane margin. If you delete an entire note, and the search criteria of an open User Notes window is the reference of the deleted note, you will get a message that the note is not found The User Notes Window A demonstration user notes file titled Sample notes can be found in the Accordance folder or the Demo files folder on the CD-ROM, and can be used to try out this window. To open a User Notes window, select the name of the file from the My Notes pop-up menu in the Resource palette, or open it from the New submenu (File menu) or the Finder like any other module. The User Notes window is similar to the Search window, and consists of an entry section in the upper part and a lower text pane. The Entry Section The entry section includes pop-up menus for the user notes, the field, and the History, as well as the argument entry box and OK button. The recycle and tie symbols appear above the OK button when appropriate, as described in Chapters 7 and 11. The user notes pop-up menu shows the current notes file and allows you to select from any notes file saved or installed on Accordance. Any criteria you enter into the entry box are matched against the contents of the notes file. 19-8

251 You can remove a notes file or change the order of the user notes in this pop-up menu in the Arrange Modules window (Edit menu) described in Chapter 7. Note: If you move or change the name of a user notes file in the Finder, when you launch Accordance it will ask where the file is. If you click Cancel in this dialog box, Accordance will remove the file from the menus. To see the notes in the menus again, you will need to open or add them. The field pop-up menu is similar to the Tools window popup menu of the same name. The fields which you can search in user notes are the Reference and Content. When you search the user notes, your search entry is applied to the current field. For example, if your search entry is Job, you can either search the Content for notes including the word job or Job, or search the Reference for the book Job. The Reference field contains the actual verse references to which the notes are attached. The Content includes all the visible text in the text pane including any verse references. The History pop-up menu is the same as the Search window. The argument entry box is similar to that of the Search window. However, none of the commands such as <AND>, <OR> etc., nor the wild-cards, are accepted in this window. Accordance performs only a simple character search on the Content, so that it searches only for the exact characters entered in the argument entry box. If you paste Greek or Hebrew words into the entry box, they will appear in English characters. Performing a search with these characters will find the same word in the notes including any accents, vowel points, and ending forms. Thus if you pasted Greek or Hebrew words from the Bible text into your notes, you will find them only if the accents, vowel points, or ending forms are also used in the search, but if you have unaccented words in your notes, you must search with unaccented characters. The Reference field lets you enter verse references in the same manner as the Verse reference searches described in Chapter 7. Entering an asterisk (*) will display the entire notes file. No hits are highlighted when you search this field, but any notes found for the references are displayed. Doing your own Thing 19-9

252 19 User Notes The Text Pane The text pane is similar to the Tools window in that you cannot add other text panes in parallel. You can, however, tie two User Notes windows together to view their contents in parallel. There is no text pop-up menu since the pane displays the same user notes that you are searching. The number of hits, the current and total number of verses, and the scroll bar function in the same way as the Search window. The Show all text check box is the same as that used in the Text window. When the Show all text box is not checked, only the verses containing hits are shown in the text pane. If you check the box, the entire text of the notes is displayed, with a bookmark at the beginning of each hit verse. The window displays the first bookmark at the top of the pane. The Notes order pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book and verse order of your notes. For example, if you select a Hebrew Bible, such as BHS- W4, the books will appear in the order of the Hebrew Bible, and no notes for the New Testament will be displayed. When you open a new User Notes window from the File menu, the default setting is determined in the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,). However, whenever you open the Edit or User Notes windows from another window, the Notes order pop-up menu is set to the same text as the pop-up menu which controls the verse order in that window. All text in blue underline style is a Scripture hypertext link which works like Scripture references in tools. The Instant Details box displays the first verse in the reference, from the text currently showing in the Notes order pop-up menu. Clicking on the link opens a text window displaying all the verses in the same text (unless a Text window is already open). Since the link is not validated when the note is saved (unlike user tools), an error message appears if Accordance cannot find the reference in the current text or in an open Text window. If there is a mistake in the reference, you can return to the Edit window to correct it. You can create hypertext links to another corpus, such as to Qumran texts in notes on the Bible. In order to see the reference, open a Text window and set the Notes order pop-up menu to the desired text, then click the reference. The text access buttons and the reference box are similar to those of the Search window as described in Chapter 6. The Set windowname Display item is dimmed in the Display menu, since you cannot vary the display of the notes in this window. In the Edit window you can, use the Display menu or Text palette to change the font, size, style and color of the notes. You can also set default styles for the user notes in the Edit Windows page of the Preferences dialog, as described below

253 General Window Features Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the User Notes window. This includes duplicating a window, and the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the User Notes windows with all other open windows. You can also tie the scrolling of the User Notes window to another window indexed by verse references, such as a Search, Reference list, Text window, or a Tools window indexed by reference, such as a commentary. You can open a notes file from the Finder by double-clicking on its file icon, or by selecting it when you choose Open (File menu or -O). In either case the notes open with the field pop-up menu set to Reference, the Notes order pop-up menu set to the default text, an asterisk in the argument entry box, and all the notes appearing in the window. When you open a new User Notes window, it is given the name of the notes file, such as Own Notes. The name of the window updates whenever you change the notes file you are displaying in that window. However, if you change the name of the User Notes window by selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N), the new name will no longer update when you change user notes files. You can save and print User Notes windows as described in Chapter 23. Note: When you close a User Notes window you will be asked if you want to save the window. The contents of any new notes have already been saved when you added them to the notes. Therefore there is no need to save the window to preserve the notes. Saving the window only saves the current set-up of the window itself. The User Notes Pane in a Bible Text Window Just like the Tool pane described at the end of Chapter 14-Tools, you can add a pane displaying your user notes to a Search, Text or Reference List window. Select the user notes file from the Add pane: My Notes button on the Search window (or Reference List or Text window). The notes open in a lower pane which can be switched to the upper row by clicking the position button beside the pop-up menu. Pressing option while adding the pane adds it directly to the upper row. This pane allows you to see and print your notes in parallel with the Bible text. You can also edit the notes by opening the Edit window directly from the User Notes pane. Note: If the search text is not a Biblical text, such as Qumran, the Add pane: My Notes pop-up menu shows only the notes that belong to the same corpus. Doing your own Thing 19-11

254 19 User Notes Setting Defaults for User Notes User Notes Window Defaults You can set various default items for the User Notes window. To do this, select User Notes Window from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,) The Default settings apply when you choose User Notes Window from the New submenu (File menu). They do not affect the User Notes window when you open it from the Resource palette (or Amplify menu). The Notes pop-up menu determines which notes file will be opened. The Text pop-up menu sets the Bible text used to determine the book and verse order of your notes. The Highlighting section sets the display of hit words, after a search in the User Notes window. The settings apply to all User Notes windows. The style and color pop-up menus control the style and color display of these hit words. These pop-up menus are similar to those in the Text Display dialog box described in Chapter 6. Note: When you search the Reference field of user notes, no hits are highlighted, since only the contents are displayed but not the references by which the notes are indexed. The Edit User Notes section controls the opening of the Edit window. Reopen last Notes file selected in dialog affects the dialog box which opens to allow the selection of the user notes file to be edited, when you have more than one notes file available or open. If the box is checked, the dialog box appears only once in a session, unless the text in the front window is from a different corpus. This enables you to continue working in the same set of notes. If the box is unchecked, the dialog box opens each time. Allow multiple Edit windows opens a new Edit window for each verse in your selection (up to a maximum of 10), unless a window for that verse is already open. If unchecked, only one Edit window is opened for each set of Notes, and it is recycled when you attempt to edit another verse. Any edited notes are saved before its contents are replaced with the next note to be edited. Use default fonts in font menu limits the font menu and submenu to the Accordance fonts plus the two default fonts selected in the Edit Windows page. This avoids scrolling through a long font list and standardizes the appearance of the notes. Edit Window Defaults Selecting Edit windows from the list in the Preferences dialog box lets you set defaults which apply to all new Edit windows you open, for any notes file.

255 These defaults help you set a uniform appearance for your user notes, but they do not change the display of notes which have already been saved. You can also choose the font, size and style as you enter or edit your notes, as described above. The section labeled User Notes Text allows you to set the default font and size for the text of your notes in the second line of a new Edit window. The section labeled User Notes Reference allows you to set the default font, size, color, and style for the verse reference which first appears in a new Edit window. You can choose from any font available on your system, along with a range of sizes and the standard styles and colors. If you select Blue and Underline, the verse references will become hypertextable Scripture links. The word Sample displays the currently selected styles. The User Tool Edit pop-up menu is described in the next chapter on user tools. The Use smart quotation marks checkbox lets you turn off the smart quotes which automatically replace plain quotation marks in the Edit windows of user notes and user tools, and the description boxes of Construct and Verse Reference windows. Amplifying to User Notes Before you create or install a user notes file, the My Notes pop-up menu on the Resource palette shows only the item New Notes File. After two or more notes files are saved, All User Notes and Merge appear as well, allowing you to select all the user notes (and merge two sets of notes). To amplify to a user note, simply select a word or leave the cursor flashing in a Bible verse marked with a red dot, and select the user notes from the Resource palette or Amplify menu. Alternately, you can double-click on the red dot to open all user notes for that verse. When a User Notes window is opened in this way, the user notes pop-up menu is always set to the notes file you have selected. The field pop-up menu is set to Reference. The Notes order pop-up menu is set to the Bible text from which you amplified, and the argument entry box contains the verse references you selected. The window displays the recycle symbol above the OK button. The window will be reused automatically if the same user notes are selected again from the same Bible text. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.) If none of the selected verses is found in the user notes, a new Edit window opens for the first verse or each verse, depending on your Preferences settings. Note: You cannot amplify from a selection in a User Notes window, though you can make Scripture references hypertextable. Doing your own Thing 19-13

256 19 User Notes Duplicating or Renaming User Notes To change the name of a user notes file, you should first use Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) to remove the original name from the pop-up menus. Otherwise, when you launch Accordance it will attempt to find the original file. If you then cancel the Where is? dialog box, the name of the original file will be deleted from the pop-up menus. Then simply edit the file name on the desktop (Finder) in and add it to Accordance. In Mac OS X these file is in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Notes. In Classic OS it is in the Accordance folder/modules/shared User Notes. Similarly, you can duplicate a notes file on the desktop, edit the name and add it to Accordance in the usual way. You can also add notes that you have transferred from another computer. Merging User Notes Files Accordance lets you merge one existing user notes file with another. Select Merge from the My Notes pop-up menu of the Resource palette, or Merge User Notes from the User Files submenu (File menu). The Merge dialog box lets you select the notes file to be merged from the Merge: scrolling list on the left, and the notes file into which it will be merged from the Into: right hand list. The notes of the file you select on the left will be merged with the notes on the right. The combined file will keep the name of the Into: (right hand) file. You can edit this name as described above. If each file has a note on the same verse, the note from the Merge: file appears after the note from the Into: file. The notes file that was merged is deleted from the pop-up menu list, but the file itself is NOT deleted from your hard drive, so you have the choice of deleting it, keeping it, or adding it back to Accordance. Hint: If you are not sure that you want to merge the two files, you may wish first to make a copy of the original Into: notes file by duplicating it on the desktop. Hint: If a notes file seems to be corrupt, you can try merging it into a new blank file. If the resulting notes file would be too large for the available memory to handle (in Classic OS 7-9), the merge is canceled. You can increase the memory allocated to Accordance to overcome this limit

257 User Tools 20 Chapter Contents: The User Tool Window Creating a Blank User Tool Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool The Edit Window Amplifying to User Tools Importing to a User Tool Merging User Tools

258 20 User Tools User tools are modules which the user can both create and edit. This Accordance feature lets you make modules for your personal use. These may be composed as you go along, so that the tool is actually written in Accordance. For example, you can take notes in class and edit them later. Or you can import files which have been created in other software programs. Unlike the user notes, user tools are not directly linked to the Bible text, verse by verse. The user tool functions like a General tool in Accordance. Creating a user tool There are two ways to create a user tool, both of which are described in detail below: 1. You can create a new blank user tool, and then copy and paste text into it, or compose the text directly in the tool. 2. You can also create a new user tool by importing the text from a pre-existing file. Currently Accordance allows you to import plain text files, HTML formatted files, or the files of the Thesaurus Linguae Graecae (TLG). Once created, the user tool can be edited and enhanced with colors and styles, Greek and Hebrew, titles, and hypertextable Scripture links. It contains several fields which can be searched in the same way as regular tools. The titles also appear in the browser. The user tool can be opened from the Resource palette, or File or Amplify menu, like any other Accordance module. The User Tool Window A demonstration user tool titled Sample tool can be found in the Accordance folder or the Demo files folder on the CD-ROM, and can be used to try out this window. To open a User Tool window, select the name of the file from the My Tools pop-up menu in the Resource palette, or open it from the New submenu (File menu) or the Finder like any other module. The User Tool window is almost identical to the Tools window described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window. The field pop-up menu is similar to the Tools window pop-up menu of the same name, but it displays the same items in each user tool. The fields which you can search in user tools are the Titles, Content, Scripture, Greek, Hebrew, and Rosetta (transliteration). A field which is not used in the current tool is dimmed in the pop-up menu. The argument entry box is similar to that of the Tools window, and all the search commands used in other tools can also be used in user tools. Select Enter Words (Search menu or -J) to access the vocabulary list for the current field. 20-2

259 If you select the Greek, Hebrew, or Rosetta fields, your search will be entered in the correct font and direction. The Scripture field lets you enter verse references and connecting commands in the same manner as the Tools window. The browser pane is similar to the Tools window. Spaces may appear where there are blank titles. You can select ranges in the browser by option-clicking on the titles. The Set Tool Display item (Display menu or -T) lets you set the Roman font, base font size and color, hypertext and highlight color and style, and the text for scripture hypertext. This dialog is similar to the one for Tools described in Chapter 14. Most of the window features described in Chapters 23 and 25 apply also to the User Tool window. This includes duplicating a window, the use of the Window menu to tile and stack the User Tool windows with all other open windows, renaming, saving and printing the window. Note: When you close a User Tool window you will be asked if you want to save the window. Any changes you made to the tool in the Edit window have already been saved. Therefore there is no need to save the window unless you want to save the current set-up of the window itself. Creating a Blank User Tool To create a new blank user tool, select New User Tool from the User Files submenu (File menu) or the My Tools button of the Resource palette. The standard Macintosh dialog box lets you save the user tool with any name you choose. In Mac OS X these files are in your user /Documents/Accordance Files/User Tools. In Classic OS they will be in the Accordance folder/modules/shared User Tools. If you do not wish to save a new user tool, click Cancel. A new User Tool window opens with the blank tool. Doing your own Thing 20-3

260 20 User Tools Duplicating or Renaming a User Tool To change the name of a user tool you can simply edit the name on the desktop (Finder) and then add it to Accordance. You can use Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) to remove the former name from the pop-up menus. Similarly, you can duplicate a user tool on the desktop, edit the name and add it to Accordance in the usual way. You can also add tools that you have transferred from another computer. The Edit Window 20-4 Like the user notes, a user tool is composed or edited in the Edit window. You can open the Edit window by selecting Edit User Tool (Selection or contextual menu, or -U) when a user tool is the front window. Accordance will also automatically open the Edit window if you attempt to type in the User Tool pane. The selection point will be placed correctly so that you can continue to type modifications or additions to the text. There are some important differences between the Edit window for user notes and this one for user tools, as described below: Font and Styles In user notes (covered in Chapter 19) the fonts, styles, sizes, and colors of the text are set in the Edit window and cannot be modified in the User Notes window. But the display for user tools can be changed in the Set Tool Display (Display or contextual menu, or -T). Therefore, certain standard display settings are used in the Edit window, and the text does not appear in this window exactly as it does in the User Tool window. You can enter text in the Edit window by typing or by copying and pasting. The Text palette (and contextual and Display menu) enable you to set the font, size, style and color of the notes. The Font submenu lets you choose between the default Roman font, and Helena, Yehudit, or Rosetta. In the Edit window, Roman text is displayed in Arial font in OS X, and in Geneva in Classic. Changing the font in effect changes the field to which the text belongs, see below. The display font in the User Tool window itself can be set as explained above. Note: The user tool is not intended to be used for texts which are written mainly in Hebrew. The Hebrew field is intended for insertions in a mainly English text. Titles must be in English. Spaces should be used to separate the English and Hebrew text to minimize problems with the mixed directions. See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.

261 The Size submenu lets you select a font size relative to the default. In the Edit window the default font size is 12 point. If you select a smaller or larger size for some text, it will scale in the User Tool window in proportion to the current base font size. For example: if you set a title in the Edit window to 18 point, and you have the text display for the user tool set to 12 point, this title will be 18 point, but if you enlarge the text display to 18 point, the title will be 27 point. The Style submenu lets you select from the standard styles. At the bottom of this submenu is a Superscript/Subscript option which lets you raise or lower the selection relative to the baseline of the text. Styled text retains its styles even when the words are highlighted in the User Tool window. The Color submenu allows you to select from a range of colors. If you select a color other than black, this color will be displayed even if you set the Text color in the User Tool window to another color, but the color of any hit words will be replaced by the highlight color. The Alignment submenu is active only in this window, and lets you select left, center or right justification for the text. The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu (Edit or contextual menu, or -[ or ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of selected text in any window, and paste these characteristics onto the selection in the Edit window. However, changes from Arial to another Roman font are lost when the tool is updated. Note: If you paste text in Sylvanus or Peshitta font it will be displayed in that font, but treated as part of the Contents field. Saving Changes Selecting Save (Edit menu or -S), or clicking the Update button (or pressing enter) adds your changes to the tool without closing the Edit window. A progress bar shows the time remaining to update the text. Any open User Tool windows are updated at the same time. If you close the Edit window without updating, you will be asked whether or not you want to update the tool. The access buttons in the bottom left corner of the Edit window (or pressing command and the up and down arrow keys) let you scroll this window through all the articles in the tool. Therefore, only one Edit window for each user tool can be opened at a time. Unlike the User Notes, more than one article may be displayed in the window. If you reach the end of the currently displayed text by scrolling, you can click the access button to go to the next article. If you have made any changes to the currently displayed articles, Accordance will automatically update the tool before advancing to the next article. Doing your own Thing 20-5

262 20 User Tools Find and Replace, and Spell Checking Selecting Find/Replace (Search or contextual menu, or -F) opens a dialog box that lets you find a word or phrase and replace it within the text displayed in the Edit window. Selecting Spelling (Search or contextual menu, or -:) opens the spell checking dialog box. Both these dialog boxes are identical to those described in Chapter 19-User Notes. Defining the Different Fields All the text in the user tool belongs to one of the following fields: Titles, Content, Scripture, Greek, Hebrew, or Rosetta. Content includes the majority of the text everything not specifically designated to another field. The Content is broken up into articles, and each article is preceded by a title line. Titles The first line of the Edit window is always a title line. This is indicated by the red T in the left margin. When the cursor is over the margin, it changes to a red T. Clicking the cursor in the margin adds or removes a T from the first line of the adjacent paragraph. Pressing the option key while clicking in the margin creates a subtitle indicated by a numeral. The first level of subtitles are marked with a 1, option-clicking again raises the level, and shift-option-clicking lowers it. Option-clicking on another line below a subtitle starts with the same level as the previous subtitle. The cursor changes to T+ or T- when the option and shift-option keys are pressed. The title is limited to 128 characters. Use a carriage return to end the title and return to the Content, or to start a second title if the title is too long. Changing the field to Scripture, or using another font, also ends the text of the title. A dialog box informs you if the title is too long, when you attempt to update the tool. The title can be left blank, in which case a blank line will appear in the browser. (Accordance will add an option-space as a placeholder.) The blank title can be used to break up sections of text which are too long for one article, but do not need an additional heading. 20-6

263 Greek, Hebrew, and Rosetta Any text in Greek, Hebrew, or Rosetta is automatically assigned to the correct field. Accents and vowel points are ignored in the search, and do not appear on the lists of words in the Select Words dialog box. If you paste text from another software program containing Hebrew text in the Yehudit font, the Hebrew portions are reversed so that they appear correctly in the text. (Outside Accordance Yehudit is a left-to-right font.) Scripture Links The Scripture Link button Link (or -L) converts selected text to a hypertext Scripture field as shown in blue underline style. Clicking the button again removes the link. Any standard notation used in Accordance for entering references is accepted, and a string of references will appear correctly as separate links. If the reference is not acceptable, an error dialog box will specify the error during the update process. The display of Scripture links in the User Tool window, and the Bible text which opens when clicking the link (if a Text window is not already open), can be set in the Set Tools Display (Display or contextual menu or -T). Display Limits in the Edit Window Each article in a user tool is limited by the Block size, and this is also the display limit in the Edit window. When you open the Edit window without a selection in the text pane of the User Tool window, the Edit window displays the first article of the tool, and as many subsequent articles as will fit within the limit. Only one Edit window for each user tool can be opened at a time. If you reach the end of the currently displayed text by scrolling, you can click the access button to go to the next article. Pressing shift while clicking replaces all the text in the window with the next block. You can set the block size for editing the text by choosing Edit windows from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,). The Block pop-up menu lets you select a smaller block which will update the tool faster but more often, a medium, or a larger size which needs updating less often but takes longer to edit and refresh the Edit window. Amplifying to User Tools Before you create or install a user tool, the My Tools button on the Resource palette shows only the items New User Tool and Import. After two or more tools are saved, All User Tools and Merge appear as well, allowing you to select all the user tools (and merge two sets of tools). (See Chapter 11-Amplify Features.) Amplifying to a user tool is exactly like amplifying to any general tool, as described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window. User tools are included in the Search All and can be incorporated into Search All Groups. Doing your own Thing 20-7

264 User Tools Importing to a User Tool The Import feature lets you convert text from another document into a user tool, and thus make it fully compatible and interactive with your other Accordance modules. Currently Accordance imports only three types of files: HTML formatted files, plain ASCII text files, and Thesaurus Linguae Graecae (TLG) files. Importing the TLG files is described in the Grammatical Supplement, Chapter G-7. WARNING: This feature is intended for personal, teaching, or academic use. It is definitely NOT intended to help you bypass copyright and other restrictions that may apply to e-texts to which you have access. Of course, you may convert your own work into a user tool, and you may do whatever you wish with that module. You may also convert e-texts which you own in another format. For example, if you own texts on a CD-ROM, and can export them as text files, you may convert them to a user tool for your own use. You may not give the module to another person who does not own the CD-ROM, nor borrow a CD-ROM to extract its text for your permanent use. If you download from the Internet a text which was labeled as free for download, you should still abide by any posted conditions and terms of use. Many public domain works have been e- texted and are widely circulated. While the contents may be public domain, the party which did the work of preparing the e-text may have rights regarding its distribution and use, whether private or commercial. File Types The text you import must be in the form of a plain ASCII text file or an HTML file. Any Simple Text file, or a text file saved by Accordance is acceptable. HTML texts can be downloaded from the Internet. Files in any word processing format must first be saved as a text file or an HTML file before they can be converted. All font and style information will be lost when importing from plain text. (If you wish to preserve the font and style information, you can save the text as HTML, or copy and paste the text into the Edit window in sections.) Importing a File After the e-text is prepared, select Import User Tool from the User Files submenu (File menu) or Import from the My Tools button of the Resource palette. The dialog box lets you choose the type of file you are importing (currently HTML, Text File, or TLG) and whether to add the file to the end of an existing user tool or create a new tool. If you want to add the text to an existing tool, you can then select the current tool from the scrolling list. Subsequent dialog boxes let you navigate to and select the file you are importing, and if it is to be a new tool, choose a name for it. Accordance then imports the file and opens a User Tool window to display it.

265 Very Large Files In OS 7-9, if the text file is very large, a warning dialog tells you that it may be split into more than one user tool, each one containing about 800K of text. Each file is given the same name with a numerical suffix. If you do not want to split the text, you can quit Accordance and increase the memory allocation for the program until the warning message no longer appears. The increased memory requirement is temporary, and covers only the import process. Accordance will afterwards be able to open the resulting large tool with the usual memory allocation. The Resulting Tool If you choose to import into an existing user tool, the imported text is added at the end of the user tool you select. If the resulting tool would be too large for one file, the new text is saved as a new user tool, with a name based on the original text file. The name you gave the file is saved as the first title. If imported from an ASCII text file, the entire text is saved as Content with a blank title line at intervals to divide the text into articles if necessary. You can now edit the text in the following ways: Define titles and individually set their size and style Remove blank titles where they are no longer needed Define Scripture links Change words or phrases to Greek or Hebrew Add styles or colors to the text, or vary its size You can use the access buttons in the Edit window to display the entire text, block by block, in order to edit and assign the text to specific fields. HTML import User tools imported from HTML files include the following information: text styles such as bold and italic are retained. headings are converted to titles and subtitles with appropriate font size and styles to distinguish them from the Contents. any valid scripture references are automatically defined in blue underline style and hyperlinked. The scripture references do not need to be marked as such in the HTML file. As long as they conform to the general Accordance guidelines for references, Accordance will identify them in the text. Doing your own Thing 20-9

266 20 User Tools The following HTML tags are supported during import: Tags Resulting Appearance in Edit and User Tool Windows Headings: <title> and <h1> marked with T, centered, bold, 18 p <h2> marked with 1, centered, bold, 14 pt <h3> marked with 2, centered, bold <h4> to <h9> marked with 3-9, centered, italic <h10> and up centered Paragraphs: <br> and <p> carriage return (carriage returns and shift-returns are lost) Styles: <size 18> 18 pt <em>, <strong>, or <b> bold <i> italic <u> underline Lists: <ul> and <ol> followed by <li> indent Spaces: tabs, spaces, and command-space space (except at beginning of a line) Alignment: <div align=left> or right, or center aligned Superscript: <sup> raised Merging User Tools Accordance lets you merge two existing tools together. Select Merge User Tool from the User Files submenu (File menu) or Merge from the My Tools button of the Resource palette. The Merge dialog box lets you select the tool to be merged from the Merge: scrolling list on the left, and the tool into which it will be merged from the Into: right hand list. The text of the tool you select on the left will appear at the end of the tool on the right. The combined tool will keep the name of the Into: (right hand) tool. You can edit this name as described above. The name of the tool that was merged into it is deleted from the pop-up menu list, but the file itself is NOT deleted from your hard drive, so you have the choice of deleting it, keeping it, or adding it back to Accordance. Hint: If you are not sure that you want to merge the two files, you may wish first to make a copy of the Into: tool by duplicating it on the desktop. In OS 7-9, if the resulting tool would be too large for the available memory to handle (in OS 7-9), the merge is canceled. Chapter 2 describes the allocation of memory to Accordance.

267 21 Importing Bibles Chapter Contents: Preparing the Text Importing the Bible Using the Bible

268 21 Importing Bibles User Bibles are texts which you import into Accordance and which become true Bible modules. The text may be a public domain text, or one which you own in another format, or it may be a private translation or version to which you have access. Preparing the Text Requirements for the text to be imported are: The Basic Format The text must be Biblical, only books from the OT, NT, and some standard books from the Apocrypha are accepted. Additions to Daniel and Esther, and the books of Tobit and Sirach have such irregular versification that they cannot easily be imported. The text must be a plain text file (.txt) in Roman script and use only standard characters such as those in Times New Roman. The file must be saved with Mac Roman encoding, not Unicode, Windows, or any other encoding. The full name of the encoding is Western (Mac OS Roman). The format of each verse is a valid Bible reference (as used in most English Bibles) followed by a space followed by the contents of the verse. Each verse is ended by a return character, except for the last verse. The book name (any standard Accordance abbreviation) only needs to appear on the first verse of the book, but can be repeated. The chapter number only needs to appear on the first verse of the chapter, but can be repeated. A colon must separate chapter and verse. Thus both of the following are acceptable: Gen. 1:1 In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. Gen. 1:2 And the earth was without form, and void; and darkness was upon the face of the deep. And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters. Gen. 1:3 And God said, Let there be light: and there was light. Gen. 1:4 And God saw the light, that it was good: and God divided the light from the darkness. Gen. 2:1 Thus the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host of them. Gen. 2:2 And on the seventh day God ended his work which he had made; and he rested on the seventh day from all his work which he had made. Genesis 1:1 In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. 2 And the earth was without form, and void; and darkness was upon the face of the deep. And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters. 3 And God said, Let there be light: and there was light. 4 And God saw the light, that it was good: and God divided the light from the darkness. 2:1 Thus the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host of them. 2 And on the seventh day God ended his work which he had made; and he rested on the seventh day from all his work which he had made. 21-2

269 Missing or Out of Order Sections Books can be in any order and number. That is, Bibles with incomplete, missing or outof-order books can be imported. Chapters within a book must be consecutive, but need not be complete. If a chapter is missing the user should create a chapter X verse 1 and leave it blank, for each skipped chapter, with the chapter number in place of X. Verses within a chapter can be skipped but must not be out of order, so verses 2,4,5,8 are acceptable, but not 2,4,3,5,8. Extra verses are not accepted. The KJV is the standard for the number of chapters in each book, and verses per chapter. The RSV is the standard for Apocryphal books. If necessary, renumber the verses and put the original number in parentheses for reference, so the previous example could look like: 2 text of verse 2 3 (4) text of verse 4 4 (3) text of verse 3 5 text of verse 5 Other Text Markups Certain additional characters can be used to add paragraphs, line breaks, styles and colors to the text. You can use any text editor software to convert styled text to plain text with these codes. Paragraph marks are denoted by use of the paragraph marker ( ) with a single space on each side. If paragraphs are used, a paragraph marker must appear after the reference of the first verse of the first book, otherwise Accordance will assume that there are no paragraphs in the text. The marker should also appear at reasonable intervals throughout the text. The markup codes shown below are acceptable within the text. Each code must end within the verse, and be restarted on the next verse if needed. Start End bold <b> </b> italic <i> </i> underline <u> </u> small caps <c> </c> subscript  superscript  color (use one of the Accordance colors) <color=red> </color> new line within a verse <br> The superscript and subscript styles will also reduce the font size of the enclosed text. If a markup style does not end within the verse, an error message will appear during import. If codes are incorrectly entered, they will appear in the body of the text. You can use the character search (for example.<) to find any visible codes. Doing your own Thing 21-3

270 21 Importing Bibles Importing the Bible Select Import Bible Text from the User Files submenu (File menu). The standard Macintosh navigation dialog lets you navigate to the location of the file to be imported and select the file. A warning dialog reminds you of possible copyright issues. The next dialog box lets you enter a name for the Bible (the default is the same as the file name). Note: The name of the module cannot be identical to any Accordance Bibles currently installed. When importing the text, a new text can replace a user Bible of the same name, but not a regular Accordance Bible module. If a module of this name is on the pop-up menus, Accordance either reminds you that you must choose a different name from Accordance Bibles, or offers you the opportunity to replace your earlier user Bible with this new one. If the user Bible is open in a window. Accordance offers to close the window If a module of this name is on the pop-up menus but Accordance cannot find it, you will be asked to locate it in the standard navigation dialog. If you have deleted the file from the hard drive, you must use Arrange Modules (Edit menu or option- -A) to remove it from the menus before you can reimport it The module is saved by default in the Accordance folder/modules/shared User Bibles. A progress dialog box informs you of the conversion process. A full Bible can take several minutes. If errors are encountered in the text that prevent importing, an error message will appear, and the import will be canceled. 21-4

271 At the end of the import process, a dialog box appears which lets you add the full name of the text, and any comments, such as editor, copyright, etc. These comments will appear in the About The Text dialog (Accordance or Apple menu). Accordance recalls these comments for subsequent imports during the current session. A new Search window opens displaying your new Bible, and its name appears on the pop-up menus. WARNING: Accordance installers cannot differentiate between Accordance Bibles and your imported user Bibles, so if your Bible has the same name as a Bible that is on one of the CD-ROMs such as the Bible Unlock, it will be replaced if a newer module is on the CD-ROM. To avoid this, try to use a unique name, and be sure to back up your Bible by copying the file to another location. Using the Bible The Bible can be used in all the ways that Accordance Bibles are used. Verses should align correctly with Accordance Bibles viewed in parallel. All search functions are supported, except for searching within a clause field, and this option is dimmed in the Search Window popup. The text of the Bible cannot be edited in Accordance. You can edit your original text file and reimport it. Word highlighting may be displaced if an edited version of the text is reimported. Doing your own Thing 21-5

272 21 Importing Bibles 21-6

273 22 The Workspace and Slide Show Contents: The Workspace and Tabs The Slide Show

274 22 The Workspace and Slide Show The Workspace and Tabs The workspace is a convenient way to organize some or all of your open windows, to improve your access to their contents, and to reduce the clutter on the screen. The workspace is essentially a blank window in which multiple windows appear in tabs. A new item added to the workspace creates a new tab in front of the previous tabs, but all the tab labels are visible and accessible. Click on any label to bring the tab to the front. The Details workspace described in Chapter 11 is very similar to the workspace described in this chapter. Opening a Workspace If the first setting in the General page of your Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,) is checked, a workspace with an initial Search window tab opens when you launch Accordance. You can open an empty workspace at any time by selecting New Workspace (File menu). 22-2

275 Adding New Tabs While a workspace is the front window, opening or amplifying to almost any item automatically creates a new tab in the workspace, except that open recyclable tabs or windows are reused whenever appropriate. Only Search window Details always open in their own special workspace, while 3D Map and Edit windows, and some dialog boxes, open as independent windows. If you open a window with a minimum width greater than the current workspace, it will also open as a separate window. Pressing the command key while opening or amplifying forces an independent window to open even when a workspace is the front window. When an independent window is in front, any new item opens as a window, even if there is workspace in the back. Thus, if you amplify from a window, Accordance will open a new window unless a suitable recyclable window or tab is already open. The Confine hypertext to the same workspace option in the Appearance page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) reuses only tabs in the same workspace, and opens a new tab even if another window is available elsewhere. Cycling through Tabs You can cycle through the open tabs in a workspace by pressing control-tab to bring to the front the tab to the right of the current tab. Pressing shift-control-tab brings the tab to the left of the current tab to the front. Closing Workspaces and Tabs The entire workspace can be closed by clicking on the red button or close box in the top left corner. A tab is closed by clicking on the X close button on the tab. When a workspace is in front, selecting Close (File menu) closes the entire workspace, while selecting Close Tab below it closes just the front tab. The key shortcut command W ( -W) closes the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window. Pressing option when clicking on an X close button closes all the other tabs. Duplicating Workspaces and Tabs Similarly, when a workspace is in front, selecting Duplicate (File menu) makes a copy of the entire workspace, while selecting Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key shortcut command-d ( -D) duplicates the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window. General Features 22-3

276 22 The Workspace and Slide Show The Tab Contextual Menu The menu which opens when you right or control-click on a tab lets you Close, Duplicate, or Detach the tab and use the items in the Set submenu. Moving Tabs in and out of a Workspace To separate a tab from the workspace, select Detach Tab (Window menu or option- -T). The contents of the front tab now appear in a window with the same name. To convert a window into a tab, select Merge Windows (Window menu or option- -M). If one of the two front windows is a workspace, the other window will become a tab within it. If both are just windows, a new workspace opens with the two tabs. If you merge two workspaces, the resulting workspace includes all the tabs from each workspace. Repeating the Merge Windows lets you convert all your open windows into tabs in a single workspace. The Details workspace and windows are distinct from the regular workspace and windows, they remain linked to their parent Search (or Tool) window, and they cannot be merged with other windows, except for other Details from the same parent window. Rearranging Tabs To rearrange the tabs within a workspace, drag a tab to a new location between two other tabs. A vertical bar indicates the new location of the tab. Holding down the option key while dragging duplicates the tab. Dragging a Tab to Another Workspace You can also drag a tab to the tabs area of another workspace. Holding down the option key while dragging duplicates the tab in the new workspace. The search automatically is repeated in the new location except for the Search All window. 22-4

277 Tab and Window Names Each window and tab is named for the current module being searched, and the name updates when you change the search text. Duplicate tabs and windows are assigned a number as well, so that each name is unique. You can set names for most tabs and windows in the Set submenu of the Window menu (option- -N), and the new name becomes the default name when you save the window. However, if you save a workspace as a file, the name you give it in the Save dialog immediately becomes the title of the workspace. Overflow Tabs The tab labels resize when you grow or narrow the window, but once they reach the minimum width, additional labels overflow to the right or left of the labels area. Arrow buttons appear at each end indicating that additional tabs are present, and let you scroll the labels area to display the hidden tabs. Window Commands that Apply to the Workspace The Hide item and Arrange submenu items (Tile and Stack) in the Window menu apply to the workspace, as well as to windows. The Save command (File menu or -S) saves the entire workspace with all its tabs, if it is in front. The name you enter for the saved file becomes the title of the workspace. You cannot save individual tabs they must first be detached and saved as separate windows. The Slide Show The Slide show allows speakers and teachers to display Accordance windows using the full screen, without taking up space for unnecessary controls. It is not intended to substitute for specialized presentation software such as KeyNote or PowerPoint, but rather to make Accordance windows conveniently accessible for projection. The windows can be prepared ahead of time in the usual way, but they must all be placed as tabs in workspaces or a Details workspaces. Switching to and from the Slide Show To convert to the Slide show, when a workspace is in front, select Slide Show (Window menu or option- -S). General Features 22-5

278 22 The Workspace and Slide Show There are several ways to revert to regular view: click the central button on the control panel shown later in this chapter press escape press option- -S, or press command- -. (period) The Slide Show View The front tab in the front workspace now fills the screen. All Accordance floating windows are hidden except for the Instant Details box and the new Slide control panel. Each window displays the results or contents of the window, and only those controls that are needed to navigate within the contents. The desktop, dock, and all other windows are hidden. The top portion of Accordance windows, the entry section and pop-up menus are also hidden. The Slide show can be used on a projector or on any monitor screen. If there are dual (non-mirror) monitors the Slide show will open in the monitor where the majority of the front workspace is placed. The control panel can be moved to either monitor. Note: In OS 7 to 9 the menu bar at the top of the screen is still visible, but inactive. 22-6

279 Navigating within a Window The following features are enabled to allow you to display the contents of the window: You can use the scroll bars to scroll the window, as well as control-click on the up and down scroll arrows to untie the panes, and command-click to initiate autoscrolling. Pressing command with the arrow keys scrolls the text. Pressing shift-tab selects the next pane. You can change the size of the font or zoom a Map, Timeline or Picture window using -+ (plus) and -- (minus). The following features are visible and active: The pop-up menus for each pane, the pane position and the Font size buttons. The text access buttons to jump to the next verse, chapter, or book, or entry in the case of tools, the mark and prior buttons if present The Animate button in the 2D Map window. The Class pop-up menu in the Analysis Graph, Bar Chart, and Pie Chart Details windows. Almost all other functions are disabled in the Slide show. General Features 22-7

280 22 The Workspace and Slide Show The Control Panel When you enter the Slide show, a small control panel appears to facilitate navigation between open tabs. Clicking the center square button reverts to normal display. Move the panel by dragging on the left bar, it retains its position when closed and reopened. To close and reopen the slide control panel, click on its close button or press option- - 0 (zero) to close it. Reopen it by pressing option- -0. It will always appear when you return to the Slide show. The first time you close the control panel you will be reminded how to reopen it, or exit the Slide show, Navigating between Windows To go to the next or prior tab in the workspace: Click the inner triangle buttons, Press the left or right arrow keys, or Click anywhere in the window pane to advance to the next tab. To go to the first or last tab in the workspace: Click the outer buttons, or Press the up or down arrow keys. The pop-up menu on the slide control panel displays the title of the tab currently being displayed. Clicking on the button opens a menu which shows the titles of all tabs in the current workspace, and then, separated by lines, the titles of tabs in every other open workspace. To switch to a specific tab in the same or another workspace, simply select any other title to switch the display to that tab in that workspace. Press -' (quote) when a Search window with results is displayed, to switch to the Details workspace for that window (if it is already open). Press -' when a Details workspace is displayed, to change back to its parent Search window. The Instant Details box appears only if it was open before the Slide show. It can be moved and resized as usual, and closed and recalled by pressing -B. 22-8

281 23 Working With Windows Chapter Contents: Types of Accordance Windows Window Features The Window Menu Duplicating Windows The Text items and Palette The Character Palette Entering Hebrew Text

282 23 Working with Windows Types of Accordance Windows As you have already discovered, there are many different Accordance windows. These windows all share common features and also have unique characteristics. The general features of Macintosh and Accordance windows are described in Chapter 4. The special features of each window are described in the relevant chapter. Workspace containing other windows as tabs. Windows displaying and searching Accordance modules Search window Chapters 6-7 Tools window Chapter 14 Parallel window Chapter 16 User Notes window Chapter 20 User Tool window Chapter 21 Special search windows Construct window Chapter 10 Search All window Chapter 15 Floating windows for easy access to other features Resource palette Chapter 5 Instant Details box Chapter 5 Highlight palette Chapter 17 Character and Text palettes this chapter Details and Amplify windows displaying additional information Graph, Analysis, Concordance, and Table windows Chapter 11 Text window Chapter 13 Parsing, Diagram, and Syntax windows Chapter 13 Specialized windows Arrange Modules Chapter 5 Reference List window Chapter 18 Edit windows Chapters 19 and 20 Display windows Chapter 14 Map and Timeline windows Chapters A1 and T1 in the supplements The following features are common to most of the window types. Window Features 23-2 Opening Windows As with many Macintosh applications, you can open multiple windows in Accordance. Working with multiple windows makes it easy to view and analyze search results simultaneously, and explore other related resources. There are various ways to open windows:

283 The New submenu (File menu) lets you open one of windows listed. The settings in the window will depend on the current defaults set in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,). The New Construct submenu (File menu) lets you choose the type of Construct window to open. Choosing Open (File menu or -O) lets you select any Accordance module, or any file you have saved in Accordance. Opening a module will set the window to display the whole module with an asterisk (*) in the argument entry box. Opening a saved session will reopen the window(s) exactly as you saved them. Double-clicking on the file or module icon opens the window(s) in the same way. Selecting a module from the pop-up menus in the Resource palette also opens the module you select with an asterisk in the argument entry box, and the whole module displayed in the window. When windows are opened by amplifying to the Resource palette (or Amplify menu), the settings depend on the selection you are amplifying. These windows may be dependent and recyclable. (See Chapter 12-Amplify Features.) Keyboard shortcuts can also be used to open some windows: New Search window -N Search All window -F Simple Construct -1 Greek Construct -2 Hebrew Construct -3 Edit window -U Context window -5 Arrange Modules window option- -A Arranging Windows Windows can be moved and resized as described in Chapter 4. The Window menu lets you arrange and organize the open windows, as described in the next section. Pressing option-tab cycles through all the open windows (except for hidden windows), bringing the back window to the front each time. General Features 23-3

284 Working with Windows Closing Windows You can close any window by clicking in the close box in the top left corner. The File menu has several close commands: selecting Close closes the front window or workspace, Close Tab closes the front tab in a workspace. The key shortcut command W ( -W) closes the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window. Close Pane closes the selected text pane, and Close All Windows closes all open windows except the floating windows. Whenever you close a window in which you have made any changes, a dialog box asks whether you want to save the window. Clicking Don t Save or pressing d or n closes the window without saving, clicking Cancel or pressing escape or -period cancels the close action, and clicking Save or pressing return, enter, or y opens the Save dialog box in which you can name the file. A similar dialog box appears if you choose Close Tab, or Close All Windows, or Quit (File menu or -Q). Note: This dialog can be suppressed in the General pane of the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,. Duplicating and Renaming Windows You can duplicate a window or workspace by selecting Duplicate (File menu or -D); selecting Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key shortcut command-d ( -D) duplicates the front tab if a workspace is in front, unless there are no tabs, otherwise it applies to the front window. Selecting Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N) lets you change the name on the title bar. Duplicating and renaming windows and workspaces are described later in this chapter. Saving and Printing Independent windows and workspaces can be saved for reopening later by selecting Save or Save as (File menu or -S). Selecting Save Session lets you save all open windows. The standard Macintosh dialog box lets you select a name and location for the saved file (the default location in OS X is user/documents/accordance files). Individual panes can be saved as a text file for reuse in a word processor. The entire window, individual panes, or selected text can be printed by selecting Print or Print Selection (File menu). (See Chapter 25-Printing and Saving.) Setting the Window Display Details of the display of the front window or tab are set by selecting Set windowtype display (Display or contextual menu or -T). The resulting dialog box lets you specify the display of the window or selected text pane, and the default display whenever that text or window type is reopened.

285 Setting Defaults Default options for most window types can be set by selecting the type of window from the list in the Preferences dialog box (Application or Edit menu or -,). These default settings vary with the window type, and mainly affect new windows opened from the File menu. (See Appendix A-Setting Preferences.) Linking Windows Windows can be linked together either for searching or for displaying results. The LINK, CONTENTS, HITS, and MERGE commands combine the search argument in one window with either the search argument or the verses displayed in another window. (See Chapter 8-Search Commands and Symbols, and Chapter 14-The Tools Window.) The Tie To item in the Set submenu (Window menu) links the scrolling of two windows as described in the next section. Reusing Windows You can reuse most windows by entering a new search argument. Windows opened by amplifying to the Resource palette (or Amplify menu) are recycled so that repeating the Amplify from a new selection updates a current window instead of opening a new one. Recycling is described in the next section and in Chapter 12. The Window Menu On the Macintosh, the active window is the window with details in the title bar. When windows overlap, the active window is the one in front. The Window menu lets you show and hide the floating windows, arrange any open Accordance windows, get specific Accordance Help information for the front window, and set other window features. Floating Windows The first five items are the floating windows or palettes which give you access to many of the features of Accordance. Selecting an item opens the window and places a check mark ( ) beside the name. Selecting the name again or clicking the close box closes the window and removes the check mark. These windows are described in Chapters 5 and 18, and later in this chapter. Selecting Hide Palettes (option- -0) from the menu hides all the open floating windows and dims the menu items. Hide Palettes changes to Show Palettes (option- -0), and when it is selected the same windows reappear. General Features 23-5

286 23 Working with Windows Open Windows The bottom of the Window menu displays the names of all the windows and workspaces that are currently open, with a check mark ( ) beside the front window. (The name of a window is displayed in the center of the title bar at the top of the window.) To bring a window to the front, select the name of the window from the Window menu. Window Help Selecting Window Help (option- -?) opens the relevant page of Accordance Help for the front window or tab. This feature can also be used to get detailed information about most Accordance dialog boxes, including definitions of the tags in the Tag details dialog boxes. (See Chapter 3- Getting Help.) Hiding Windows Hide ( -\) makes the front window invisible. A hollow diamond ( ) appears beside the name on the list of open windows. The window will appear in front of the other windows if it is selected from the menu, or if an amplify function reuses it. This feature lets you hide windows that are currently part of linked searches. It also lets you hide Amplify windows, such as the text window, with your chosen panes, display options, window position and size. When you next choose that amplify, the window reappears with the same settings and position. Show All ( -0) makes all hidden windows visible again, and in OS X, brings all Accordance windows to the front. The Set Submenu The submenu affects the front window or tab. Recycling Windows Selecting Recycle Contents ( -K) places the green recycle symbol above the OK button or in the top right corner of the front window. A check mark ( ) appears beside the Recycle Contents menu item to indicate that the front window is recycled. When Recycle Contents is checked, selecting it or pressing -K removes the recycle symbol from the front window and preserves its contents. Clicking the icon on the window also removes or restores the icon and the recycling. Most windows which can be opened from the Resource palette or Amplify menu can be recycled. These include the Search, Tool, Parallel, Map, Timeline, User Notes, User Tool, Text, Search All, and Parsing windows. When one of these windows is opened by amplifying, it is automatically recycled so that it will be reused if the same Amplify feature is used again for a different selection. Refer to Chapter 12 and the relevant window chapters for details of recycling. 23-6

287 Renaming Windows Whenever you open a window, it is automatically given a default name. You can rename most windows to give them more meaningful names. To rename the front window, select Name from the Set submenu so that this dialog box appears: The existing window name is selected in the dialog box. To rename the window, enter the new name in the entry box and click OK. The new name appears in the center of the title bar of the window. The Parsing window and separate Details windows (Graphs, Analysis, Concordance, and Table) names update to show the text upon which they are based. The names of Search, Tools, Parallel, and User Notes windows update whenever you select a different module to display in the same window. However, if you set a new name for any of these windows, this name is retained when the contents change. The new name is recalled when the window is saved and reopened, except for Details windows. Some window names do not change as you use them, but can be set as shown above. They include the Construct and Reference List windows. The names of Edit windows, and of report windows such as Show Book Names or Timeline Data, cannot be set by the user. Tying Windows Tying connects the scrolling of two or more windows so that when the text in one window is scrolled, the other text moves to display the matching verse references. The Tie To items list all windows which can be tied to the front window. Selecting a window name from this submenu places the brown tie symbol above the OK button in both windows, and ties their scrolling. Selecting Untie from the submenu breaks the ties between the front window and any others. These items are dimmed if they are not appropriate for the front window. More than two windows can be tied in a chain. A number appearing in the tie symbol indicates that the window is tied to two or more other windows. Double-clicking on the tie symbol in the front window brings to the front all the windows which are tied to it. Only windows whose contents are listed by verse reference can be tied. Thus any Search, Reference List, User Notes, and Text windows can be tied, as well as Reference tools such as commentaries and text notes. The order of books or verses does not have to be the same in each window. The other windows will scroll to match the first verse in the front window. Note: Some commentaries have entries covering sections of text rather than verses. The best results with tying occur when each of these tools is tied directly to the Search window, rather than to one another. Tying windows can be used when you want to view the verses of two similar searches side by side. For example, if you search two text versions, you can compare the highlighted results in each version verse by verse by tying the scrolling of the windows. Tying is most useful however, in combination with some of the Amplify features described in Chapters General Features 23-7

288 23 Working with Windows Hint: You can set up a Text window with the entire Bible text in multiple panes. If you tie the Text window to your Search window, you will get an instant context for each verse as it reaches the top of the Search window. Arranging Windows The Arrange submenu affects all visible windows and workspaces: When you select Stack Windows from the Windows menu, all open windows are repositioned on top of each other with a slight offset so the title bar of each window is visible. The window sizes are unchanged. The active window remains in front of the stack. The illustration shows a group of stacked windows. Converting Tabs to Windows The next two items allow you to convert windows to tabs in a workspace and windows to tabs. Selecting Detach Tab (option- -T) removes the front tab and opens it as an independent window. Selecting Merge Windows (option- -M) combines the front two windows into a workspace. For details see Chapter 21-the Workspace. When you select Tile Windows ( -I), as many open windows as possible are repositioned side by side to fill the whole screen. The windows are resized depending on the number of panes each contains. Either the front window or the window with the most panes is placed in the top left corner. The illustration shows a group of tiled windows. If the floating windows, the Resource, Text and Highlight palettes, or the Instant Details box are open at the edge of the window, the windows will be tiled in such a way that these floating windows do not overlap the tiled windows. (See Chapter 5-Floating Windows.) Duplicating Windows A quick way to make a copy of a window is to use the Duplicate item (File menu or -D). This creates an exact duplicate of the front window, and adds a number after the name. Duplicating a window does not modify your original window in any way. 23-8

289 When a workspace is in front, selecting Duplicate makes a copy of the entire workspace, while selecting Duplicate Tab below it duplicates just the front tab. The key shortcut command-d ( -D) duplicates the front tab if a workspace with tabs is in front. Duplicating a window lets you perform a new search using a set-up similar to the original window, without changing the original window. This feature is especially helpful when working with Construct windows, as explained in Chapters 10, G2, and G4. The new window has the same search argument as the original window, but the search does not take place until you click OK. The new window is neither tied nor recycled unless you select these options. Hint: This is a quick way to temporarily save a window of interest while retaining the current recycling windows. The Text Items and Palette The Text palette and the corresponding items in the Display menu enable you to set the font and style of your notes in the Edit window of a user notes or user tool file, the Edit layer of a Map window, Diagram and Syntax windows, and the description box of the Construct or Reference List windows. The fourth item in the Window menu is Text Palette. A check mark indicates that the palette is opened. The three buttons with pop-up menus correspond to the Font, Size, and Color items on the menu. The buttons on the right let you set the text style and alignment. The right (or control) click contextual menu offers most of these items when used in editable text. To use the Text items or palette, either select a portion of text, or click to leave the cursor flashing where you wish to enter text. Then select the font, size, style, and color from the submenus or palette buttons. Font, Size, and Color The Font, Size, and Color submenus allow you to select the font along with a range of font sizes and colors. The check mark indicates the current selection. (If multiple fonts or styles are present in the selection, no items will be checked in the submenus.) The Edit window of user tools limits the font selection to Arial, Helena, Yehudit, and Rosetta. The User Notes Window page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) has a Use default fonts in font menu option. This limits the fonts for user notes to the Accordance fonts plus the two default fonts selected in the Edit Windows page. General Features 23-9

290 23 Style Working with Windows The Style submenu and buttons let you select from the standard styles. Selecting another style adds this style to the present selection, for example, adding Bold to Italic results in Bold-Italic. Each style selected in the menu shows a check mark. To remove a style, select it again, or select Plain Text to remove all styles. The standard Macintosh command key shortcuts also apply the styles in the same windows: -B for bold, -I for Italic, -U for Underline, and -T for plain text. At the bottom of this submenu is a Superscript/Subscript option which lets you raise or lower the selection relative to the baseline of the text, as do the arrow buttons on the palette. Selecting Superscript or Subscript again raises or lowers the selection even further. Selecting None returns the text to the baseline. The Alignment submenu and buttons apply only to Edit windows for User Tools. They let you set left, center, or right justification for the selected paragraph. The Style Only and Paste Style items in the Copy As submenu (Edit menu or -[ and ]) let you copy the font, size, style, and color of any selected text, and paste these characteristics onto a new selection. This feature is especially helpful when you repeatedly need to set more than one characteristic, such as the font and size, or two styles together. The Style Only can be used in any window, so you can copy a style in a Bible text or a tool. The Paste Style can only be used where you can edit the text, and use the Text items and palette. The Character Palette This palette displays and lets you enter the special characters in the selected Accordance font. It can be used wherever text entry in these fonts is appropriate. The Character Palette is the fifth item in the Window menu. A check mark indicates that the palette is opened. The Font pop-up menu lets you select any Accordance font. The checkboxes let you reduce the size of the palette by hiding unnecessary rows. The positions of overstrike characters are shown relative to a gray box.

291 The details bar at the bottom identifies the character under the cursor and the associated keystroke. When the cursor is in suitable editable text, such as an entry box, clicking on a character highlights it and enters it into the window. Characters can only be entered into a search entry box that is set to the same font. Clicks are ignored if the search text or tool field requires a different font. In the Edit windows of User Tools and User Notes, the User Layer of the Atlas, and the description boxes of Construct and Reference list windows, changing the font in the palette and entering a character enters the correct font, character, and direction. The palette retains the settings in the top bar until they are changed. If the Greek & Hebrew page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,) is set to use a modern Greek or Hebrew keyboard, the palette enters the correct character even though the label identifies the keystroke for the original Accordance font. Entering Hebrew Text In any window in which you can edit the fonts and style, as described above, the default text direction is from left to right. If you select the Hebrew font Yehudit from the Font submenu, the direction of subsequent text entry is reversed, and any selected text is reversed to read from right to left. This text now contains mixed directions, though the logical order of entry of the characters is retained, as shown when the Hebrew text is converted to English characters. Apparent anomalies may arise when working at or across the boundaries of the inserted text. It is always a good idea to separate the Hebrew and English by at least one space. In this example the text selection jumps from the end of the English to the beginning of the Hebrew, leaving an apparent gap. When the width of the text box is changed, the text wraps correctly sending the end of the Hebrew to the next line. To continue in English, place the cursor at the end of the Hebrew, (the far left of the second line) and select the English font. The new text is entered to the right of the block of Hebrew. It is best to consider the Hebrew as insertions in the main left to right text. General Features 23-11

292 23 Working with Windows Typing Hints To quickly switch between English and Hebrew when typing: 1. Use the Style Only item in the Copy As submenu (Edit menu or -[) after clicking in any text that is already in the style you want to copy. Then select text and choose Paste Style ( -]) to change the font, size, style, and color to match your first selection. The copied styles are retained in memory until you copy another style (independent of copying to the clipboard). 2. To insert Hebrew in a text that is basically English, the following routine is useful: Click in Hebrew text and use -[ to copy the style, or copy a Hebrew selection. To change to Hebrew from English, type an extra space and press the left arrow to go back a space. Now paste the Hebrew text or use -] to paste the style and then type in Hebrew. To return to English, click the mouse to the right of the last line, beyond the extra space, and continue in English. See Chapters G1 and G3 for details of typing in Greek and Hebrew

293 Other Features24 Chapter Contents: Contextual Menus Accordance Widgets Differences Between Accordance on Classic and Mac OS X

294 Other Features Contextual Menus A right-click on a two-button mouse opens a contextual menu with the most important options appropriate for the area of the window that is clicked. Pressing control while clicking also opens the contextual menu. This feature of OS X is also supported within Accordance in older Classic OS. The following contextual menus and items are available: A. Workspace - Tab Close Tab Duplicate Tab Detach Tab Set Tab submenu with the Set options from the Window menu. B. Entry Section 1. Search and Search All Argument Entry Box Copy Cut Paste History submenu Enter submenu with Word, Key Number, Lemma, Inflected Form, and Root as appropriate Enter Command submenu Enter Symbol submenu 2. Search Entry Section Surround Set Range To submenu Search Within Every submenu Set Context To submenu Compare Texts List Text Differences 3. Tool and Parallel Argument Entry Box (and entry box of extra fields) Copy Cut Paste History submenu Enter Word Enter Command submenu Enter Symbol submenu

295 4. Tool Entry Section Surround Search With submenu Extra Fields submenu 5. User Notes Argument Entry Box Copy Cut Paste History submenu Enter Symbol submenu C. Text Pane (the word under the cursor is selected) 1. Bible Text (Search, Parallel, Text or Reference List Window) Search For submenu with Word, Key Number, Lemma, Inflected Form, and Root as appropriate Search In submenu with all texts of the same language Look Up submenu with the Amplify categories, opening the default module in each case Search All submenu Favorites submenu Copy Copy As submenu Print Selection Add Selection To submenu for Reference Lists Highlight submenu with the names of your highlight styles Clear Highlight Highlight All Hits submenu with the names of your highlight styles Clear Highlighted Hits Show Text As submenu with the options from the Display menu Set Text Pane Display About This Text General Features 24-3

296 24 Other Features 2. Tool Window Search Word Search In submenu with all the texts Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories, opening the default module in each case Search All submenu Favorites submenu Copy Print Selection Highlight submenu with the names of your highlight styles Clear Highlight Highlight All Hits submenu with the names of your highlight styles Clear Highlighted Hits Set Tool Display About This Text 3. User Tool Window Search Word Search In submenu with all the texts Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories, opening the default module in each case Search All submenu Favorites submenu Copy Print Selection Set Tool Display Edit User Tool 4. Report Windows (Analysis, Concordance, Table, Book Name, Text Differences, Timeline Report, and Tool Table Windows) Search In submenu with all the texts Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories, opening the default module in each case Search All submenu Favorites submenu Copy Print Selection Set windowtype Display as appropriate 24-4

297 5. User Notes Edit User Tool Copy Print Selection 6. Search All Print D. Tool Browser Expand Levels Select range Add To Range Clear Ranges E. Image Windows (Graphs, Picture, Diagram, Arrange Modules) Copy (Picture) Print Set windowtype Display as appropriate G. Map and Timeline Windows (Depends on whether a name is selected): Search In submenu with all the texts Look Up submenu with the main Amplify categories, opening the default module in each case Search All submenu Favorites submenu Copy Name Print Set windowtype Display General Features 24-5

298 24 Other Features H. Edit User Notes and Edit User Tools Windows Copy Cut Paste Copy Style Only Paste Style Only Add Scripture Link Font submenu Size submenu Style submenu Color submenu Find/Replace Spelling Print Selection I. Construct Windows 1. Description Box Copy Cut Paste 2. Construct Area Copy Picture Print Link From submenu with list of eligible windows J. Syntax Windows Copy Print Accordance Widgets The two Accordance widgets offer additional features to users with Mac OS 10.4 (Tiger) and above, and are accessed through the Dashboard. Installing the Widgets Please run the latest version of Accordance once before launching the widgets. 24-6

299 If you have OS 10.4 or higher, the Accordance installer places the Accordance.wdgt and AccUpdater.wdgt on the desktop together with Read Me files. You can download the widgets separately from the website for use with third-party dashboard programs. If you have OS or higher, double-click each file to install the widget in your user ~/Library/Widgets/. You will work through two standard widget dialog boxes. If you have 10.4 or , you must manually place the widgets in that folder (you may have to create a Widgets folder in your user ~/Library). Do not put it in the hard drive/library/widgets/ as it will not work from there. Then you can launch it with a double-click or install it via the dashboard by clicking the + sign. Accordance Widget This widget offers a shortcut to see and copy the text of desired verses. It lets you quickly retrieve verses from any Bible text you have in Accordance, and paste them into a document you are working on. Using the Widget Bring the dashboard to the front (the default key is F12). Click in the text box, enter a verse referencen and press return or enter. The verses you requested appear in the opened scroll. Click the magnifying glass to retrieve recent searches for quick access. Click Copy to copy the text to the clipboard for pasting into another document. The text will take the font and style used at the point of insertion. Press control-+ to scroll to the next text in the list, and control- - to scroll to the previous text (if the entry box is selected the Mac will beep once). Press return or enter to retrieve the verses for the current text. Press tab just to select the contents of the entry box. Only 500 verses can be copied at a time. Use the scroll bar to see a long text. Drag the bottom end of the scroll to resize it. Options on the Back Click the i button as you mouse over the bottom right corner to set the options: Select the text from the pop-up menu showing the list of texts available to Accordance. Click Update to update the list if you have added or rearranged modules. Check Auto Search to have the widget enter and use a reference you have selected in the frontmost application. (Requires UI scripting, see Troubleshooting below.) General Features 24-7

300 24 Notes Other Features Check Auto Insert to have the widget automatically paste the text at the insertion point of the frontmost application. You can use this in conjunction with Auto Search to have the widget automatically replace a selected reference with the actual verses in a word processor. You will just need to invoke the dashboard and then press enter. Check Copy as Citation to have the text display and copy in the citation format as set in the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). Click Done to return to the front. Click command-r to reset this or any other widget. The widget will open Accordance and hide it, if it is not already running. Greek and Hebrew text is retrieved as Unicode and can only be pasted into applications which support Unicode, such as TextEdit, Mellel, Nisus, and Pages. Microsoft Word 2004 does not fully support Unicode Hebrew text. Each user must install the widget themselves. You can option-drag to copy the Accordance.wdgt from ~/Library/Widgets/ to the hard drive so that it will be available for installation by another user. You can install multiple copies of the widget (by clicking the + sign and dragging the Accordance widget from the dashboard bar again) and set each one to a different version for quick access to each text. Older Bible modules do not support the widget, as well as some other Accordance features. The widget will tell you that the text version is too old. There are free downloadable upgrades for some Bibles on the website, others can only be updated by upgrading to a newer CD-ROM. Troubleshooting Enable access for assistive devices at the bottom of the Universal Access pane of System Preferences, must be checked for Auto Search to work correctly. If the widget cannot find your Accordance program, a dialog box will appear in the Finder asking you Where is Accordance? Dismiss the dashboard and scroll through the list of applications to find and select the latest version of Accordance. If you get an error message that No user interaction is allowed, you probably clicked Cancel in the above dialog. Try reloading the widget. To completely start over with the widget, remove any Accordance widgets from the dashboard, remove the file called widget-com.oaktree.widget.accordance. plist from ~/Library/Preferences/, then reload the widget. If you cannot get the widget to find Accordance, check that you are not using unusual characters (such as ƒ) in the names of the folders or hard drive containing Accordance. 24-8

301 AccUpdater Widget This widget lets you quickly compare the current versions of all your modules with the website information on the latest available modules. Certain modules may be available for automatic download by the widget. Using the Widget Bring the dashboard to the front (the default key is F12). Click Check to run a comparison between the list of your installed modules, and the website information. The widget opens and shows a list of modules for which updates are available. Note: This may take several minutes, but you can leave it running ion the dashboard and return later to see the results. Getting Information Click on an item in the list to open a drawer with more information on the update. Clicking on the module name in the drawer will link to a web page listing all CD-ROMs the module appears on. Please note that the newest version may not be present on all of these CD-ROMs. Automatic Downloads A checkbox beside an item indicates that an automatic update is available. Click the items you want to select, or click the Select All button. Click Download Updates to get the updated modules. The widget flips to the back and requests your Mac administrator login and password. It reminds you to quit Accordance Click Continue to perform the updates, or Return to cancel. The AccUpdater will replace your modules with the new downloaded modules. General Features 24-9

302 24 Other Features If the widget gives you an error message, please reopen Accordance and then rerun the widget to see which modules still need updating. It is worth trying the update again. Widget Size Notes Drag the bottom right corner to extend or shorten the scrolling list. Click the X button to close the drawer. Press the Close button to return the widget to its initial size. Click command-r to reset this or any other widget. You must be connected to the internet to get an updated list and see information regarding upgrade paths. Differences Between Accordance on Classic and Mac OS X The Classic version of Accordance 7 that runs on earlier systems (7 9) including the PC emulator has the following differences from the OS X application: All Preferences are shared and stored in the Accordance folder. The Quit item is in the File menu not the Application menu. The Preferences item is in the Edit menu not the Application menu. Show All Windows is active only when windows are hidden. Command-H for Hide Accordance and command-m for Minimize Window do not work. Text smoothing cannot be set within Accordance, but only in the Appearance Control Panel. (Text smoothing makes the Hebrew font very ragged on the screen.) Some font sizes have no bit maps so will appear very ragged (particularly 9, 11, and 16). Page Setup settings are saved with a saved window. 3D maps are not supported in 68K systems. The two-button mouse is not supported on Classic Mac systems, but is supported within Accordance. Control-click performs the same actions as a right-click. Auto fade of Instant Details is not supported. Spell checking of Edit windows is not supported below OS

303 25 Printing and Saving Chapter Contents: Printing the Contents of a Window Setting the Page Details Saving in Accordance Saving a Window as an Accordance File Saving Groups of Windows Saving Text in a Text File Saving Graphics as a PICT File Greek and Hebrew Export Options Unicode Transliteration

304 25 Printing and Saving Printing the Contents of a Window In Accordance you can print the contents of any window (except the Instant Details box) virtually exactly as they appear on the screen. To print a window, bring it to the front by clicking on it (or using the Window menu), and then select Print (File menu or -P). The Printer dialog box which opens depends on the type of printer you have You can also print a selection of text in any text pane or other text window such as a Table, Analysis, or Parsing window, or part of the image in a graphics window. Use the mouse to select the text or image you want to print, then select Print Selection (File menu).. The print commands reflect the options currently set in the Page Setup dialog box. The Page Setup dialog box allows you to change paper size, page orientation, and other printing options that correspond to the capabilities of your printer. To change these options, select Page Setup (File menu or control- - P). The Page Setup dialog box is a standard Macintosh dialog box and is described in the User s Guide that came with your computer. Setting the Page Details 25-2 The printout also reflects the current settings in the Print Settings dialog box, which appears when you select Print Settings (File menu or option- -P) It allows you to control the margins and other aspects of printing windows. The options you set in the dialog box are retained and remain in effect whenever you print from Accordance. This is true even if you quit the program. To print using different options, you must change the settings in the dialog box. The new settings will then remain in effect until the next time you change them. Setting the Margins and Units The Margins section allows you to set the margins for printing windows with text. Enter the desired margin sizes into each appropriate entry box. The Pane separation box allows you to specify the distance between the columns on your page. This option is used in conjunction with the Print all panes check box. The Units radio buttons let you choose between inch and millimeter units for the numerical settings. Note: When printing a graphics window (such as a Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram, Construct, or Display window), the left and top margins are used to determine its position on the page.

305 Multiple Pane Printing Options The options in the Multipane printing section help you to format the appearance of the printout of windows with text panes. These options also apply when you select Print Selection. Checking the Print all panes check box results in a printout that contains the text from all the panes in the front window. If this box is not checked, only the selected pane is printed. The Columns pop-up menu lets you decide which panes, if any, are printed as columns or as interleaved verses. Top Panes Only (the default setting) prints the top row of panes as columns and interleaves the bottom row of columns. All Panes prints both rows of panes as columns. None (All Interleaved) prints all the panes in an interleaved fashion, so that the text of the verse in the first pane is followed by the text from each of the other panes. Tool and User Notes panes display the entire text, but print only the entries relating to the Bible verses showing in the window. Commentaries with long entries for the verses are best printed interleaved. Parallel Verses When printing vertical panes, Accordance automatically makes sure that each break in the text begins on the same line in all of the columns. This means that a verse or section begins at the same place on the page in all of the text panes, even if different font sizes and display formats are used. This feature allows you to print parallel texts without worrying if one text is getting ahead of another on the page. The Print pane name check box adds the name of the module for each pane to the printout. Columns show the name at the head of the column on each page, while interleaved panes show the name before each entry. General Options The Include heading details check box is used to specify whether the contents of the entry or description box should be printed at the top of the first page, to remind you of the pop-up menu settings in the window, and the search argument. In the Parallel window, checking this box also prints the selected pericope title. General Features 25-3

306 25 Printing and Saving Checking the Include page number check box adds page numbers to the printout. The printout can preserve the width of the text window on the screen. To do this, check the Page width same as window check box. In effect, using this option overrides the right margin setting and makes the width of the output identical to the width of the window. If the Page width same as window box is checked, each pane prints with the same width as in the Search window. If you are printing multiple panes and the Page width same as window box is not checked, Accordance fits the columns to the page width you have determined in your settings. The relative widths of multiple panes are preserved so each column on the page is proportional to its corresponding text pane in the window. In either case, the width of the columns in your printout is determined by the relative width of the text panes on the screen. For information on changing the width of a text pane, see Chapter 6. You can format the printout of your text as single spaced, double spaced, or triple spaced by using the Line spacing pop-up menu. Single spacing makes the printed text appear similar to that in the window, while double or triple spacing adds extra spaces between each line in the printed version, so that notes can be written between the lines. Text Display When you print a window containing text, the Print command uses the options that govern the display of that text on the screen, including the various fonts, sizes, styles, and colors. The text display options for a window or a text pane can be set using the Set windowtype Display item (Display menu or -T). If you have highlighting displayed, or the Compare text highlights, these will be printed with the text, see Chapters 6 and 17. Note: If the window is displaying the entire text of the module (such as a tool), you will get a warning that you are about to print a large number of verses or paragraphs. You may also be reminded to check the copyright notice pertaining to this module. Hint: To avoid printing an entire tool, you can: 1. set the Show pop-up menu to Articles or Paragraphs; or 2. select a range in the tool browser, or 3. select only the text you want to print and choose Print Selection (File menu). Saving in Accordance In Accordance, you can save most windows so you can reopen them later. The only windows which cannot be saved as Accordance files are the Details and the reports in the Display menu. However, Details windows are saved together with the Search window from which they are derived. Display windows with pictures can also be saved. 25-4

307 You can also save all open windows to preserve an entire session. Saving windows in either of these two ways creates a file that Accordance can reopen at any time. Double-clicking on these types of documents automatically opens Accordance. When you close a window or windows or quit Accordance, you will get a dialog box asking whether you want to save any unsaved windows, unless you suppress the save warning in the General page of the Preferences dialog (Application or Edit menu or -,). (See Chapter 23- Working with Windows.) You can also save the contents of windows or individual text panes so they can be opened in another program. The contents of text windows can be saved as text files in either ASCII or Rich Text Format (RTF). The contents of graphics windows (such as Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram, Construct, or Display windows) can be saved as PICT files. See below. Saving a Window as an Accordance File To save a window or a workspace as an Accordance file, bring the window to the front by clicking in it or using the Windows menu. Then choose Save (File menu or - S). The standard Save dialog box appears: This dialog box enables you to choose the location and enter the name under which you want to save the window file. The box labeled Save As: contains the current name of the window in Accordance (with any colon in the name replaced by a period). To save the window in a file under another name, enter the new name into this box and click the Save button. The default save location in OS X is user/documents/accordance files, but you can navigate to any other location. For more information on using the Save dialog, see the Macintosh User s Guide that came with your computer. Single tabs in a workspace cannot be saved, unless they are first detached using Detach Tab (Window menu or option- -T). Opening a Saved File To open a saved window, select Open (File menu or -O). You can also double-click on the file in the Finder to launch Accordance and open the window. This window appears on the screen at the location in which it was last saved. It also becomes the active window, is brought to the front and the search is automatically performed. The name you enter in the Save dialog box becomes the name of the Accordance file but does not affect the window name when the file is reopened. If you want to change the name of the front window, it is best to do so first by choosing Name from the Set submenu (Window menu or option- -N). After you change the window name, the new name appears as the default in the Save dialog box. You can then save the window with the same or a different name. However, if you save a workspace, the name you give it in the Save dialog immediately becomes the title of the workspace. (See Chapter 23-Working with Windows.) General Features 25-5

308 25 Printing and Saving Repeated Save Once you have saved a window, or if you open a saved window, choosing Save or -S again does not bring up the dialog box. Instead, any changes you have made in the window are saved to the same file, and overwrite the previous file. If you want to save the window with a new name or location, and preserve your previously saved file, choose Save As (File menu) to bring up the Save dialog box again. Saving Groups of Windows You can also preserve an entire search or your current working set-up by saving all the open windows and workspaces, except for report windows. To save all the open independent windows, select Save Session (File menu). When you select this item, the standard Save dialog box appears with the prompt Save windows as:. Enter the name for your saved session into the entry box and click OK. If you reopen this file, the windows open and appear on the screen in the sizes and locations at which they were saved. Also the searches defined in the entry box of each window are automatically performed. Any workspaces that have not previously been saved with another name will reopen with the name of the session and a number. Hint: Use the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) to save a specific arrangement of windows to use at the start of each session. If you delete any search arguments the windows are reopened empty, and ready for a new search. There is also an option to reopen the windows that were in use each time you quit Accordance. Unique Window Names If you have other windows open when you open a group of linked windows, the search cannot be performed if the linked window names are no longer unique. In other words, if you have a Construct window named Greek construct already open and then reopen a windows file which contains a Construct window named Greek construct, the search will not be performed until you close the former window to make the link reference unique. Hint: Since the default names given to windows may be identical, it is a good idea to rename the Construct windows that form a search before you save them, as discussed in the previous section. Saving Text in a Text File 25-6 You can save the text contents of any window as a text file. You can then reopen this text file in another program such as a word processor. You can save the text of any window that contains only text, such as the text pane of a Search, Tools, Parallel, User Notes or Tools, Text or Reference List window, a Parsing window, an Analysis window, or a Table window. The text of these windows can be saved either as a plain ASCII text file or in Rich Text Format (RTF). These files can then be opened by any program that can convert these types of text files.

309 Note: Accordance cannot open text files (except as an import into a user tool). To save independent windows so they can be reopened later in Accordance, use the Save, Save As or Save Session options described in the preceding section. To save the text from a text pane or a window as a text file, make the text pane active by clicking anywhere in the pane, or bring the window to the front. Select Plain Text from the Save As Text File submenu (File menu). This brings up the standard Save dialog box. Simply type the desired name instead of untitled.txt in the box named Save as: and click Save. The prompt above the entry box specifies the type of text you are saving. Plain text is saved without any font and style information for the text or the verse references. This option is dimmed if the Greek & Hebrew Preferences are set to export text as Unicode, see below. To preserve the font and style information, save the text in Rich Text Format (RTF). Select RTF from the Save As Text File submenu (File menu). Most standard word processors can open files that are stored in RTF and display them with the same font and style information that you see in the window on the screen. For more information about setting the text display format, see Chapter 5. Saving Graphics as a PICT File You can also save the graphical contents of Map, Timeline, Graph, Diagram, Construct, or image Display windows as a PICT file. PICT files can be opened by many graphics programs, and imported as a graphic into most page layout programs and some word processors. Note: Accordance cannot open PICT files. To save graphic windows so they can be reopened later in Accordance, use the Save, Save As or Save Session options instead. Note: Up to version 6.5, Pict files from drawings like the map and Timeline could be opened and edited in most drawing or painting programs, but with the implementation of Quartz smoothing in 6.6, this type of PICT file is no longer supported, except for the Diagram window. To save the graphics from a window as a PICT file, bring the window to the front and select Save As PICT File (File menu). This brings up the standard Save dialog box. To save the graphic, simply type the desired name into the box named Save windowtype picture as: and click Save. The prompt on the entry box specifies the type of window whose graphic you are saving. Copying and Pasting Graphics When a graphic window is in front the Copy (Edit menu or -C) changes to Copy Picture. This allows you to copy the entire image to the clipboard at its full siz,e and make it available for pasting into any program which accepts PICT images. If you select part or all of the image in a graphics window, the Copy changes to Copy Picture Selection. Select All (Edit menu or -A) lets you select all the picture as shown and copy it at the size and resolution displayed in the window. General Features 25-7

310 25 Printing and Saving Greek and Hebrew Export Options When Greek or Hebrew text is exported from Accordance, whether by copying, dragging, or saving as text, it is affected by the current options in the Preferences dialog box. Choosing the Greek & Hebrew page of Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) lets you specify the appearance of these original languages in the exported text. The options fall into these groups: Keep the original fonts but these fonts must be available to the word processor (on the same Mac they are automatically available), and Yehudit is not a true rightto-left font. Convert to other traditional fonts (with the same issues as above), or the Hebrew to WorldScript for older Mac systems. Convert to transliteration (Rosetta or plain English). Convert to Unicode (which offers cross-platform compatibility and true right to left in Hebrew, but is supported in the clipboard only in OS X. In older systems you must save the text as RTF file). Note: When copying and pasting text, these options are applied to the clipboard only when you leave Accordance. However, if you drag and drop text between windows, even within Accordance, these options (except for Unicode) will be applied to the text in the new location. Note: Text copied to the clipboard in Accordance retains its font and style information (except for the Superscript/Subscript styles, and SMALL CAPS which are converted to ALL CAPS). When you paste into another program which accepts font and style information from the clipboard, the fonts and styles used are preserved. However, not all word processors accept this information from the clipboard. Saving the text as an RTF file (see above) lets you keep all this information, and avoids the need to reapply the fonts, sizes and styles to the different elements of the text. Note: In OS X, programs that implement Quartz smoothing also tend to substitute certain high-ascii characters in Accordance fonts. In particularly the apple character appeared in place of the long overstrike rough breathing mark. Export of Helena text now converts this into a correct rough breathing (as well as the rough breathing/grave combination before E). Unicode Export The Export all characters with Unicode format checkbox converts all the fonts in the text to standard Unicode format, supported on OS X and on Windows. This options overrides and dims the Export characters as: options below. It is described in more detail below. 25-8

311 Greek Font Conversion The Export characters as: pop-up menu allows you to specify how you want any Greek in the text to appear. Choosing Helena keeps the Greek characters as they are in Accordance so that the text appears like this: Gen. 1:1 eṅ aórchvø eṗoi hsen oj qeo\ß to\n oujrano\n kai«th\n ghvn Selecting SPIonicconverts the characters to the free font from SBL, TekniaGreek converts the characters to the font from Teknia Software, Graeca II converts to Linguist s Software s newer Greek fonts. Transliteration converts the characters to the Rosetta font: Gen. 1:1 en archeœç epoieœsen ho theos ton ouranon kai teœn geœn Choosing English converts the Greek to a simple English font so it can be saved as plain ASCII text and appears like this: Gen. 1:1 en arche epoiesen ho theos ton ouranon kai ten gen The Strip accents and breathing marks check box tells Accordance to save the text without the accents and breathing marks. This option is dimmed when Transliteration or English are selected in the pop-up menu. Hebrew Font Conversion There are additional options for the Hebrew text. The Export characters as: pop-up menu allows you to specify how you want any Hebrew in the text to appear. Choosing Yehudit keeps the Hebrew characters as they are in Accordance so that the text appears like this: X r`dadh t Ea w Mŷ AmDÚvAh t Ea My IhølTa aâ rd;b ty IvaérV;b Gen. 1:1 Selecting Hebrew WorldScript converts the characters to the keyboard layout used by Nisus, Israeli, and other Hebrew right-to-left fonts in OS 7-9. The text can now be used in a Hebrew right-to-left non-unicode word processor. Selecting SPTiberian converts the characters to the free font from SBL, SuperHEBREW converts the characters to the popular font that uses a slightly different key mapping than Yehudit (and others such as such as Jerusalem ), Hebraica II converts to Linguist s Software s newer Hebrew fonts. Transliteration converts the characters to the Rosetta font: Gen. 1:1 b reœ}sûiyt baœraœ} }elohiym }eœt hasûaœmayim w }eœt haœ}aœresω Choosing English converts the Hebrew to a simple English font so it can be saved as plain ASCII text and appears like this: Gen. 1:1 bre shiyt bara elohiym et hashamayim w et ha arets General Features 25-9

312 25 Printing and Saving Stripping Diacritical Marks The Strip characters: pop-up menu lets you selectively remove accents and marks from exported Hebrew text. None leaves the text as it appears in Accordance. Cantillation only strips the te amim (accents) only. Vowels & Cantillation also removes vowels and dagesh, but leaves the sin/shin dot, and maqqef. All Marks leaves only the consonants. Note: Cantillation marks, which now appear in the tagged BHS-W4, are either poorly supported in many other fonts, including Unicode, or not supported at all. They are stripped automatically when options other than Yehudit or Unicode are selected. Note: The Strip characters option also applies to text exported as Transliteration (Rosetta font). Hebrew Direction The Reverse direction of Hebrew characters check box allows you to convert the Hebrew text for use in an English word processor. The right-to-left direction is used for Hebrew in Accordance. If this box is checked, the text will appear in an English word processor exactly as it does in Accordance. The line length will be set by the width of the text pane, and fixed by return characters, so that it cannot easily be altered. Within each line the text will read from right to left. If this box is not checked, the text will be reversed in an English word processor. The Reverse direction check box is dimmed when Unicode, Hebrew WorldScript, Transliteration, or English are selected in the pop-up menu. In these cases the logical order of the characters should be retained, and the text should not be reversed. Accordance ignores the state of this check box unless a Hebrew font is selected. Line Length and Text Wrap When you open a file (or paste a selection) containing non-unicode Hebrew text into an English word processor, you may need to select the text, make the text width wider than the line length and right-justify it. It should now appear exactly as it does in Accordance. However all word processing features will work from left-to-right. You can set the font size and pane width in Accordance before you export the text, as described in Chapter

313 Unicode Unicode fonts have been developed to simplify the use of multiple languages. Unicode is a character coding system that assigns a standard and unique number to each character in most modern and many ancient alphabets. It is becoming the standard for the exchange of text between computer platforms and systems. Unlike the fonts in Accordance, there is no need to put the Greek alpha or the Hebrew aleph instead of a or A, since each character has its own fixed position. This allows you to use the special characters from different languages in papers, s, webpages, etc., without worrying whether or not the reader on a different platform or program has access to our specific fonts. Unicode is supported on Mac OS X and on Windows 2000 and above. Unicode Fonts Fonts for Unicode are widely available, and many are free. Some large fonts like Cardo, Lucida Grande for Mac, and Times New Roman on Windows, include most of the characters you are likely to need. Other like True Athena, SBL Hebrew and SIL Ezra just contain a specific set for one language. However, if a character is missing from the chosen font, it will be substituted from another font so the text is still readable. Accordance and Unicode Accordance does not use Unicode fonts in the text display, nor can it import text in Unicode. However, Accordance does allow you to export Greek, Hebrew, Syriac, and transliteration as Unicode. This means that the characters are remapped to the correct Unicode characters. In Mac OS X this feature is supported for copy and paste (and drag and drop) as well as Save as Text File (RTF), but on the PC emulator and other older Mac systems, it is only supported for Save as Text File. Exporting to Unicode Select the Greek & Hebrew page of Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,). Check the Unicode checkbox to convert the text to Unicode. You will want to to strip the cantillation marks in Hebrew, if you find that your word processor and chosen font do not display them correctly. Now export your text by any method if you are in OS X, and by saving as an RTF Text file if you have an older system. Word Processors The converted text can be used in any word processor that supports Unicode including TextEdit on Mac OS X, Mellel, Nisus, and Word for Windows 2000 and above. On Mac OS X we recommend the Mellel word processor (available at for Hebrew and many other languages. In general you will need to select the font, and set the text direction and justification for mainly Hebrew text, but all the characters in mixed text should be correct. Each program is responsible for adjusting the spaces between the characters, and they tend to appear different in each font. General Features 25-11

314 25 Printing and Saving On Windows (including users with the emulator) the Unicode export to RTF is supported by Word (set the font to Times New Roman or Cardo). Word for Mac 2004 does not fully support right-to-left, and does not allow editing of the text. However, you can paste Hebrew Unicode into Word by: First selecting a Unicode font such as Cardo or Lucida Grande, Then selecting Paste Special from the Edit menu, and Unformatted Text from the submenu (rather than Styled Text). Unicode Character Entry Outside of Accordance To enter the characters from another language when typing in Unicode in OS X: Open System Preferences> International>Input Menu Select the Character palette and /or Keyboard viewer as desired, and the languages you wish to be able to enter. Check Show input menu in menu bar. Now you can select the language from the Input menu (flag) in the top right of the screen when a Unicode application is in front, and type, or select the desired character from the palette or keyboard viewer. Transliteration There are many different transliteration schemes for Greek and especially Hebrew. Accordance attempts to follow the guidelines of the Society for Biblical Literature for the transliteration from Greek and Hebrew into the Rosetta transliteration font. The English transliteration (or transcription) is displayed in the Instant Details box and the Parsing window. It is intended for users who cannot read the original languages. It can be turned off in the Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) and Set Parsing Display (Display menu or -T). It is also convenient for export to ASCII text such as documents. None of these conversions is perfectly accurate, since they are based on computer algorithms rather than a word by word analysis corrected by scholars. Whenever transliterated text is exported, it should be checked and edited as needed. Export to Transliteration Copy As Transliteration (Edit menu) converts the text to Rosetta transliteration. If the Preferences are set to export to Unicode, this allows you to convert Greek and Hebrew to Unicode Transliteration in one operation, but this option works only for Copy-and-Paste and only in OS X. It is not supported on older systems, nor for drag and drop, nor Save as Text File. Therefore, to export Greek or Hebrew as transliteration in Unicode as an RTF file: Set Greek & Hebrew Preferences to export text as Unicode. Select the text and choose Copy as Transliteration. Paste the text into a user tool or note Edit window and click Update. Save the text as an RTF Text file.

315 Appendix A Setting Preferences Contents: Descriptions of each page in the Preferences dialog box

316 A Setting Preferences The Preferences dialog box lets you set defaults which apply throughout Accordance, and remain in effect unless you change them, even when you quit and reopen the program. Selecting Preferences (Application or Edit menu or -,) for the first time opens the dialog box to the first page. The list in the top left corner of the dialog box allows you to select the page showing the set of preferences you want to view or change. Some items do not appear on the list unless at least one of the relevant modules is added. For example, you will not see Map Window Layers on the list unless you have added the Bible Atlas to Accordance. Clicking OK closes the dialog box and saves ALL the changes you have made to the different pages. Clicking Cancel closes the dialog box without saving ANY changes. When you reopen the Preferences, the dialog box will open to the last page you viewed. General A-2 These options apply to many Accordance windows. Open initial window as workspace with tabs opens the first new window in a workspace (applies whenever no windows are open). The Suppress Drag and Drop text editing check box suppresses the drag and drop feature described in Chapter 6-Viewing the Text. The Default startup portion of the dialog box allows you to set the windows which open up each time you launch Accordance. The pop-up menu lets you choose between: Default Search Window (opens a Search window with the default settings) Default Session (opens a default set of windows) Last Session (returns to all the windows open when the program was last quit). Clicking Set Default Session saves the currently open windows as the default set. The button is dimmed unless Default Session is selected in the pop-up menu. The Information portion of the dialog box allows you to suppress many of the informational dialog windows in order to speed up working with Accordance. The Suppress opening splash screen check box suppresses the Accordance logo window that appears when Accordance is launched.

317 The Suppress opening text information check box suppresses the About The Text dialog box which appears the first time you open each module during a session with Accordance. Note: You are still responsible to read and note the copyright information on each text that you use. The Suppress save warning for all windows check box suppresses the alert which appears when you close a window (except for the Edit windows for user notes and user tools and edit mode of map user layers). The Suppress information tips check box suppresses the alerts which remind you of features which are not immediately obvious (such as the effect of holding down the option key). It is recommended that you check this box only after you have become familiar with using Accordance. Appearance The Resource Palette section affects the display of this floating window: The Buttons radio buttons toggle the display between icon and text buttons. The Orientation radio buttons toggle the shape between vertical and horizontal arrangemets. The Browser section includes: The Font Size pop-up menu affects the browser pane for tools and user tools, the Search All window, and the Arrange Modules window. Suppress tool auto-sizing suppresses the automatic resizing of the width of the tools browser. The Other section includes various global settings: Auto-scrolling sets the speed at which text scrolls automatically with a commandclick on the scroll arrows. Confine hypertext to the same workspace amplifies only within the same workspace, so that if you amplify from a tab, a new amplify tab will open in the same workspace instead of using an available open window elsewhere. Use white background for pictures removes the black border around small pictures in the picture display window. Appendices A-3

318 A Setting Preferences Use SBL Standard notation for Bible text display displays and exports book abbreviations in Bible text using the SBL recommendations, for example 2Sam. 1:1 becomes 2 Sam 1:1. This option does not affect the notation of the entry of verse references in Accordance. Use European notation for verse entry and display uses a comma (,) in place of a colon (:) to divide chapter and verse, and a period (.) in place of a comma to separate a list of references. Note: The above two display changes affect new text panes only. Turn off text and graphics smoothing removes the Quartz smoothing of text and graphics. This check box appears only in OS X. Text Display These options set the default display of all Bible texts (the Font is ignored in Greek and Hebrew and the size is set in proportion). The options are identical to those for individual texts described in Chapter 6-Viewing the Text. These display characteristics can be set for individual texts, and saved as the default for that text, by selecting Set Text Display (Display menu or -T). Note: If you make any changes to this page, and subsequently click OK on any page of the Preferences dialog box, ALL the current settings on this page become the default for ALL your Bible texts. Tools Display A-4 These options set the default display of all tools. These characteristics can be set for individual tools, and saved as the default for that tool, by selecting Set Tool Display (Display menu or -T) as described in Chapter 14-The Tools Window. The Text and Alternate Text pop-up menus set the Bible text shown in Instant Details, or opened when you click on a verse reference (when no recyclable text window is open). The alternate text will be used if the verse is not found in the first text.

319 Note: If you make any changes to this page, and subsequently click OK on any page of the Preferences dialog box, ALL the current settings on this page will become the default for ALL your tools. Hint: The settings which appear in this page and the previous page each time they are opened, are the current default settings for the first English Bible text, and the first Reference tool, in the pop-up menus. These are also the default settings for new texts and tools added to Accordance. Therefore it is a good idea to keep the defaults for the first Bible text and Reference tool the same as your preferences for most texts. Greek & Hebrew The Greek & Hebrew entry options affect the keyboard entry of Greek and Hebrew. When checked, the Automatic final letter check box alters the form of certain Greek and Hebrew letters depending on their position in the word. As you enter the word, the final form, for example of the Greek sigma or the Hebrew mem, appears. But if this letter is followed by another letter, the previous letter reverts to the regular form. Unchecking the box keeps the characters exactly as you type them. Appendices A-5

320 A Setting Preferences The Automatic diacritical marks check box affects the various overstrike characters accents and breathing marks and their combinations in Greek, and vowel points and other marks in Hebrew, as well as the other Accordance fonts. Checking the box lets you enter any of the overstrike positions of the specific accent or mark, and Accordance will put the character or the combination with the correct amount of overstrike for the previous or following letter. Unchecking the box keeps the characters exactly as you type them. When the Use Israeli keyboard layout for Hebrew check box is checked, the keyboard entry is converted to the layout used by Nisus, Mellel, and other Hebrew right-to-left word processors. Use Greek Polytonic keyboard layout converts the keyboard entry to a modern Greek keyboard layout for Helena (not Sylvanus Uncial). The accent characters use the modern Greek keyboard layout character positions, but, like the Accordance overstrike accents they are typed after rather than before the vowel. The iota subscript is entered with option-i followed by i. The Export options affect the appearance of Greek and Hebrew text when exported from Accordance into another program, whether by copy and paste, drag and drop, or saving as a text file. These options are described in detail in Chapter 25-Printing and Saving. Compare Text These options affect the comparison of texts in the Search window and the List of differences. The Compare pop-up menu defines what kind of differences are highlighted when comparing grammatically tagged texts. Checking an Ignore checkbox removes the item from the comparison: Upper case (and final forms) Punctuation Greek accents and breathing marks All Hebrew pointing or Hebrew cantillation only The Color Codes pop-up menus set the colors used for Replaced, Inserted, and Deleted words. A-6

321 Instant Details Box These options affect the items displayed in the floating Instant Details box. Set to automatically fade turns on the autofade which fades the Instant Details box whenever there is no text to display. The Font size: pop-up menu lets you choose Small. Medium, or Large. The other options will be dimmed until a Keyed English text or a grammatically tagged text is added. They do not affect the parsing of selected words in the Parsing window. These options are described in Chapter 5-Floating Windows. Arrange Tags These options determine the display order of the grammatical tags. The arrangement of the tags affects the order in which they are displayed in the Instant Details, Parsing, Syntax, and Analysis windows. It applies to full tags and abbreviations but not to the single letter tag codes. Drag any item to a new position in the column. Click Reset All to restore the default Accordance settings. Hint: To have the tense, voice, and mood of verbs appear before person and number, drag all three to the top of the column. Since these tags only occur in verbs, they will not affect the display of other parts of speech. Appendices A-7

322 A Setting Preferences Citation These options affect the format of the text and references when copied as a citation. This page is similar to the Text Display dialog and Preference page, but the format is only applied to text when copied as a citation, either from the Edit menus or using the Accordance widget. A citation usually groups the text together, with a separate reference for all the included verses, but this page offers many options for tailoring the citation to your specific needs. The Content portion of the dialog box allows you to set the format for the display of the text of the verses. The Markers appear before and after the body of the text. A single character is normally entered, but up to 7 are accepted. The Show as: pop-up menu specifies the layout of the verses. Paragraphs copies the text of contiguous verses as a continuous stream, starting a new line only for a new paragraph. Paragraphs With Space is the same as the Paragraph option except that there is a blank line before each new section begins. Separate Verses causes the text to begin a new line at the start of each verse. Separate With Space is the same as the Separate Verses option except that it displays a blank line between each verse in the text. References Only is dimmed in this case as it does not apply to citations. Note: Paragraphs and Paragraphs With Space display dim the Above Verse and Below Verse options for the Reference display, and vice-versa, as these options are mutually incompatible. The checkboxes may not apply to all texts. Copy text as one block dims the Show as pop-up menu and copies all the text as a single paragraph, including separate paragraphs and discontinuous verses. Suppress poetry removes the short lines so that all the text appears as prose. Hide superscripts displays the text without the superscripted numbers and letters which refer to the footnotes. Scale font size to resets the font size to the size specified in the pop-up menu. A-8

323 The Content References portion of the dialog box allows you to format the verse references within the text. The initial verse reference is always omitted when copying as citation. The Markers appear before and after each verse reference. The Format pop-up menu allows you to specify how the references should appear. Above Verse adds the reference on a line by itself, with the text of the verse beginning on the following line. Before Verse adds the full reference at the beginning of each subsequent verse. After Verse adds the reference at the end of the last line of the text of the verse. Omit Entire Reference copies the text of the verses without references. Omit Book and Chapter adds only the verse number. Omit Book Name Only displays the chapter and verse numbers. The checkboxes offer additional options for the references. Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether you want to display the full book name or an abbreviation. It is dimmed unless Before verse is selected. Ignore reference style makes the verse references plain style like the text. The Citation Reference formats the citation before or after the text. The Markers appear before and after the citation itself. The Location pop-up menu specifies where the citation references should appear. Above Citation places the reference on a separate line above the text. Before Citation places the reference at the front of the first line of the text. After Citation places the reference at the end of the text. Below Citation places the full reference on a separate line below the text. The checkboxes offer additional options. Abbreviate book name allows you to specify whether you want to display the full book name or an abbreviation. Include text abbreviation includes an abbreviation of the name of the text as part of the reference, i.e. Gen. 1:1 (KJV). Note: Font and style information are preserved when copying from Accordance except when overridden in this dialog box, but not when copying the citation via the Accordance widget which always pastes plain text. Note: The Yehudit font is not fully supported in conjunction with the citation feature. You can paste a Hebrew citation into an Edit window in Accordance using Yehudit, but you should choose separate verses in the Show as pop-up menu. Outside Accordance the citation is designed to work together with conversion to Unicode fonts. Appendices A-9

324 A Setting Preferences Speech These options set the voice and speed used by Accordance to read selected text. Chapter 13-Amplifying your Selection describes these options in detail. Search Window A-10 This page affect the settings of new Search windows. The Text pop-up menu determines which text will appear in the search text and display text pop-up menus. The two Search for radio buttons let you set the window to search for Words or Verses. If you choose Verses, an asterisk is placed in the argument entry box and the entire text is displayed. The Range and Field pop-up menus are dimmed, but display the settings you have selected. Checking the Show More options checkbox opens the Search window with these pop-up menus visible: The Field pop-up menu lets you set the field for search commands. The Range pop-up menu lets you choose from a predefined range. The Add context pop-up menu lets you add surrounding verses to the hit verses in the display. The After clicking on details, show: check boxes set the tabs that appear after clicking the Details button on any Search window. Checking any item opens a tab for that detail each time the Details button is clicked. Graph and Table also apply to Reference tools.

325 Note: Checking the Concordance item may significantly slow the opening of the Details workspace. The Text, Search for, Field and Verse settings on this page affect only the Default Search window when Accordance is launched, and Search windows opened from the New submenu (File menu or -N). Show More options, Add context, and the Details apply to all new Search windows. Parallel Window This page lets you set the defaults for new Parallel windows. Unlike all the other default settings, for Parallel windows you can set separate default fields, number of panes, and texts for each parallel selected in the upper pop-up menu. See Chapter 15-Parallels for details of these options. User Notes Window These preferences set the default set of notes, text order, and highlight display of new User Notes windows, and the opening of new Edit windows. See Chapter 19-User Notes for details of these options. Appendices A-11

326 A Setting Preferences Edit Window This page sets defaults which apply to all new Edit windows for both user notes and user tools. The Block pop-up menu lets you select a Small block when editing user tools. This will update the tool faster but more often. The Medium or a Large size block needs updating less often but takes longer to edit and refresh the Edit window. See Chapter 19-User Notes, and Chapter 20-User Tools for details of these options. Map Window Layers The pop-up menus display the same backgrounds and layers as the Map window. You can choose which layers are displayed whenever you open a new Map window, whether from the New submenu (File menu) or by amplifying from another module. These options are described in Chapter A2- Choosing the Layers. A-12

327 Map Window Display These options set the default display of all new Map windows. The options are identical to those for individual windows which can be set and also saved as the default, by selecting Set Map Display (Display menu or -T) as described in Chapter A5-Setting Map Display and Defaults. Timeline Layers The pop-up menus let you choose which layers and date scheme are displayed whenever you open a new Timeline window. These options are described in Chapter T1-The Timeline Window. Appendices A-13

328 A Setting Preferences Timeline Display These options set the default display of all new Timeline windows. The options are identical to those for individual windows which can be set and also saved as the default, by selecting Set Timeline Display (Display menu or -T) as described in Chapter T5-Setting Timeline Display and Defaults. Syntax Window These options set the default font, color, size, and style of the English text in new Syntax windows. Greek or Hebrew text will be sized and styled to match the English. See Chapters 13 and G5 for details. A-14

329 Appendix B Menu Reference and Key Commands This appendix gives a brief description of each menu command in the order that it appears in the list of menus on the screen. The main purpose of this appendix is to serve as a quick reference for reviewing the basic functions of individual menus in Accordance. At the end of the appendix is a list of the keyboard shortcuts and the actions which are affected by holding down certain keys.

330 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Keyboard shortcuts are supplied for many of the menu and submenu items in Accordance. The shortcuts are indicated by the command symbol together with the keystroke, for example P. In some items the command symbol is preceded by an arrow, indicating a shift-command, as in P, or the option symbol as in P, or the control symbol as in ^ P. To use a shortcut to execute a menu item, hold down the command, or shift and command, keys and press the keystroke. The menu and other shortcuts are listed at the end of this chapter. An ellipsis ( ) after an item indicates that selecting that item opens a dialog box with further choices. Accordance Menu (in OS X only) About Accordance: Displays basic information about Accordance. About The Text: Displays information for the text or tool that is being searched in the front window. Preferences : Opens a dialog box in which many default preferences can be set. Services: Opens a submenu with options to interact with other programs. Hide Accordance: Hides all Accordance windows. Hide Others: Hides the windows of all other applications, including the Finder. Quit: Closes all open windows and quits Accordance. If you have made a change in any independent window, a dialog box appears to give you the opportunity to save all windows. Note: In Classic OS these items are in the Apple, File and Edit menus. File Menu New: Opens a new window with a default name. The submenu allows you to choose from the different types of window. The new window becomes the active or front window. New Workspace: Opens a new workspace in which subsequent new windows will appear as tabs. B-2

331 New Construct: Opens a new Construct window. The submenu allows you to choose either Simple, Greek, or Hebrew. User Files: Opens a submenu with these items: New User Tool : Creates and saves a new user tool file. Import User Tool : Imports a text file into a user tool. Merge User Tools : Merges two files into one tool. New User Notes : Creates and saves a new user notes file. Merge User Notes : Merges two files into one user notes. Import Bible Text : Imports a text file as a Bible module. Duplicate: Creates a copy of the front window. The name of the new window is the name of the original window followed by a numeral. Duplicate Tab: Creates a copy of the front tab in a workspace. The name of the new tab is the name of the original tab followed by a numeral. Open : Opens a window displaying an entire Accordance module (and adds the module if necessary). The file to be opened is selected in the standard Macintosh Open dialog box. Also opens a window file previously saved in Accordance. The file can contain individual windows or groups of windows. After opening the file, any searches are automatically performed. Close: Closes the front window (the same as clicking the close box in the upper-left corner of the front window). Close Tab: Closes the front tab in a workspace (the same as clicking the tab close button). Close Pane: Closes the selected text pane in the front window containing more than one text pane (the same as clicking the close button). Close All Windows: Closes all open windows without quitting the program. If you have made a change in any independent window, a dialog box appears to give you the opportunity to save all windows. Save: Saves a new or modified front window or workspace as a file which Accordance can open. Save As: Saves the front window or workspace as a file which Accordance can open. Selecting this item brings up the standard Save dialog box. Save Session: Saves all open windows as a single file. Selecting this item brings up the standard Save dialog box. Save As Text File: Opens a submenu with Plain Text and RTF. Saves the text from the front window (or selected text pane) to a text file, either ASCII or Rich Text Format (RTF). If the active window contains graphics, this item changes to Save As PICT File. Page Setup: Allows you to specify information about printing. The dialog is configured for the capabilities of your printer. Print Settings: Allows you to set margins and headings for printing, and specify how multiple panes are printed Print: Prints the contents of the front window. Print Selection: Prints the current selection in a text pane or window. Appendices B-3

332 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Edit Menu Undo/Redo: Reverses any editing operation connected with text entry, including anything that involves copying text into the clipboard. The Redo item reverses the Undo item. Cut: Removes the selected text and stores it in the clipboard. Copy: Stores the selected text in the clipboard without removing it from the window. When a graphic window is in front the item changes to Copy Picture, and copies the whole window for pasting into a program which accepts graphics. If part of the image is selected in certain windows, the Copy changes to Copy Picture Selection. Paste: Replaces any selected text with the contents of the clipboard (if appropriate). If there is only an insertion point, the contents of the clipboard are inserted at that point. Clear: Removes any selected text without storing it in the clipboard. Select All: Selects all the text in the window (or text window pane) in which the cursor is present. Copy As: Opens a submenu with items affecting copying into the clipboard: No Superscript: Stores the selected text without any superscript characters. Citation: Stores the Bible text according to the Citation Preferences. References: Stores all references or the selected verse references from the text pane. Transliteration: Stores the selected text and converts it to Rosetta transliteration. Style Only: Stores the styles of the selected text in any window. The styles include the font, size, style and color. Paste Style: Replaces the styles of selected text with the previously stored styles, in an Edit User layer for maps, an Edit window for user notes or user tools, or the description box of a Construct or Reference List window. Arrange Modules: Opens a special window to rearrange and delete the items in the pop-up menus of Accordance modules. Search Menu B-4 Enter Key Numbers : In a Keyed Bible text, allows you to select numbers from a list which also shows the English transliteration of the dictionary form. After you make your selections, the numbers are entered with the [KEY] command at the location of the insertion point or text selection. In grammatically tagged texts this item changes to Enter Lexical Forms. This item is dimmed in untagged texts.

333 Enter Words : Allows you to select any word in the search text, or in the current field in a tool. After you make your selections, the words are entered at the insertion point or text selection. In grammatically tagged texts this item changes to Enter Inflected Forms. Enter Command: Opens a submenu which allows you to select a command to be inserted at the insertion point or text selection in the entry box of certain windows. AND: Both expressions connected by an AND must be present in the field. OR: Either one or both of the expressions connected by an OR must be present in the search field. NOT: If NOT precedes an expression, the expression cannot appear. If NOT is adjacent to another command, it negates the command. XOR: One but not both of the expressions connected by an XOR must be present in the search field. FOLLOWED BY: The expressions must occur in the specified order in the search field. PRECEDED BY: The expressions must occur in the reverse order. WITHIN: This command specifies the number of words within which the expressions must be found. LINK: Includes the search argument of the linked window. CONTENTS: Includes the verse contents of the linked window. HITS: Uses the word list results of the linked window. MERGE: Uses the search results from a Bible text in a Reference tool, or the results of another window with the same tool but a different field. LINK, CONTENTS, HITS, and MERGE open a dialog box listing open linkable windows, if necessary. RANGE: Searches within the specified temporary range. COUNT: Searches for words that occur the specified number of times. KEY: Searches for the number of the word in a Keyed Bible text. STYLE: Searches for a color highlight style or all styles. FIELD: A dialog box appears, which allows you to select either BEGIN or END. This represents the beginning or end of your search field. Enter Symbol: Opens a submenu which allows you to select a symbol to be inserted at the insertion point or text selection. See Appendix C for a full description of the use of the different symbols. Appendices B-5

334 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Enter Grammatical Tag: Opens a submenu which shows the parts of speech which apply to the current search text. It appears only when the front window is a Search window, the search text is set to a grammatically tagged text, and the window is set to Search for Words. Selecting a part of speech item from the submenu brings up a dialog box appropriate to that part of speech. After you click OK in the dialog, the tagged part of speech is added to the argument entry box in brackets ( [ ] ). Refer to Chapters G7, G8, and G9 for complete listings of the options available for each part of speech in Greek and Hebrew. Tag Entry: Places [TAG] in the argument entry box. The word TAG is selected so you can immediately enter any appropriate tag entry. Define Range: Opens a dialog box for creating and modifying ranges to be used in the search range pop-up menu of a Search window. When a Tool window is in front, this item changes to Define Tool Set. When the Search All window is in front, this item changes to Define Group. Find/Replace: Opens a dialog for editing the text in Edit windows for User Tools or User Notes. The item is dimmed unless an Edit window is in front. Spelling: Opens a dialog box for checking the spelling in Edit windows, in OS 10.4 and above. The item is dimmed unless an Edit window is in front. Greek Hebrew Display Menu B-6 Set windowname Display : Allows you to change the display details of the front window. The options are tailored to the type of front window, and offer additional features which are not immediately obvious from the window itself. It is important to check the available options for each type of window. Show Text As: Opens a submenu with the options for the display of Bible text in verses, paragraphs, or references only. Hide Verse References: Hides the references of the Bible text in the selected text pane. List All Book Names: Opens a window displaying English Bible book names and standard abbreviations, and, in the case of foreign language texts, the alternate names. List Text Differences: Opens a window listing the differences highlighted in the first two text panes. Define Highlight Styles : Opens a dialog box for creating and editing styles used to mark the Bible text.

335 Define Map Layers : Opens a submenu which lets you choose the type of map set or layer to define or modify. The User Layers item is dimmed unless a map window is in front. These options apply only when the Bible Atlas is installed. Define Time Layers : Opens a submenu which lets you choose the type of timeline layer to define or modify. These options apply only when the Timeline is installed. The other items in this menu lets you change the appearance of text you select or enter in the Edit window for user notes and user tools, the description box of Construct and Reference List windows, and in the text box of a User layer for maps. Font: The submenu lets you choose from any font installed on your system. Size: The submenu lets you choose from a range of sizes. Style: The submenu lets you choose the styles of the text, and the options of Superscript and Subscript. Color: The submenu lets you choose from a range of colors. Alignment: The submenu lets you choose left, center, or right justification for a user tool. Selection Menu Mark Selection: Adds bookmarks in the margin of the selected verses or paragraphs. Remove All Marks: Removes all bookmarks from the front window. Add Selection To: Adds the selected verses in the front window to the reference list chosen from the submenu. Add Marked Verses To: Adds the marked verses in the front window to the reference list chosen from the submenu. Remove Selected Verses: Deletes the selected verses from the front Reference List window. Remove Marked Verses: Deletes the marked verses from the front Reference List window. Edit User Note: Opens the Edit window for the selected verse in the front window, allowing you to add or edit a user note. When a User Tool window is in front, the item changes to Edit User Tool. Group: Makes selected items in the Diagram window a single item for moving and copying. Ungroup: Restores the individual items in a group in the Diagram window. Appendices B-7

336 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Amplify Menu B-8 These items are dimmed unless text is selected in an appropriate text pane. The first items each open or recycle a window, and search for the selection in the module chosen from the submenu. The All item at the bottom of each submenu searches all the modules in the submenu. English Texts: English Bibles and other texts Greek Texts: Greek Bibles and other texts Hebrew Texts: Hebrew Bibles and other texts Text Sets: A user-defined set of texts Parallels: Parallel modules (finds selected verses from a Bible text pane). Context: A Text window that contains the entire text of the version in a text pane, so that the context of the selected verses can be viewed with the parallel panes. English Tools: English dictionaries or other tools arranged alphabetically Greek Tools: Greek lexicons Hebrew Tools: Hebrew lexicons Reference Tools: Commentaries and other reference tools arranged by Scripture reference General Tools: Other tools arranged by articles or chapters Tool Sets: A user-defined set of tools Map: Opens a map window and adds the selected place name (if the Bible Atlas is present). Timeline: Opens a Timeline window and adds the selected name (if the Timeline is present). User Tools: General tools created by users User Notes: User notes on Bible verses (finds selected verses from a Bible text pane). Language: Language: Opens a submenu with these options: Parsing: Opens (or recycles) a Parsing window that contains the parsing information for the selected words from a Bible text pane. Diagram: Opens a Diagram window allowing you to create a grammatical diagram of the selection. Speak: Reads the selected text audibly. Syntax: Opens a Syntax window allowing you add comments to a chart containing the selection with its parsing. Search: Opens (or recycles) a Search or Tool window with the same module as the selection, and performs a search for the selected words from a Bible text pane or tool. Search All: Opens (or recycles) the Search All window with the module group chosen from the submenu, and searches for the selection. Favorites: Opens (or recycles) the module chosen from the submenu, and searches for the selection.

337 Window Menu The first five items open and close floating windows which give you access to many features. A check ( ) shows that the window is open. Resource Palette: Lets you open new windows and access Amplify features by clicking on the appropriate button. Instant Details: Displays the parsing details and gloss (or other details) of the word under the cursor. Highlight Palette: Lets you mark the text with the defined highlight styles. Text Palette: Accesses the text edit items from the Display menu. Character Palette: Displays and enters the special characters of the Accordance fonts. Hide Palettes/Show Palettes: Hides or shows all open floating windows together. Window Help: Opens the Accordance Help window relevant to the front window or dialog box. Show All: Brings all Accordance windows to the front (in OS X) and makes all hidden windows visible. Hide: Makes the front window invisible. Set: Opens a submenu with options that apply to the front window or tab: Recycle Contents: Makes the window recyclable so that it will be reused whenever it is appropriate, and adds the recycle symbol. Name: Changes the name of the window. Untie: Removes the scrolling connection between this window and other windows. Tie To: Appears only when appropriate, and connects the scrolling of the front window with that of the selected window. Arrange: Opens a submenu with options that apply to all visible windows and workspaces: Tile Windows: Positions as many open windows as possible so that they fill the screen and can be viewed side by side. Stack Windows: Positions all open windows so the title bar of each window is visible, with the front window on top. Slide Show: Displays the text panes of the workspaces in full screen mode without unnecessary controls and entry boxes. Detach Tab: Converts the front tab to an independent window. Merge Windows: Combines the front two windows into a workspace. The other items in the Window menu are the names of the currently open windows. Hidden windows marked with a diamond ( ). Selecting the name of a window brings it to the front. A check mark ( ) shows the front window. Appendices B-9

338 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Help Menu Accordance Help: Offers interactive help for all the features of Accordance. Keyboard Shortcuts These keystrokes perform the following actions using the key: B-10 Command A selects all the text or objects Command B opens and closes the Instant Details Box, or styles text Bold Command C copies to the clipboard selected text or graphics, or a graphic window Command D duplicates the front tab or window Command E opens the Define Highlight Styles dialog box Command F opens the Find dialog box if a Map or Timeline window is in front, opens the Find/Replace dialog if an Edit window is in front, otherwise opens the Search All window Command G groups selected objects in the Diagram window Command H hides Accordance (in OS X only) Command I tiles the windows on the screen, or styles text Italic Command J lets you select a word or inflected form to search Command K recycles the front window Command L lets you select a Key number or lexical form to search, reopens the last Define dialog box if a Map or Timeline window is in front, or adds/removes a Scripture link in an Edit window Command M puts the front window in the dock (in OS X only) Command N opens a new Search window Command O opens an Accordance file as a new window Command P prints the contents of the front window Command Q quits Accordance Command R opens the Define Range, Define Tool Set, or Define Group dialog box Command S saves a new or changed front window or workspace as an Accordance file Command T lets you set the display of the front window, or styles text Plain Command U lets you edit a User Layer on a map, or a user note or tool Command V pastes the contents of the clipboard, or styles text Underline Command W closes the front window Command X deletes selected text and places it in the clipboard Command Y closes the selected pane in the front window

339 Command Z undoes the last text edit or diagram action Command 1 opens a Simple Construct window Command 2 opens a Greek Construct window Command 3 opens a Hebrew Construct window Command 4 searches for the selection in a duplicate of the front Search or Tool window Command 5 displays the context of the selected verse Command 7 adds a bookmark to the selected verse or article Command 8 highlights the selected text with the previously used style Command 9 reads the selected text audibly Command 0 shows all windows Command \ hides the front window Command? opens Accordance Help Command, (comma) opens the Preferences dialog box Command ' (quote) opens the Details workspace, or in a Details window brings its Search window to the front Command ; toggles the Search window between searching for Verses and Words, and advances the Tools window setting of the Show pop-up menu to the next option Command : (colon) opens the Spell checker for Edit windows Command ` (prime) cycles through open windows (like option tab) Command. (period) stops the current action Command [ stores the styles of the selected text (this may not work on all keyboards) Command ] replaces the styles of selected text with the previously stored styles (this may not work on all keyboards) Command + (=) increases the font size in the selected pane of the front window, or zooms in to a Picture, Map, or Timeline window Command - decreases the font size or zooms out Option-command A opens the Arrange Modules window Option-command C copies the selection to the clipboard without any superscript characters Control-command C copies the selected text as a citation Option-command G ungroups selected objects in the Diagram window Option-command L lets you select a root form to search Option-command M merges the front two windows into a workspace Option-command N opens the Set Window Name dialog box Option-command P opens the Print Settings dialog box Control-command P opens the Page Setup dialog box Option-command R copies only the references of the selected text Option-command S switches into and out of the Slide show Option-command T detaches the front tab Appendices B-11

340 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Option-command V sets the front window to search for verses Option-command W closes all tabs except the front tab Option-command W sets the front window to search for words Option-command? opens the relevant Accordance Help for the front window Option-command 0 (zero) hides and shows all open floating windows, or the control panel for the Slide show Option-command 7 removes all bookmarks Option-command + or - resizes the text in all panes These Shift-commands place a command in the argument entry box: Shift-command A <AND> Shift-command B <FOLLOWED BY> Shift-command C [CONTENTS windowname] Shift-command F [FIELD END] or [FIELD BEGIN] Shift-command H [HITS windowname] Shift-command K [KEY keynumber] Shift-command L [LINK windowname] Shift-command M [MERGE windowname] Shift-command N <NOT> Shift-command O <OR> Shift-command P <PRECEDED BY> Shift-command R [RANGE definition] Shift-command S [STYLE stylename] Shift-command T [TAG ] Shift-command U [COUNT #] Shift-command W <WITHIN> Shift-command X <XOR> These additional keystroke commands (not visible on the menus) perform the following actions using the control key: Control 1 through 9 changes the current search text in the top left pop-up menu to the first, second, third text, etc. Control + (=) changes the current search text to the next text Control - changes the current search text to the prior text Control or right-click overrides the amplify from a selection and opens any item in a new window B-12

341 Double- and Triple-click Amplify actions Triple-click in a text or tool pane opens the first Greek, Hebrew, or English dictionary Triple-click in a verse reference in a text pane opens the first commentary or Reference tool Triple-click in a Keyed Bible text opens the related Greek or Hebrew dictionary for that word Shift-triple-click on a word or verse reference opens the last selected tool Command-triple-click on any of the above opens the tool in a separate window instead of a tab Triple-click in other window areas selects all the text Double-click on a name in 2D Map window or Timeline opens the default English tool In summary: Double or triple-click automatic amplify + Shift goes to last tool(s) used to amplify from that pop-up menu + Command opens in a separate window Navigating windows Arrow keys move the cursor through the text, or through the selected scrolling list in a dialog Shift arrow keys select text as the cursor moves Command right and left arrow keys move the cursor to the beginning or end of the line Shift-command right and left arrow keys move the cursor to the beginning or end of the line and select the intervening text Search, Text, Reference list, and Tool Windows: Command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next verse or entry Option-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next chapter Control-option-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next book Control-command up and down arrow keys scrolls to next mark Pressing Shift with the above four command-arrows advances the text 10 times Control up and down arrow keys changes the search text to the next or prior module Edit Windows: Command up and down arrow keys scroll to next verse or article Option-command up and down arrow keys adds a note to the next verse (Notes) Tab and Page Keys: Tab goes between entry box and reference box (or additional entry boxes in tools) Shift-tab selects the next text pane Option-tab cycles through open windows Control-tab cycles through open tabs (to the right) Shift-control-tab cycles through open tabs (to the left) Command-tab cycles through open programs Page up, page down, home, and end keys work for most windows. Appendices B-13

342 B Menu Reference and Key Commands B-14 Holding down these keys affects certain other actions: Contextual menus Right click or control click in many window areas opens a pop-up menu with a selection of the available options Resource palette (key commands can be combined) Tabs Option amplify from a Keyed Bible text searches for the Greek or Hebrew word, or Key number Option amplify from a grammatically tagged text searches for inflected form Control or right-click on the Resource palette opensa new window instead of amplifying when there is a text selection Command open or amplify to any item opens an independent window instead of a tab Option drag duplicates the tab in the same or another workspace Option close tab button closes all the tabs except the one clicked Text panes Shift click access buttons advances the text 10 times Option click in text pane adds a bookmark Option click on pane font size button resizes all text panes Option click on Add pane for a Reference Tool or User Note adds the new pane in the top row Command + (=) or - (hyphen) increases or decreases the font size in the selected pane Option-command + or - resizes the text in all panes Option click on pane position button switches pane to left of the other row (instead of the right) Command click on scroll arrows to start auto-scrolling (in single pane windows) Command click on a verse reference in a tool or user tool to amplify to all the references in the paragraph Control or right click scroll in Search window disables the tied scrolling of the panes Control or right click scroll in a Parallel window ties enables or disables the tied scrolling (temporarily reverses the Tie Scrolling checkbox setting) Details Command ' (quote) in a Search window opens the Details workspace, or in a Details window brings its Search window to the front Pressing the shift key when clicking OK, return or enter in the Search window adds the new search to the current Hits Graph.

343 Copy Option Copy copies without superscript characters Control-command C copies the selected text as a citation. Option-command R copies only the references of the selected text. Shift Copy as References or Copy as Citation copies with the full book names Tools browser Option click to open the browser or on triangle scrolls and opens the browser to the selected section Option click on name selects a range for searching and displaying Shift-option click on name selects or deselects an additional range Edit window for user tools and notes Shift click access buttons goes to the next block (Tools) Option click in margin increases the level of the subtitle hierarchy (Tools) Control click in margin decreases the level of the subtitle hierarchy (Tools) Option click access buttons adds a note to the next verse (Notes) Command L adds or removes a Scripture link Command : (colon) opens the Spell checker Command F opens the Find/Replace dialog Command up and down arrow keys scroll to next verse or article Option-command up and down arrow keys adds a note to the next verse (Notes) Graphic edit windows (Construct or Diagram window or User Layer) Shift click selects multiple objects Option drag duplicates the object(s) Command G groups selected objects in the Diagram window Option-Command G ungroups selected objects in the Diagram window Edit User Layer for maps (in addition to above) Shift draw or resize oval or rectangle constrains drawing to circle or square Shift resize pasted picture restores the original perspective Command drag a Bezier point pulls out the handles Shift-command drag a handle breaks the alignment between the handles Shift-command drag a Bezier point pulls out only one handle Appendices B-15

344 B Menu Reference and Key Commands Picture, Map, and Timeline windows Command click on a thumbnail opens the picture in a new window instead of recycling an open window Command + (=) zooms in Command - zooms out Drag-select and double-click in selection zooms into the selection Shift zoom In or Out multiplies zoom by four (2D and 3D Map and Timeline) Shift-command click zooms the window in Option zoom Out zooms out to show all the picture Command drag in picture scrolls the window Command and any arrow key scrolls the window in that direction Shift click on name makes it an extra name (2D Map and Timeline) Option Copy Name in the Timeline copies the item details Double-click on a name opens and searches the default English tool (2D Map and Timeline) Option click and drag measures distances (2D and Timeline) Option click to stop the route animation displays the entire route Option Open 3D pop-up menu draws 3D map without the layers Shift 3D palette controls constrains the controls to vertical and horizontal movement Arrow Key Support for 3D Map Pressing each arrow key is equivalent to Turn in each direction. Pressing the shift key with any arrow key is equivalent to Move in that direction. Pressing the option key with the up and down arrow keys is equivalent to zoom In and Out. Pressing the option key with the left and right arrow keys is equivalent to Up and Down. Dialog Box when closing a window Pressing D or N or command D activates Don t Save Pressing escape or command-period activates Cancel Pressing Y, return, or enter activates Save B-16

345 Appendix C Names and Symbols Chapter Contents: Working with Names... C-2 Working with Symbols... C-2 Punctuation... C-6

346 C Names and Symbols Working with Names Book name abbreviations In Accordance, you can abbreviate all names of search commands and Biblical books, as long as the abbreviation is a standard abbreviation or is long enough to uniquely identify the command or book. Thus, to specify the book of Obadiah, it is enough to enter O, since no other books in the Bible begin with O. However, Joh is the minimum abbreviation necessary to distinguish John from Jonah. You can also enter some standard abbreviations such as Jn for John. The exceptions to this are Phil, which is taken to mean Philippians rather than Philemon, and Jud which is Jude rather than Judges. Standard German book names and abbreviations are also accepted. Books with numeric prefixes Some books of the Bible are normally identified with a numeric prefix, such as I Kings. In Accordance, a numeric prefix is usually written with the book name to form a single word. Thus, to specify I Kings as a reference enter 1Kings (without a space between the 1 and Kings). You can also enter 1k, since this uniquely identifies this book. If the reference is the first reference in the entry box, you may leave the space between the number and the name. Command abbreviations Most of the search commands in Accordance are unique in their very first letter. When you use the menu or keyboard shortcuts to enter search commands, the full name is entered in the argument entry box. However, if you are typing the command directly, you need only type enough of the command name to uniquely identify the command. Thus, entering <w 3 w> is the equivalent of entering <WITHIN 3 Words>. Working with Symbols C-2 Symbols can be used in various places in Accordance to specify additional constraints or to simplify input. When using the menus and dialog boxes to enter commands, most of these symbols are automatically included in the arguments at their appropriate places. You can also access the symbols through the Enter Symbol submenu (Search menu) and the contextual menu (right or control-click). A symbol menu item is dimmed whenever it is not appropriate for entry in the argument entry box. Blank or space Separates words or expressions.